Home

Topo USA 7.0 User Guide

1. sesersrsrrrrrererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrsrererererrn 192 ROOT O A A A A E anaes 193 creating a ROUTE ea a a a a a ete ese 193 Adding and Inserting Stops and ViaS ssessssererererrererrrrerrrrrrerrrrerrrrrrererrne 195 Changing the Routing Methods ccccccseseeee cece ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeegegaeeeeeetnenes 197 VIEWINOGMROULE DIFCCUIGNS ices cisnssandscei meres netics aa asians timeliness aminaah OA 197 Vil Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Avoiding a Specified Area When ROUting cccceee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeneneenes 198 Saving Route DirectiONS AS TAX cc cccccc cece cece esse eee A a aN 199 Setting Your Routing Preferences cc cccccc cece eee eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeegaeeeeseageeneenas 199 EALO a ROUCO erea E A a E E pause a A sat wieea nares exelent 200 Eding RO QOS stores ois we pete ene e E E E O a E tnrnas 201 Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote c cece cccc cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesenenees 202 MOVING Route MAD NOLES saiiinictsreaciecoieaia ers Veiga tus N E a a 202 Displaying and Centering Routes On the Map cc cece ce eee sence ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203 Savina ROUTE seerne taddaseve eee a a teens eita badder nl E TE 203 DeletnG a ROUL ee r N T pointed ade serdadadiaeee merase 204 IMD ORUING ROUTES prine ek oncaeid la 204 Converting a ROULE TO a GPS LOren lina a e irekiateiaige tin EEA 205 JNO ao rrea a n tora esse N a PoP ore a ee a eS 207 GPS OV CEVI
2. 2 Once you select the coverage area type a name for your map package in the Save your Map for Exchange text box 3 Click Save A progress bar indicates the map package creation status 30 Tutorials Step 5 Send the map package L Connect your Earthmate GPS PN 20 to your computer using the included USB cord and power it on Click E E E on the Handheld Export tab to open the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box T Earthmate GPS PN 20 Exchange Waypoint Layers Fl g Trip Waypoints Esm Track Layers Ff Routes S Saved Map Packages Camp Trip To save the map package in internal memory or on an SD card in the device select Earthmate GPS PN 20 from the drop down list in the top right corner of the dialog box OR To save the map package on an SD card with an SD card reader insert your SD card into the reader and connect it to a USB port on your computer Select the removable disk option for your SD card reader from the drop down list in the top right corner of the dialog box This is the fastest method for transferring large map packages to the device To send a custom map package click the plus sign next to Saved Map Packages in the left pane of the dialog box The available map packages display OR To send a regional map package click the plus sign next to Regional Map Packages The available regions display Click the map package you want to send to the device To save t
3. Almanac Almanac When using a DeLorme GPS receiver the Almanac window displays the satellite number and its current status N Indicates the satellite is being used for navigation E Indicates ephemeris data is available for the satellite T Indicates the satellite is currently being tracked by your GPS receiver D Indicates differential data is available for that satellite Notes e Differential data is available on WAAS enabled devices e Almanac information is available only for DeLorme receivers 216 Skyview Using GPS The Skyview diagram indicates visible satellites their number assigned by the Department of Defense and their position in the sky relative to your current position Each satellite is color coded based on the quality of data it is transmitting Gray ndicates the satellite s position in the sky Red Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite but it is not receiving data from it Yellow DeLorme GPS receivers only Indicates your receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available but the satellite is not being used for navigation Green ndicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available and the satellite is being used for navigation Dark Green WAAS enabled receivers only Indicates your receiver is tracking the satellite ephemeris data is available the satellite is being used for navigation and the satellite has
4. Deleting Maps Waypoints Routes and Tracks You can use the Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box to delete maps waypoints routes and tracks from Topo USA and from your Earthmate PN Series GPS 227 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Delete a Map Waypoint Route or Track from Topo USA To delete a route waypoint track and map that is in your current Topo USA project click to highlight the item in the left pane of the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box and then click the Delete button OR right click the item and click Delete To Delete a Map Waypoint Route or Track from an Earthmate PN Series GPS To delete a route waypoint track and map that is stored on your Earthmate PN Series GPS click to highlight the item in the right pane of the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box and then click the Delete button OR right click the item and click Delete PN 40 Sending Receiving Information Sending Receiving Maps to from an Earthmate PN 40 You can use Topo USA 7 0 to send custom map packages to your Earthmate PN 40 Use the Handheld Export tab to create custom map packages of any size that cover any location in the U S The data included in a custom map package is dependent on the data that is available for the export area as well as the preferences made in the Handheld Options settings Notes e You can transfer maps using the Data Transfer option on the device s Connect to Comput
5. 2 If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual 3 Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar 4 Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 5 Under Device Type select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device 246 O P ON p 11 12 13 14 15 Using Handheld Devices Select Receive from Device Select Track from the Object drop down list Select User Map Data Track from the Save As drop down list Click Next Select the track name or track number on the device that you want to receive Not all devices support downloading individual track logs See your device manual for more information Select the track file you want to add the track information to To create a new track file select New from the Track File drop down list and type the new track file name in the New Track File text box Optional Type a label for your track in the Track Label text box Click Receive from Device Repeat the steps for every track file you want to receive from your device Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Le Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving Waypoints From Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPS or athletic dev
6. Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the Framed Text tool OR Click the Unframed Text tool T Click the location on the map where you want to add your text A text box displays When not in editing mode you can reposition your text by dragging the text box to the new position Type the text in the text box To type more than one line of text press SHIFT ENTER on your keyboard to advance to another line Press the ENTER key on your keyboard when finished typing your text Under Layout Tools select the font style and size for your text from the drop down lists U To underline your text click the Underline tool 1 9 10 11 Printing To change the color of your text click the Font Color tool a From the Color dialog box you can e Click to select an alternative color Click OK when finished e Click Define Custom Colors and create a custom color by assigning red green blue or hue sat lum values Click Add to Custom Colors and then click OK Click the Align Left button Z to align the text in your text box to the left OR Click the Center button Z to align the text in the center of the text box OR Click the Align Right button Z to align the text in your text box to the right Click the Text Box Size button E if you want the size of your text box to grow with the amount of text typed The Text Box Size button i
7. Step 5 Collect data with your device Go on your trip and use your device to collect new data For this trip try adding some waypoints record a track and create a route See your Earthmate PN Series GPS User Manual for more information Step 6 Send information from the device back to Topo USA Once you return from your trip use the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box to receive the new waypoints tracks and routes that you created 1 Connect your computer to your device as in Step 2 2 Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar and select your device from the drop down list 3 Select the waypoints tracks and routes you want to receive into Topo USA e To receive waypoints from the device 1 On the right side of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Waypoints The waypoint files on the device display in the tree view Highlight a specific waypoint to send that waypoint or Waypoints to send all waypoint layers To send a waypoint to an existing waypoint layer in Topo USA highlight the layer that you want to receive the waypoint on the left side of the dialog box 3 Click Receive e To receive tracks from the device I 3 On the right side of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Tracks The track files on the device display in the tree view Highlight a specific track to send that track or Tracks to send all tracks Click Receive e To receive routes from the device L
8. e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment e Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit the numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes Note You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop down arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and Bearing Angle option Click Done to finish your edit OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click outside the object s active box on the map Editing a Track Once you download a track from a GPS receiver you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or width copy move or delete it at any time To Edit a Track Use the following steps to edit a track L 2 3 158 Open the project containing the draw file with the track you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the track you want to edit is not in the active draw file click File and select the draw file from the draw file dialog area Then click Done The Draw dialog area displays Click the Select tool A and click the track you want to edit e A box displays around the selected track e The shape points used to create the line display as small magenta squares Change any of the track style color or weight options of the existing track e To edit any label on a track click the Select
9. e What s the best way to measure the distance of a road or trail The best way to determine the distance of a particular road or trail is to create a route You can create a route using right click functionality the toolbar or the Route tab For more information see Creating a Route e What s the best way to measure a large area on the map The best way to measure a large area on the map Is with the area tools in the Draw tab such as the polygon tool When you draw an area object on the map the area displays next to the object on the map If you click off the object you can view the area again by clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the area object on the map For more information about drawing area objects see Drawing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map e What s the best way to measure a short distance on the map The best way to measure a short distance that is not made up of a road trail on the map is to use the Measure tool Gw on the toolbar You can measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box For instructions on using the measure tool see Measuring Distance and Area e Why won t 3 D billboards display If you receive a message saying that 3 D billboards cannot be displayed ensure that you have a 32 MB video card with the most recent drivers and that it supports DirectX and transparencies Helpful Tips These tips m
10. Date Modified Start Time ae DLC PoP BOD A2022 PMEDT 8 0 2008 4 20 cktail Pond Step 5 Convert the track to a trail To convert the track to a trail select the track in the Draw File list click the Copy To button and then click Trail The track is converted to a trail j i n i iat Ej j i lift 46 Tutorials Step 6 Join broken trail lines The large red circle indicates a break in the user trail The small red circle indicates a break between the user trail and the existing trail To ensure routability on the trail you must join the trail lines and then snap them to existing trails roads 1 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area 2 Click the Select tool A in the Draw tab press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and then click both of the trail segments Boxes display around each segment 3 Right click one of the segments point to Manage Draw and then click J oin Lines 47 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide AP ial rere Pond Step 7 Snap the new trail to an existing trail To snap the new trail to an existing road trail 1 Click the Select tool and then click the trail on the map 2 Click the pink end point of your trail that is closest to the existing road trail it will display as a red circle and drag it to the existing road trail A yellow diamond defines the snap point k 3 Release the point when the snap point displays The new trail is now snapped to
11. cececcececeeeeeeeteeeeteeneaeenens 251 Receiving Waypoints From Your Palm OS Device cccececeaceeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeenens 251 Exchanging Information with a Pocket PC Device ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeenenees 252 Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket PC De VICE cc cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 252 Sending Route Information to Your Pocket PC Device cece cccee cence ee eeeeeeeeees 253 Receiving a GPS Log From Your Pocket PC Device ccc cceee cece teense eeeeeeeeneees 254 Sending Waypoints to Your Pocket PC Device ccc cece cece eect ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 254 Sending a GPS Log to Your Pocket PC D VICE c cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneas 255 Receiving a Route From Your Pocket PC De VICE ccc cece cece eee eee teeeeeeenenees 255 Receiving Waypoints From Your Pocket PC De VICE cccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteenenees 256 SIN OU INGEN saianteii es aii St a ene creation poatnaa N 257 NEtELNK OVS FSW orainn cella ee eta nd Sarco hea Mea Rid cit sa aed aniua data EA 257 WSINnG GeORAGGel osaa edt avaduit r ERS 259 Getting Started with GEOTAGGED ccccccccee sees cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeegenneeeeeeenenas 259 tagging ania S maae a a datos sana a A aeeenaaaaeoR 259 WACO DA a E E E a te 260 Calculate the Timestamp Offset nnnsnssnsnnnnnrnrrrrrrrrersrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrene 261 SNAMI ONIME wciesetivia vena tsdanawreruinind dy peetay hernias seule ere iain aeoea 26
12. www state nd us dot road html html CC 661 0750 www hwy dot gov nt ca highways Territories Nova Nova Scotia 902 424 3933 424 3933 902 424 3933 424 3933 www gov ns www gov ns ca tran 0 267 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Turnpike 888 www buckeyetraffic org otis roads default asp 876 7453 www ohioturnpike org Oklahoma PNA 405 425 2385 www okladot state ok us Ontario Within Canada Within www mto gov on ca english 800 268 4686 Canada 800 Toronto 416 235 268 4686 4686 Toronto 416 235 4686 Oregon 511 511 www tripcheck com Outside OR 503 Outside OR 588 2941 503 588 2941 Pennsylvania 888 783 6783 888 783 6783 www dot state pa us Outside PA 717 Outside PA www paturnpike com 783 5186 717 783 5186 Turnpike 800 Turnpike 331 3414 800 331 3414 Prince Edward Charlottetown www gov pe ca roadconditions index php3 Island 902 368 4750 Georgetown 902 652 8960 Summerside 902 888 8275 Quebec 888 355 0511 888 355 0511 www mtq gouv qc ca en accueil plansite asp Rhode Island www dot state ri us webtraf index html Ne 222 4545 Saskatchewan 888 335 7623 roadinfo telenium ca shwyw html Northern SK www highways gov sk ca 306 933 8333 Southern SK 306 933 8333 South Dakota www sddot com travinfo asp oan SD 866 ee SD 697 3511 866 697 3571 Tennessee www tdot state tn us tdotsmartway 800 858 6349 800 342 3258 Texas eee 452 9292 eee 452 9292 www www dot statetx us www dot st
13. 163 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide label The anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed Use the waypoints tool to label waypoints on a map You can exchange waypoints with a GPS receiver Use symbols to identify certain areas on the map such as houses monuments or points of interest Use MapNotes to point to and label a specific area on the map See Map Notes for more information Use text labels to name features or give details about features on the map Use the image tool to add edit or place bmp jpg and gif images on the map To Add a Point Object to the Map From the Draw tab you can 164 Add a MapNote text label or symbol 1 Click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol I mage tool and select the tool you want Then select the desired font style size and color for your point object s label from the text style options 2 Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box displays 3 Click the Hyperlink button amp l and browse to the document you want to hyperlink your point object to optional The address displays in the URL field 4 Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location display in the corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes 5 Press the ENTER key
14. 3 On the right side of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Routes The routes on the device display in the tree view Highlight a specific route to send that route or Routes to send all routes Click Receive 4 Click Done to close the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box Tutorial Downloading Imagery Your purchase of Topo USA includes a Data Download Dollars certificate for 40 of imagery downloads You can download aerial satellite USGS Quad data NOAA nautical charts and more You must be a registered user to receive your imagery If you did not register during the product installation you can register using the NetLink tab 38 Tutorials Once you have used your certificate downloads the most cost effective way to purchase data is through the Map Library subscription plan Note The NetLink tab is an online connection within the application To see the most recent NetLink Help file click the blue NetLink Help button within NetLink This tutorial explains how to download color imagery Step 1 Find the area you want to download Center the map on the area for which you want to download imagery and zoom the map in to data zoom level 11 0 or greater Step 2 Activate your certificate 1 Click the NetLink tab and then click the Map Library subtab 2 The first time you open the Map Library subtab The Activation screen displays Type your certificate key in the Validation Key box to acti
15. Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Showing or Hiding Tabs The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by showing or hiding certain tabs You can access Tab Manager e During installation e After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Help menu e From the Start menu Point to Programs point to DeLorme point to Topo USA 7 0 and then click Tab Manager Note If you use Tab Manager while the program is open you must exit and restart the program to view the tab changes 80 Customizing the Map and Tab Display To Show Tabs Use the following steps to show tabs in Topo USA 7 0 using Tab Manager l 3 4 D Open Topo USA 7 0 click the Help button B T on the toolbar and select Tab Manager from the Help menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to Topo USA 7 0 and then click Tab Manager Select the check box next to each tab you want to display in the program Note Click Default to show all the tabs in the program in the default order Click OK Exit Topo USA 7 0 Open Topo USA 7 0 To Hide Tabs Hiding tabs may significantly increase the startup speed of Topo USA 7 0 Use the following steps to hide tabs in Topo USA 7 0 using Tab Manager 1 Open Topo USA 7 0 click the Help button B T on the toolbar and select Tab Manager from the Help menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme
16. Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and click the draw object you want to move A box displays around the active object Draw objects are moved in different ways If the object is Routable Road Routable Press and hold the SHIFT key on your Trail Track Line Arc Spline keyboard and drag the object to the new Polygon Rectangle or Circle location OR Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the object up down right or left Symbol or Text Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the object up down right or left OR Drag it to the new location MapNote To move the entire MapNote press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard and drag the object to the new location or position your cursor between the MapNote text and the anchor and drag the entire MapNote to the desired location OR To move the MapNote s anchor drag the MapNote s anchor to the new location OR To move the MapNote s text drag the MapNote s text to the desired location 149 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Tip To undo a draw object move click the Undo button S to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button aj Notes You can also move draw objects or their points by typing a new coordinate or distance and bearing angle number within the corresponding text boxes Type new coordinates and click Apply to move circles symbols text and MapNotes The whole object m
17. Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Send to Device Select Route Points from the Object drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route points you want to send to your device 10 To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points See your device manual for more information 11 Click Send to Device 12 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device 13 Click Finish To Send Route Directions Use the following steps to send route directions to your GPS device Li 2 Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual 243 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide ei
18. END 43 807629 70 163801 43 807211 70 162746 43 806 707 70 163400 43 806696 70 163905 43 807125 70 164768 43 807801 70 164440 END BEGIN ARC 43 807801 70 164440 43 807704 70 162775 43 807211 70 162746 43 807430 70 163644 END BEGIN POLY 43 808692 70 165392 43 808692 70 162493 43 806621 70 162493 43 806621 70 165392 43 808692 70 165392 END BEGIN CIRCLE 43 807662 70 163935 0 114611 END BEGIN SYMBOL 43 807662 70 163935 DeLorme Blue Pin END BEGIN NOTE 43 807662 70 163935 DeLorme END BEGIN TEXT 43 807662 70 163935 DeLorme END Using the Draw Tools Copying a Map Line to a Draw File You can copy a line directly from the map to a draw file using the right click feature Map lines that you can copy to draw objects include segments of all types of roads and highways railroads power lines pipelines rivers or streams and grid lines To Copy a Map Line Use the following steps to copy a map line to a draw file 1 Pan the map and zoom to the data zoom level OR Open the project with the map view you want 2 Right click the object on the map you want to bring into the draw file point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object in the list The object is copied into the draw file using the current line style selections Saving a Track as a GPS Log You can save any track as a GPS Log using the right click feature To Save a Track as a
19. Sat 10 e USGS Quads 3DTQ e NOAA nautical charts The only data types that you can view in the right map window are Topo USA data and 3 D TopoQuads data To view 3 D TopoQuads data in the right map window you must disable your Topo USA data connection and enable only the 3 D TopoQuads data connection The dataset that displays in the left map window is dependent on the selection made in the data drop down list that displays at the top of the left map window You can use the Hybrid Map option to view roads contours and points above imagery and data For more information see the Downloading Imagery tutorial 91 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Saving Topo USA Data to Your Hard Drive If you did not install all of the available data to your computer s hard drive during installation you can do so anytime Saving data to your hard drive makes it readily available and improves performance To Save Topo USA Data to Your Hard Drive Use the following steps to save Topo USA data to your hard drive 1 Close all programs on your computer 2 Use your computer s Control Panel to locate the program and click Change The modify installation screen opens OR Insert the Topo USA 7 0 DVD into your DVD ROM drive Browse to the DVD drive on your computer and view the contents Double click setup exe The modify installation screen opens 3 Ensure Modify is selected and click Next The Regional Data Install Options screen opens 4
20. Use the following steps to import a custom scheme S options l 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 2 Click File and then click Import The Import Scheme File dialog box displays 3 Browse to the location where you saved the keyscheme file select it and then click Open The imported file is now your active scheme Exporting a Custom Scheme You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users To Export a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to export a custom scheme g Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 2 Select the scheme you want to export from the Scheme drop down list 3 Click File and then click Export The Export Scheme File dialog box displays 88 Using Keyboard Shortcuts 4 Type a name in the File Name text box browse to the location where you want to save the keyscheme file and then click Save Searching For Commands The Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box has a Search feature that lets you search for a specific command or command group Note You can sort the command list view at any time by clicking the heading you want to sort by Group Command or Shortcut To Search For a Command or Command Group Use the following steps to search for a command or command group g Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyb
21. Use the following steps to send routes to your Earthmate PN 40 GPS 1 Connect the Earthmate PN 40 to your computer with the USB cable and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears 230 Using Handheld Devices 2 On the device highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER 3 In Topo USA click the Exchange button i on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens 4 Inthe left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Routes and then click the route you want to send to the Earthmate PN 40 OR To send all routes just click Routes 5 Click Send A progress bar indicates the copy status 6 Click Done To Receive Routes Use the following steps to receive routes from your Earthmate PN 40 GPS 1 Connect the Earthmate PN 40 to your computer and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears 2 On the device highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER 3 In Topo USA click the Exchange button i on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens 4 Inthe right pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Routes and then click the route you want to receive into Topo USA OR To receive all routes just click Routes 5 Click Receive A progress bar indicates the copy status 6 Click Done Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE exchange on the Handheld Export tab or the GPS tab Sending Receiving Tracks to from Ea
22. User Guide 2 Select the measurement from the Measurements drop down list e Statute Miles statute feet are used for small distances e Kilometers Meters are used for small distances e Nautical Miles Feet statute feet are used for small distances e Nautical Miles Meters meters are used for small distances 3 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box To Change the Bearing Preferences Bearing listings are created as the result of creating route directions in the Route tab or from an Advanced Distance From search in the Find tab Bearing refers to the compass direction of a given object measured clockwise in degrees for example 30 or nearest compass point for example NNE and indicated from True North or Magnetic North Notes e Magnetic declination is the difference in degrees between True North and Magnetic North at a specific location e The bearing setting does not affect map appearance Use the following steps to change the bearing l FE Options l 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Display tab 2 Select the bearing from the Bearing drop down list e True North The direction to the north pole This is the default setting for Topo USA 7 0 e Magnetic North The direction that a compass needle points 3 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR
23. a NEW Custom SCHEMC sweiuriseresaaiveadsnannade devs vaaldnadew enna a ae aE 85 Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom SCHEME cece cece eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 85 Customizing a DeLorme SCHEM Cec tereson aces tetcisen creer tener ean 87 RENAMING a CUSLONI S CHEM Cressitcasverireraherestnt shaw r A Rei 87 Deleting a CUSTOM SCENE nere rira a oa o o 88 Importing a C stom SCheme seee a a a E nantes 88 EXpOrming a CUSEOM SCNEM EC aada e E aa a laa 88 Searching FOF COMMA S iii a a e r baal 89 Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme ssserererrererrrrererrrrerrrrrrererrne 89 Table Of Contents Viewing and Connecting Imagery and Data ccccccccececseeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneas 91 Connecting Data to TODO USA sisincrcinietiadesonpersmined tivintesrne te cavtee E uses 91 Viewing Data Ini TODO USA niire rE enna AEA A a Geen 91 Saving Topo USA Data to Your Hard Drive sssssesesrersrrerererrererrrrrrerrererrrrrrere 92 Creating Editing and Saving ProjectS ssssssserrrererererersrsrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrene 93 MaD FIRES OV CEVIGW noniin E E I N A ne 93 Creating and Deleting Projects ccc ccccce eee e ee eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeseeneeeesteeaaeeesenages 93 Opening an EXiStinG Project eners roerien ia ewes Giba ladies tin ieswelawse Nee wlieres 94 Edn ar OCC aE a pacientes eee el euae ceeded eee herniaaeannemerbantammncas 95 Savno a PhO SGU rrena a ok tena ion bea ed Sie aera 95 Creating Ira
24. csv text file format from the Save as Type drop down list DeLorme Address Book files retain all of their information and can be imported into compatible DeLorme programs Comma separated files do not contain coordinate information Text files can be viewed in third party applications such as Microsoft Excel 7 Click Save 8 Click OK to acknowledge the export location 9 Click Done Relocating Address Book Contacts Once you import an address book from a previous version of your application you can relocate your address book entries except for manual entries so they match the most recent data You are prompted to do this the first time you open the address book after installing a new version of your application however if you do not relocate the entries at that time you can do it later Important If you do not relocate your address book the entries may not be accurately placed according to the latest DeLorme road data To Relocate Contacts In Your Address Book Use the following steps to relocate address book entries except manual entries on the map 1 Click the Find tab 117 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box displays 3 Click Relocate All A confirmation message displays asking you if you re Sure you want to relocate the entries 4 Click OK to relocate the entries 118 Printing Printing a Map You can print a 2 D or 3 D map bas
25. displays next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken Note When you pass over a point in a road measurement line or measurement area to which you can snap a yellow circle defines the snap point Click to snap the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object s point coordinate Press and hold the ALT key on your keyboard to disable snapping 3 To end a measurement line double click the last point of the measurement line The measure line displays as a two pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line displays in a label at each endpoint of the line 4 To end a measure area hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle displays and then double click the last point to the starting point The perimeter measurements display To Get Information About a Location Use the Information button G on the toolbar to click a point symbol feature measurement line track or area on the map to identify it and view detailed information about it Use the following steps to get information about a particular map feature 1 Click the Information button 2 Click the map feature you want information for such as a road town measurement line waypoint track draw symbol or point of interest The Info tab opens and displays a list of information categories Note Descriptive information may include a name or feature type 66 Using the Toolbar length area ZIP Code town
26. except for land which displays as black Routable Trail Features Topo Street Description Colors Colors Major Trail Important Some trails may cross private property Contact the applicable trail department to ensure you have the appropriate permissions before following a major trail For contact information see Recreational Contacts ee ee 4 wheel Drive Trail ee ee Trail Walkway Foot Trail Routable Road Features Colors Colors S Ferry Passenger SS Fery Vehide _ interstate Highway can also include this symbol h bimited accessRoad boca Major connector Forest Road ooo Minor Connector Non Limited Access interstate O o Primary State Route State Route can also include this symbol D TonRoad U S National Route can also include this symbol WW e Unclassified Road _ unimproved Roac 59 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Land Cover Colors Colors nh Bare Bare Rock or Sand Bare Rock or Sand Sand a i aa _ Bureau of Mine Reclamation Land Forest evergreen Forest mixed O fO tceorsnowfels o _ indian Reservation at data zoom level 1D Indian Reservation at data zoom level 2 thru 10 7 B Intermittent water oo To o L E Mittary area at data znomlevel 11 __ Military Area at data zoom level 2 thru 10 7 ae ao Sarai or Gamers 60 Map Legend Point Features Street Colors Colors
27. lm A TTA jretton Woods F a ets A A i ae a a 1 i J Y oath Tas A ae Ale arnt t inte A Ae Sees Att ered ie oe ee hee fie Pel eee Sr ie OO Pee ne are a a iira w pie ana h we ee e gue ae 55 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Step 3 Open the GPS log file Open the newly created GPS Log file using the GPS Log subtab in the GPS tab Jee Step 4 Play the GPS log file Click the Play button to play back the GPS Log file Step 5 Adjust 3 D settings Use the tools in the 3 D tab to adjust the rotation pitch and more Step 6 View the map in 3 D Drag the resize tool to the right or double click the bar above the right arrow to view the map in full 3 D mode Make sure 3 D is selected in the select map view drop down list 56 Tutorials Tousa ous sees fo me ja ACN ah tee ie Step 7 View the GPS log file playback in 3 D Use the tab area resize tool to minimize the tab area and view the GPS log file playback with a hands free full 3 D experience 57 Map Legend The features that display on the map may display differently depending on which map colors you chose in the Display tab of the Options dialog box The tables below show the symbolization of each feature by map color Notes e Not all features are available at all zoom levels e Not all features are available in all datasets e High contrast Color features display the same as Street Color features
28. of the fill options The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected Click the Select tool A and then click the area object on the map A box displays around the object indicating that it is active Click the object again A text box displays Type the label in the text box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Editing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Once you have created an area draw object you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or weight copy move or delete at any time To Edit a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Use the following steps to edit an area draw object 1 2 3 162 Open the project containing the draw file with the area object you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the object you want to edit is not in the active draw file click File and select the draw file from the draw file dialog area Then click Done The Draw dialog area displays Click the Select tool A and then click the object on the map A box displays around the object indicating that it is active OR To edit multiple objects click the Select tool A and then drag a box around the objects that you want to edit Change the object s fill outline and or width option OR If you selected a single circle drag one of the magenta squares around the circle to c
29. the draw objects you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button in the Draw dialog area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard OR Right click the object and then click Manage Draw Delete Draw Object A message box displays asking if you want to delete the draw objects from the current file e If you click Yes all selected draw objects in the file are deleted You cannot undo this action e If you click No no objects are cleared from the file To Delete All Draw Objects To delete all draw objects from an unsaved draw file click a draw object icon that represents the draw file you want to clear for example if you want to clear a RoadLayer click the Routable Roads icon and then click Clear All A message box displays asking if you want to clear all draw objects from the current file e If you click Yes all draw objects in the file are cleared You cannot undo this action e If you click No no objects are cleared from the file 151 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Snapping Draw Objects You can snap any draw object to the exact coordinates of a point in another draw object You can also snap the central shape point of an arc to another object To Snap a Draw Object to the Coordinates of Another Object Use the following steps to snap a draw object to the coordinates of another draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and then click the draw object on the map A box displays around the ac
30. 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 Double click the route in the route list on the left Tip To center a route that is not in the current map view click the Route tab click the New Edit subtab and select the route from the Name drop down list Saving a Route The route in memory is retained as you create it You are prompted to save your route when you create a new project or exit the program 203 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e Creating a New Project When you click File New on the Files dialog area on the Map Files tab you are asked if you want to save changes to the most recently used project A separate dialog box asks if you want to save changes to an unsaved route e Exiting Topo USA The Save Changes dialog box asks if you want to save your changes You can also save the route using the Route tab Routes have anr extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Navigation directory by default To Save a Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to save a route using the Route tab 1 Create a route 2 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab 3 Click File and then click Save Deleting a Route You can delete routes permanently To Delete a Route Use the following steps to delete a route 1 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab 2 Select the route from the Name drop down list 3 Click File and then click Delete OR Ri
31. 110 Maximum Elevation 000ees 182 WEAS UC ccs icadauk tmeuned E i a 66 Measurements 000ceees 16 66 78 Measuring Distance and Area 16 Minimum and Maximum Elevation 185 Minimum Elevation 00eeeee 182 Monitoring GPS Satellite Information EE E E E E E 216 Monitoring Your GPS Status 215 Moving a Contact s Location On the Ute DA TE ee ner ir anne CaS ee tes 115 Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File rapera e tacos 147 Moving Draw Objects 005 149 Moving Route MapNotes 202 N Name and or Category 65 102 NEGLI Kararria 257 NOTING eaccsesoumeiceneuverscar tenets 182 O One Way S cicctosasrehcnarstdee caneteinteaedus 74 Opening a Project cceceeeee seen ees 94 Opening a Symbol Set 5 178 Options Dialog BOX ceeeee eens 67 Overview Map ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 P Panning the Map cceeceeeeeeees 14 Panning the Map Automatically While GPS TRACKING are raa 211 Parks Or Reserves cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Pasting a Bitmap into XSym 173 Places Minor ccceeeeeeee eee eeeeees 74 Placing draw objects 159 163 166 Playing Back a Log File 212 PN 27 32 36 227 228 230 231 233 234 287 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide PN20 27 36 227 235 237 239 240 242 PINAZO crsanevincrniveniageubsieenteptnerdwtee 27 RNs ZO or eea a E 27 PING
32. 290
33. 4656 Hyatt Hotels and Resorts 800 633 7313 InterContinental Hotels 888 303 1758 Reservations 800 424 6835 La Quinta Inns 866 725 1661 Reservations 800 642 4271 Loews Hotel 800 23 LOEWS Reservations 866 563 9792 MainStay Suites 877 424 6423 Marriott Hotels 888 236 2427 Reservations 888 236 2427 U S and Canada Microtel Inn 800 721 7171 Reservations 800 771 7171 Motel 6 800 4MOTEL6 Reservations 888 444 6664 270 Renaissance Hotels Residence Inn by Marriott Rodeway Inn Sheraton Hotels amp Motor Inns Shoney s Inn Signature Inn Sleep Inn Staybridge Suites Super 8 Motels Inc Travelodge amp Viscount Hotels W Hotels Westin Hotels amp Resorts Wyndham Hotels and Resorts Car Rental Information Car Rental Company Alamo Avis Budget Dollar Enterprise Hertz National Payless RentaWreck Thrifty Recreational and Travel Contact Information 800 HOTELS1 800 SLEEP INN Reservations 877 424 6423 800 238 8000 800 800 8000 800 578 7878 888 625 5144 Reservations 877 946 8357 888 625 5144 Reservations 800 937 8461 877 999 3223 Phone Number 800 GO ALAMO 800 230 4898 Rates and Reservations 800 331 1212 271 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Airline Information American Airlines Canadian North 800 661 1505 Outside Canada 867 873 4484 Canjet 800 809 7777 Continental Airlines 800 525 0280 Reservations 800 523 3273 U S and Mexico Haw
34. 7 0 SP 1 User Guide copy your profile to the clipboard so that you can paste it into a graphics program such as Microsoft Paint or Adobe Photoshop When you copy the map to the clipboard the map is saved at current monitor resolution If you want to print all of the profile s Statistical Data Options select the Profile Stats check box The statistics are printed on the same page as the profile Optional Click the Save button Hl to save your profile as a bitmap or J PEG image Rename the file if necessary and click Save Optional To view a preview of your selection click View Click Print to print the map using the selected print options Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map You can add text framed or unframed and graphics north arrows scale bars images to your map e To modify the properties of a text graphic item click the Select tool k and click the item on the map e To make graphic items added to your map the same size press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard or drag to select two items right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the shortcut menu e After you add text graphic items to your map you can align snap or layer them on the map To Add Text to Your Map Use the following steps to add text to your map 1 2 122 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map
35. Exchange to locate the covered regions This is not an individual phone search Coordinate A single result is returned using a Coordinate search There are no Within options Coordinates must be in one of the many formats recognized by the program and are based on your Display settings in the Options dialog box 3 From the Within drop down list select an option Available choices are based on what you selected as your Find type Click a Within type in the following list for more information United States Searches for a name within the entire United States This option is available only when Name or ZIP Code is selected as the Find parameter City or County Searches for the specified name within the ZIP Codes associated with the city county and state specified in the text boxes ZIP Code Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Code Displays a ZIP Code text field A search for a ZIP 4 Code Is treated the same as a five digit ZIP Code U S State Searches for a name such as a lake name trail name etc within a specific U S state This option is available only when Category or Name and or Category is selected as the Find parameter 103 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Tips Note If you are searching within a larger state this type of search may take longer than others because a lot of data is being searched to obtain a result e Current Map City Searches for the specified name within the boundaries of all ZI
36. GPS Log Use the following steps to save a track as a GPS log 1 Place a track on the map 2 Right click the track point to Manage Draw and then click Save as GPS Log File 3 Browse to the location where you want to save the gpl file The default location is C DeLorme Docs GPSLogs 4 Type the file name in the File Name text box 5 Click Save The original track is retained in its draw file and a new GPS log is created Viewing the Contents of a Draw File Once you create a draw file draw road trail waypoint or track layer you can view the contents of that file using the More button in the File view of the Draw tab To View the Contents of a Draw File Use the following steps to view the contents of a draw road trail waypoint or track file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 3 Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to view 4 Click More The tab area increases in height and the file contents table displays The 143 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 144 10 information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected e Draw layer contents include the draw object label name comments about the draw object the URL assigned when the draw object was added to the map the date and time the object was last modif
37. GPS device to follow clues to caches hidden by other geocachers Topo USA 7 0 has several features designed to enhance the interaction between a GPS device and the cache information provided at Geocaching The Official Global GPS Cache Hunt Site e Use the import file option in the Draw tab to import e Geocaching com Location loc files These files contain the cache code cache name and the latitude and longitude for the cache location e GPS Exchange gpx files have full cache descriptions and hints that you can view in the Waypoint comment field e POI Factory Garmin CSV csv files store waypoint location data for custom points of interest e Imported caches appear with a hidden cache symbol on your map you can change it to a found cache symbol once you find the cache 134 Using the Draw Tools When you import geocaches you create a link back to the detailed www geocaching com website from each waypoint Cache descriptions and hints that appear in the Waypoint comment field on the Draw tab also appear in the comment field on Earthmate PN Series GPS devices allowing you to view important information while out looking for your caches Draw File Management Creating a New Draw File There are five different types of draw files DrawLayer Created when you add a line arc spline circle rectangle polygon symbol MapNote or text label to the map RoadLayer Created when you add a routable road TrailLaye
38. ME in the Search For text box Click Search The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text box The symbol name displays in the Name column Double click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on the map The map view centers on the item A MapTag displays the symbol name at the symbol location Note To display MapTags select the MapTags check box on the Find tab Tips on Viewing Search Results These tips can help you view Find tab search results 106 To make it easier to view a long list of search results increase the height of the tab by dragging the top of the tab area up or by clicking the increase up tab height arrow mick A at the top of the tab To sort results by another column click the column header An arrow identifies the sort column Click a second time to reverse the sort order Note This feature is not available when in browse mode see last item in this list To copy the information for the selected item or items press CTRL C on your keyboard You can then paste the text into another program such as a word processing program Right click an item in the results list A shortcut menu displays the following items Copy to Clipboard Copies the detailed information for the selected item or items and is available for pasting into another program Go To Centers the map on the selected item Select All Selects all items in
39. Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the image s width to height ratio while resizing Select the Preview Image check box to preview the image on the map Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map After you add a text or graphic tool to your map you can use the right click functionality to align each object with a certain location on the map Aligning Multiple Text and Graphic Items on Your Map Use the following steps to align multiple text and graphic items on the map 1 2 124 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Place more than one text or graphic item on your map For more information see Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map While pressing the SHIFT key on your keyboard click each text graphic item on the map OR Printing Drag your mouse over the text graphic items on the map to select multiple items at once 4 Right click one of the items and then select Align from the shortcut menu Then click e Left to align the left sides of all of the items placement is based on the left side of the left most item e Right to align the right sides of all of the items placement is based on the right side of the right most item e Top to align the top side of all of the items placement is based on the top side of the top most item e Bottom to align the bottom side of all of the items placement is based on the bottom side of the bottom most item e Vertical Center to center the items
40. N EE ane 20 CONTOIPaNe lerin A a ela ata 21 OVERVIEW Ma Donerer a a E A a A E AA 21 TOOIDGN rerieisrrroteere aani aa aeo e e ra e ea 22 USING the HEID SY SES Meroena aea aa a a ae a 23 HEIM OVEKVICW dirai a AA A A A O a 23 USING the elDeS Y SEEM inaiienladtagninrtvekd ewan iiai aa aa a aA 23 Help Documentation CONVENTIONS ccccececcee eee e teen eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeeteneas 25 MS CF RU Se ctataveed accede haar upon E ice eet wd A He aac ew eR PO tt 26 TEE ONS ete Sethu acca cece ua aouiea ne fail nals E E pened peasant ae ie ace ete 27 Tutorial Creating Maps for an Earthmate PN Series GPS ccceeee cece eeeeeeeeeees 27 Creating Maps for an Earthmate GPS PN 20 ccc cece cece eee ee nese eeeeeeeeeenaaes 27 Creating Maps for an Earthmate GPS PN 40 nnnnannnanenersrsrsrnrnrererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 32 Tutorial Exchanging Data with an Earthmate PN Series GPS ccceeeeee eee e ees 36 Tutorial Downloading Imagery ccccceceeteteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteeeeeenas 38 TMUtehlal Creating a ROUTE icici nastier a hati nntineaehess a iene ade aatadies 42 Tutorial Converting Tracks into TrallS cccc cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeneas 44 TUCK al USING MAD SNAlE vevinisactiantionsatviinshaaiey ike A leases nee 48 T toralk VY WO M BD cigs tries alae tab sachet ncn dh edhe Niet TA bch a EAEE 54 Wa Legend erii E EE retain tiem aan aA 59 USING hE TOOIDIT asrina n a A E a a a
41. Pocket PC device Click the Exchange button i on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Send to Device Select Route Points from the Object Type drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route points you want to send to your device Click Prepare for Sync Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 10 Repeat the steps for each route you want to send to your device 11 Click Finish The route points are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation eo eS Se O o To Send Route Directions Use the following steps to send route directions to your Pocket PC device Click the Exchange button i on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Send to Device Select Route Directions from the Object Type drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route directions you want to send to your device Click Prepare for Sync 9 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 10 Repeat the steps for each route you want to send to your device 11 Click Finish The route directions are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Ze Exchange on the GPS
42. The last saved map view for that project displays OR Click the project to select it and then click Open The last saved map view for that project displays You can also e Open a project by clicking the Open button Tl on the toolbar e Open a project by dragging and dropping the project into Topo USA from Windows Explorer e View the most recently saved projects by clicking File Recent Files and then clicking the project you want to open on the Map Files tab e Click the arrow next to the toolbar button to open a menu Then click Open Topo Project to open the Open File dialog box OR click a recently saved project in the list 94 Creating Editing and Saving Projects Editing a Project As you create new routes and draw objects they are added to the current project You can also pan and zoom the map as needed and then save all these project changes To Add Delete Files Contained in a Project Use the following steps to add or delete specific files contained in a particular project in Topo USA using the Map Files tab 1 Open a project 2 Click File click Current View and then click Contents to view the contents of the project e To add a file click Add and then click Draw Files or Route Files Then select the file you want to add to the current project Note Ifa file is added to a project and then changed later the file is updated in every project it has been added to e To remove a route or draw file
43. To add a title or notes to your route map type the appropriate information in the text boxes and click Next 50 Tutorials Share Route Directions Montezuma C to General Notes Step 5 Add notes to the directions Then if you would like to add notes to display with your directions type them in the Notes text box and click Next 51 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Share Route Directions Tum Tighten Lay st 00 00 00 0 07 mi HSW fto Tum right on ere ren tid igt en CR 275 Sts John Rd ooms Step 6 View upload confirmation A message telling you that your map has been uploaded successfully to the MapShare site displays Click Next 52 Tutorials Share Route Directions Your route map and directions has been uploaded successfully to the MapShare site Click Next to preview the route map and directions and get a link to their location or e mail the route and directions to a Mend or an associate Step 7 Preview or e mail the route Click E mail the MapShare Link for Your Route Map and Directions to e mail a link of your route map and directions This option is available only if an e mail program is detected If an e mail program is not detected copy and paste the link provided into your online e mail program AND OR Click Preview Your Route Map and Directions to preview your route map and directions as they appear on the MapShare site Note Print your route map and directions from
44. Tools Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files You can export track or waypoint files as GPX files GPX files derived from tracks contain the elevation time and GPS status for each point in the track GPX files derived from a waypoint file include the waypoint name comment URL lat lon elevation time GPS status and the symbol name You cannot export more than one waypoint track layer into a single GPX file To Export Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files Use the following steps to export an existing track or waypoint file to a GPX file 1 Open the project containing the track or waypoint file you want to export OR Create a new track or waypoint file for exporting 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map The Active column Shows the active layers 4 Select the track or waypoint file to export from the file list 5 Click Export The Export Draw File dialog box displays 6 Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination C DeLorme Docs Export 7 Select GPX File from the Save as Type drop down list 8 Type a name for the file in the File name text box The default name is DrawExport 9 Click Save 10 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Importing Files to Draw Files You can import many types of files as draw files The file items display as draw objects within the draw file
45. Use the following steps to receive tracks from your Earthmate PN 40 GPS 1 232 Connect the Earthmate PN 40 to your computer with the USB cable and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears On the device highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER In Topo USA click the Exchange button i on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens In the right pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Tracks and then click the track you want to receive into Topo USA OR If you want to receive all tracks just click Tracks In the left pane of the dialog box click the track layer where you want to receive the track or tracks If you want to copy the track information into a new track layer click New and then click Track Layer Notes e If you do not perform this step and an existing track layer is highlighted in the left pane of the dialog box the track is received in that layer If a non track option is highlighted for example a waypoint layer a new track layer is automatically created e If you use the Exchange dialog box to send the active track to Topo USA the file name displays as a time date stamp based on the time date information in the active track Click Receive A progress bar indicates the copy status Click Done Using Handheld Devices Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending
46. ZO rodera d E E E 36 PNZ Otranen a a eelatee A 227 PING 20i E gianis oie 235 PINAZ O EE E E TT 237 PINS 2 rioga a O 239 PNS 2 Orrin ma a E EEE 240 PIN 2 Oceni E T nas 242 PN40 27 32 36 227 228 230 231 233 234 PNeA 0 cnar TA 27 PN A Ooan r 32 PN 4 0 crdseuicinareee a erer eree 36 PN 4O reete AN A 227 PNA O i a eaten 228 PNO eo a EA 230 PNA Oranen O R 231 PN 4 0 st oieutieye vinden ee i 233 PNA Oo wtidd cuit a ides 234 POIL SOAL enira 105 Points of Interest Major 74 Points of Interest Minor 74 POS irr E AT 105 POIN GO oren a A 161 Previewing a GPS Log File 213 Print 15 63 119 120 121 124 126 199 Print Maps with a Transparent BacCKOrOUNO oien e aa 126 Print Maps With a Yellow Black BACKOrOUNA cceee eee eeeeee ees 126 Print Preview ccccceeeeseeeeeeeees 119 Panino aM A inchs nceisscanessasaesitions 119 Printing a Profile cceeeee eens 121 Printing a Route and Directions 120 Profile 65 179 180 182 185 186 Profile Elevation Graphs 180 PROG Stats piisisatemarerteiiewiyes 121 Projects 63 93 94 95 96 98 Publicly Managed Lands 5 74 288 Q QUICKS CARCI i simnavsensdecasinanaa etecevies 106 R Recalculate When Off Route 207 Receiving a GPS Log 250 254 Receiving a Route 245 251 255 Receiving a TraCK cce cece eee eees 246 Recei
47. a map package to send to your device you can customize the types of data and imagery you include such as draw files excluding waypoints and tracks imagery downloaded from NetLink and Topo USA data Tip Topo USA 7 0 Data series is the same data that is on the detailed data DVDs that came with your Earthmate PN Series GPS If you installed the detailed data for the map you are creating clear the Topo USA 7 0 Data Series check box on the Handheld tab of the Options dialog box so you do not duplicate data in your map If you have routes tracks and waypoints in your Topo USA project those items are Saved separately from the map package so you can manage them independently When you open the Exchange dialog to send the map package to your device the individual elements of your project appear in the left tree menu When you send a map package to your device you must also send the routes waypoints tracks and maps separately You can send maps to an SD card or to the device s internal memory You can send routes tracks and waypoints to only the device s internal memory For more information about exchanging route waypoints and tracks see the Exchanging Data with an Earthmate PN Series GPS tutorial Waypoint Layers Pikes Peak t Camp ep Track Layers a Cog Railway lt gt fe Routes amp Us 24to US 4h Hi Saved Map Packages ey Pikes Peak To Create a Map Package The tutorials for creating maps for a
48. a oY aR i 9 Click the Exchange button on the toolbar Under Device Type select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Send to Device Select Route Directions from the Object drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route directions you want to send to your device Designate a route name and or a route number for the file on the device device dependent 10 To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points See your device manual for more information 11 Click Send to Device 12 Repeat the steps for each route file you wan to send to your device 13 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending Tracks to Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to send tracks to your device To Send Tracks Use the following steps to send tracks to your device L 2 UR a a Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS device you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see
49. ake orien 145 Changing Draw Opject TY PES wisaiieivtieteteteuntindieeindliteiclversialinnsdeeviawis ted eeewn sun 145 Creating a Direct Route from a Line Object cece cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenas 146 Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another ccceeeeee cece eeeeees 147 Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File cccceeee cece cece eeeeeeeneneeees 147 USING ID FAW ODECE nur E a maka tains eames anaes N EAN 148 Copying and Placing Draw Objects ccc cece cece cece eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeengs 148 MOVING Draw OD CCtS sii hadccrevyyinaadeewerner de wieeiesninavale bo dhiaedy lana daeundamene sind 149 Renaming a Draw OD CCU ssi ainciautaccatwne meatier E A anes A E OEA 150 Deleting Draw ODJ EC nina E O T ha oka rea aeeee arena 150 Shap ine Diaw ODES erase tinea tees lange E E Vinten 152 Adding Points to Draw Objects cece cece eee eeee ee ee nese ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteneseaenneegs 153 Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects cc ccc eeee cece eee eeee ees 153 kapenga Draw OD CCE ase ncdeabnie e a aE aA 154 Routable Roads Trails Tracks Lines Arcs ANd SPLINES ccc cece essen eee eens 154 Drawing Routable Roads or Trails On the Map cccccccceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 154 Drawing a Line Arc or Spline ON the Map ccccccee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenenees 155 Drawing a Track on the Map ccceee cece cece ee eeeee
50. also delete multiple or all draw objects in the active draw file To Delete One Draw Object Use the following steps to delete a draw object 1 150 Open the existing project that contains the draw object you want to delete Using the Draw Tools 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click the Select tool A and then click the draw object on the map to select it A box displays around the selected object 4 Click Delete in the Draw dialog area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard OR Right click the object and then select Manage Draw Delete Draw Object Tip To bring back the last draw object you deleted click the Undo button to undo the last action You can undo approximately 200 events in a single project Note You can also delete a draw object using the right click feature in the draw file list Click the File button in the Draw tab click to select the Draw File that contains the object you want to delete click More right click the object and then click Delete To Delete Multiple Draw Objects Use the following steps to delete several draw objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 To select multiple draw objects click the Select tool A click the first draw object on the map to select it and then press and hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard while clicking each additional draw object you want to delete A box displays around each selected object OR To select multiple draw objects click the Select tool k drag a box over
51. and preference settings as needed Before beginning your GPS setup read the user manual for your GPS receiver Also ensure you have the appropriate cable and any necessary adapters to connect your GPS receiver to the communications port of your laptop computer If you have an Earthmate GPS device it is not necessary to follow these instructions Your device is automatically enabled when it is connected J ust click Start GPS to begin tracking 207 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Initialize Your GPS Receiver The initializing process can take several minutes before the program detects the correct communications COM port and updates the current settings Use the following procedure to initialize your GPS receiver for use with Topo USA 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your user manual and then turn the receiver on if necessary 2 Click the GPS tab and then click Clear Trail to delete any GPS points from the current map display J5 options 3 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the GPS Settings tab OR Click the GPS tab to open it and click the Options button EE Ontions 4 Select any or all of the following check boxes and click OK when finished The description is for the state when the check box is selected OR Start GPS Log Automatically generates a GPS log Use High Contrast Colors Automatically enables high contrast map color
52. based on the average of the vertical placement of the items e Horizontal Center to center the items based on the average of the horizontal placement of the items e Center to center the items based on the center of the average area that the items cover on the map e Stack Vertically to stack the items vertically on top of each other e Stack Horizontally to position the items side by side Tips To make multiple graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the shortcut menu When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change Important For an item to be made the same size as another item the item must not be locked for example the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box Should be cleared for any images only text items with default size text boxes can be resized and so on To delete multiple text or graphic items select the Edit tool drag the mouse on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map After you add a text or graphic tool to your map you can snap each item to the location you want it by dragging the item along the edges of the map or by dragging the item to snap it to the horizontal center of the page To disable the auto snap function hold do
53. bottom center of the text label box and are only visible during a snap Points in MapNotes MapNotes do not have shape or end points They contain an anchor point at the end of the text box Clicking the MapNote displays a central crosshair at the anchor point 133 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Viewing Hidden Draw Tools The Draw tab tools allow you to add routable roads waypoints tracks lines straight lines arcs and splines shapes polygons rectangles and circles MapNotes text labels images and symbols to a draw file Some of these tools are hidden tools available in pull out menus To View the Hidden Draw Tools Five draw tool options have pull out menus with hidden tools These draw tools each have a small arrow at the bottom right of the draw tool button as shown in this sample ej Use the following steps to view the hidden draw tools 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold one of the visible tools shown below to display and select one of the options Selecting a hidden tool changes the default option Routable Roads Routable Trails Tool al Ki PP Tracks Waypoints Tool z C w Line Arc Spline Tool Polygon Rectangle Circle Tool MapNote Text Label Symbol Image Tool UTH Geocaching Features Geocaching is a fun outdoor activity that uses a GPS device for treasure hunting Geocaching is enjoyed by all kinds of people from families with small children to active outdoor adventurers You use your
54. ccs catcunr vier ee ena trentemuna Meare E 69 Resizing the Map and Tab Areas cccccccccccseeeeee eects eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeereeanas 69 Viewing Two Maps Simultaneously cccccceee eee e cece eee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneegs 71 SHOWING HAYDNA MaD eeror a a ticana vase laid ana vena tee neadeaera sane N tones 72 Changing the Map COIS asrar ea a a a eigen enar eee eee ses 72 Changing the Map Magnification Level ccc ccccc cece cece eeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnaaes 73 Changing How POIs Display on the Map cccccce cece eeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeessnaaes 73 Displaying Basic Map Featulres cccccccccccesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeegeaeeeeeettenas 74 Customizing the Map Feature Preference ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeteneees 77 Changing the Contour Details Preferences cccceeee cece eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeteneees 78 Setting Units of Measure Preference cccce cee cee eect tee eee eeeeeeteeeeteseneteteneettenees 78 SHOWING OF FIGING TADS ronie ana veya tied eyouks fabbebe ines ANEAN E 80 Importing Exporting Tab Manager Preferences cccceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeteeeeeteeneeegs 81 Reordernho TNS TADS sctrscieter neues Ravineuteiaeindainilad ie ieee ina hienmenaa iain 82 using Keyboard S MOCLCUUS chi aiga tte cid oie a a e a dail ataead aeriauben ata tes 85 Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme cece cece cece eects ee eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeneettanees 85 Creatihg
55. click the Options button Ce aati 2 Under When Tracking clear the Recenter Map on GPS check bee If you pan the map manually during GPS tracking Center on GPS displays in the Control Panel OR Select the Recenter Map on GPS check box If you pan the map manually during GPS tracking the map automatically re centers itself on your location after 5 seconds 3 Click OK Click the GPS tab and click Start GPS OR Click the GPS button G on the toolbar Notes e The Center on GPS button displays and is activated by default on the Control Panel when the Recenter Map on GPS option is selected e If you deactivate the Center on GPS button you can continue to manually pan the map or use the search function in the Find tab e When you are done with other tasks click Center on GPS in the Control Panel to resume tracking Playing Back a Log File After you log a route with your GPS receiver you can play it back in the mapping application and review your entire journey on screen Notes e You cannot play back a log file if you are currently tracking with a GPS receiver e Zooming in on the map allows you to see the log file in greater detail To Play Back a Log File Use the following steps to play back and review a log file 1 Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab 2 Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display 3 Click File and then click Open 4 Single click the file you wa
56. dee es 74 CONEFO Pane iacsnvacatewidinwestiaadenasts 21 Converting a Route to a GPS Log 205 Coordinate Formats sseeeeees 18 COOIrINALES cece cee ae 215 Copy Symbol to Waypoint 145 Copy to Active Road Layer 145 Copy to Active Track Layer 145 Copy to Active Trail Layer 145 Copy to Draw Object 05 145 Copy Track to GPS Log 145 Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another 05 147 Copying and Pasting 172 Copying Your Map to the Clipboard 15 COUNTY BOIGeLrs cscs iacdadsisceiiaetacss 74 Create Route from Line 146 Creating a New Custom Scheme 85 Creating a New Draw File 135 Creating a New Symbol 168 Creating a New Symbol Set 177 Creating a Profile ccccee scenes 179 Current Elevation ceeeeeeee ees 182 CUFS OF POSION isa sew wiaeek ress eatndertes 177 285 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Custom SyYMbOIS cccceeee eee eens 168 Customizing a DeLorme Scheme 87 Customizing the Map Feature Preferences ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 77 D Data Zoom Level ccc cee ee cece ees 21 ALAS CUS teenaa a cass 257 Deleting a Contact In Your Address BOOK aoan ra E TA 116 Deleting a Custom Scheme 88 Deleting a Route cece eee 204 Deleting Draw Objects 150 Deleting Points and Line Se
57. dialog box displays 96 r Creating Editing and Saving Projects Select Hyperlinked Files lv H Sy Vacation Spots 10 Verify the Include Hyperlink Files for Transfer check box is selected If you do not want to include hyperlink files in your transfer file clear this check box and proceed to step 8 Under File Options select Maintain Directory I nfo to save the directory structure of the hyperlinked files If you do not want to include the directory information for the hyperlinked files in the transfer file select Do Not Include Directory Info and go to step 7 Type the common base directory location of the hyperlinked files up to the folder location that you want to maintain in the text box OR Click the Browse button El and browse to the common base directory location Under Select Files to Be Included clear the check box next to each file you do not want to include in your transfer file Click OK The Create Transfer File dialog box displays In the File Name text box type the file name Transfer files have dmt extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Projects directory Click Create Your file is created and saved in the specified location The default location for imported transfer file attachments is C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files 97 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Importing Transfer Files You can package a project and its contents into a single file called a transfer f
58. following turn Info Quickly view information Hover your cursor over objects on the map to see for a location on the information such as road names city town details map about draw objects etc in the status line that appears at the bottom of the map just above the tab area Handheld Export Modify the export area When you click Preview the default export area for in Handheld Export the location you selected displays on the map as shaded rectangles Click Select to confirm the area To edit the area click the Select Edit tool and then click the map to add or remove rectangles to from the export area 11 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Topo USA Data Regions Topo USA data is available on DVD the National version includes all states The States included in the Eastern and Western versions are shown below Tip Install the data to your hard drive for improved performance Western Eastern Basic Functions Running Topo USA After you install the program you can run it with the DVD to use the data without installing it to your computer s hard drive For more information on installing data to your hard drive see Saving Topo USA Data to Your Hard Drive To Access Data from the DVD Choose one of the following ways to access the data using the DVD e If you installed a desktop shortcut insert a the Topo USA DVD into your DVD drive and then double click the Topo USA icon OR e Insert a Topo U
59. geographic detail on the map use the magnification settings in the Options dialog box To Change the Map Magnification Use the following steps to change the map magnification i IS Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select a magnification percentage 50 75 100 125 150 175 or 200 from the Magnification drop down list Note Although the size of the image changes the degree of geographic detail does not 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Changing How POIs Display on the Map You can change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols display on the map To Change the Data Zoom Level for Large POI Symbols Use the following steps to change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols are displayed on the map Options Click the Options button i on the toolbar L 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select the data zoom level from the Large Symbols At drop down list 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Notes e The appearance of a POI many change at different data zoom levels e The number of points of interest that displays is dependent on the basic map features you selected on the Map Features tab in the Options dialog box For more informati
60. hand Left click to grab the area and drag it horizontally to reposition the border focus area or to center the selection on that point 3 To hide the overview profile graph click Less a Statistical Data You can manage the type of statistical data you want to view for a profile graph The profile statistic options display to the right of the profile graph The applicable selected options display in the info box when move your cursor along the profile graph An info box can also contain user data that you add to the mapping program see User Profile Data for more information To View Your Current Options To view all options you currently have selected click the More button oret the bottom of the Profile tab to expand your view near 182 Profiling Linear Objects To Remove an Option Use the following steps to remove an option from the statistics list 1 Move your cursor over the statistic you want to delete An X appears in the cell 2 Click the X to remove the option Max Elev 1 949 87 x To Add an Option When one or more options have been removed use the following steps to made additions to the statistics list 1 Move your cursor over Click to add statistics and click A list of available statistic options opens Click an option to add it 3 Repeat steps 1 2 to add more options Click to add statistics 183 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide This table describes the statistic
61. imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive Waypoints From Your Pocket PC Device Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Pocket PC device SS a 10 Li 12 Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Receive from Device Select Waypoints from the Object Type drop down list From the Save As drop down list select to save the waypoints as User Map Data Waypoints Click Next Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the Waypoint File drop down list If you want to create a new waypoint file select New from the Waypoint File drop down list and type the new waypoint file name in the text box If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol such as the default red flag select the Use Current Waypoint active waypoint option If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third party GPS device select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then select the appropriate set from the drop down list For more information on creating a custom symbol set see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive Click Finish The waypoint information displays Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button E Exchan
62. inal 225 Exchanging Information with an Earthmate PN Series GPS ccceeee eens 225 Exchanging Maps Tracks Routes and Waypoints with Earthmate PN Series GPS a E E A E aun N A 225 Enabling Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange Features in Topo USA 226 Activating an Earthmate PN Series GPS cc cece ccce cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessannneens 227 Deleting Maps Waypoints Routes ANd Tracks ccc ccceee seen eee eeeeeeeneeeneneenes 227 Sending Receiving Maps to from an Earthmate PN 40 cece eee ee ee eee e ee ees 228 Sending Receiving Routes to from an Earthmate PN 4O ccc cece eee eee eee es 230 Sending Receiving Tracks to from Earthmate PN 40 ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeeees 231 Sending Receiving Waypoints to from Earthmate PN 4O cece cece eee ee eee 233 Sending Draw Layers to an Earthmate PN 4O ccc cece cece cece eee cess eeeeeeeeees 234 Firmware Updates for the Earthmate PN 4O ccc cece cece ee seeeeeeeesenenes 235 Vill Table Of Contents Sending Receiving Maps to From an Earthmate PN 20 cece cece eset teen eens 235 Sending Receiving Routes to from an Earthmate PN 20 ccc cece cece eee e eens 237 Sending Receiving Tracks to from Earthmate PN 20 c ccc ce cece sent ee eee eens 239 Sending Receiving Waypoints to from Earthmate PN 20 ccc cece cece eee e eens 240 Sending Draw Layers to an Earthmate P
63. list Click No to delete the search history in the QuickSearch drop down list Click Yes to delete the search history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs Use the right click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Waypoint or Address Book Entry or assign it a start stop or finish in a route Just right click a search result and select the applicable option from the shortcut menu Performing an Advanced Search The Advanced search option allows you to perform more detailed searches by controlling what you are looking for using the Find field and where you are looking for it using the Within field The fields available for selection under Within vary based on your Find selection Type text in the fields and use the drop down list to see examples and your recent searches The fill in fields located in the center of the tab vary based on both your Find and Within selections You can also search for more types of items than you can in the QuickSearch tab such as by category To Perform an Advanced Search Follow the steps below to use the advanced search function 1 Click the Find tab and then click the Advanced subtab 2 From the Find drop down list select the Find type from the list 102 Click a Find type in the list below for more information e Name Use Name to locate a c
64. menu select Page Setup Remove the text and the header and footer text boxes and then click OK 89 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e Changes made to the browser s advanced print settings and page setup affect the printing of all Web pages 90 Viewing and Connecting Imagery and Data Connecting Data to Topo USA Only connected compatible data displays in Topo USA You can improve performance by saving the data to your hard disk drive To Connect Data Use the following steps to connect a dataset to Topo USA 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click Add and then click Data Locations The Data Locations dialog box displays a list of the of the data sources on your system 3 If the dataset you want to view in Topo USA displays in the list ensure its check box is selected AND OR If the dataset you want to view in Topo USA does not display in the list click Add select the data folder where the dataset is located from the Browse for Folder dialog box and click OK 4 Click Done when finished Note To remove a data source from the Data Locations list select the data source and click Remove Viewing Data in Topo USA You can view two types of data simultaneously using the split window functionality and by connecting the data with the Data Locations feature in the Map Files tab The following data types are compatible with Topo USA e Topo USA data e Aerial Imagery DOQQ e Color Aerial Imagery e Satellite Imagery
65. name county name state coordinates and Standard Industrial Classification categories 3 Click the plus sign next to each of the information categories to expand the category to view more detailed information OR Right click in the information box and click Expand All to expand all of the information categories Right click in the information box again and click Collapse All to minimize all of the information categories 4 Optional Repeat steps 1 3 to get information about another location 5 Optional Right click in the information box and click Print to print your map feature information Notes e You can also get information about a location using right click functionality J ust right click the location and click Info e The status bar located above the tab area displays draw object type draw file information point of interest name if applicable street name address highway city state and ZIP Code information for the map location that your cursor is positioned on e Some map features Such as campgrounds national scenic historic trail information centers and state parks display with a blue outline at data zoom levels 15 0 through 17 0 The blue outline indicates that the feature has a hyperlink to its website To open the hyperlink right click the feature and then click Open Hyperlink OR click the URL in the Info tab To Open the Options Dialog Box S Options To open the Options dialog box click the Options butto
66. normal map operations To Hide MapTags The MapTags check box controls if existing MapTags display on the map e MapTags are visible when the MapTags check box Is selected e MapTags are hidden from view when the MapTags check box is cleared Select the MapTags check box at any time to display existing MapTags To Delete MapTags You can delete one several or all MapTags To delete MapTags from the Find tab 110 Finding a Location on the Map e To delete one MapTag click the Select tool he click the MapTag click the Delete Tag tool xl and click the Select tool again OR Right click the MapTag you want to delete and select Delete MapTag e To delete several MapTags click the Select tool he hold down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while clicking the MapTags click the Delete Tag Alto and click the Select tool again e To delete all MapTags click the Delete Tag tool x A message box displays Delete all MapTags Click OK to confirm deletion Click Cancel to retain all MapTags To delete MapTags from other tabs e Right click the MapTag and select Delete MapTag 111 Using Address Book Contacts Searching for Address Book Contacts You have several ways to search for address book contacts e Use the QuickSearch function on the Find tab to search for the name of a contact browse for the contact or type the name of the contact e Use the Route tab to search for an address book entry as a route start stop or fin
67. oea A E 101 Searching for Address Book Contacts seed E cts uae steeetwhad elacenmtes eens 113 Searching For Commands 5 89 SEarchinG TPS aame 19 Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme AE dte Sis Cagle T ata oa S TAE AEA 85 Sending a GPS Log to Your Pocket PC DEVIC Oeann aa 255 Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS DEVIC Oreo e a ares 248 Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket PE DEVICE ere aen toned oes 252 Sending Route Information 243 249 253 Sending Tracks to Your GPS Device244 Sending Waypoints 245 250 254 Shaded Relief ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Share MaDPS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 Shortcut Keys ocorrera a 89 Show Comments MapNotes 202 Show GPS Bread Crumb Trail 207 Show Location MapNotes 202 Show Summary MapNotes 202 SNOW TUNS ito tia a AAE 197 Showing Address Book Contacts on the MaDe eaae ra ora A 116 SNOWING TaDS cccceeeee cece eeeeees 80 Showing Toolbar Features 63 Snapping Draw Objects 152 Snapping Text and Graphic Items on YOUR MAD serren apine AEN 125 SPC O iaai ENE 18 78 182 SPEEA ionia a a O 215 SPINE eicere a ae 155 Stat GPS cireni Teroa 207 211 Stal CGPS LOO eere eE 207 Start GPS with the Program 207 Statistical Data Options 182 Slop Prel S annaia A 200 STODS er TEET ED 195 Street ColorS cc cece cece eee eeeeeeeee 72 SUID MIPS enraiar aa 120 SUNI
68. of the line segment leg and the total area of the polygon on the map Points in Rectangles Circles and Arcs Draw objects such as rectangles circles and arcs also contain points but they are treated differently Rectangles Contain shape points at the four corners but the lines between the shape points contain no editable end points When you click one of these Shape points a text box displays the width height and area of the rectangle on the map Circles Contain no shape points but have a central point that does not display until you snap it See Note below to another object Clicking the circle displays a central crosshair within the circle and a text box containing information on the area and radius of the circle on the map Arcs Contain three shape points When you click any of the points a text box displays the angle or bearing of the selected point the radius of the arc and the total length of the arc line on the map Only the first and second points you placed on the map when creating the arc are treated as start and end points i e show red or green when clicked The central magenta shape point or third point you placed determines the Shape of the arc Note For information on snapping a draw object to another draw object see Snapping Draw Objects Points in Point Draw Objects Point Objects such as waypoints symbols and text do not have shape or end points Text label objects contain a point at the
69. of the title contains column names select the First Row is Header check box 6 If you want to adjust the column headers for your address book information select a default column label from the available drop down lists there is a list for Name Street Address City State Abbreviation ZIP Postal Code Telephone Latitude Longitude The information in your address book displays to the right of these lists 7 Click OK The address book contacts are imported into the program All street address or latitude longitude matches display on the map with the following symbol and the name of the contact 113 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Note If your contacts do not display on the map check the Located column in the Address Book dialog box to verify a successful match was made If Not Located displays next to any of your records either address coordinate information was not provided with the contact or the address coordinate information could not be found in the program Manually Entering Address Book Information You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering each record e The Address Book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e Your can resize and sort the columns inside the Address Book dialog box e You can also add an address book entry by right clicking the map selecting Create Address Book Entry and following steps 4 6 below If you righ
70. on the square map in the Rotate graphic to move the map in that direction e Click a directional letter N S W or E to rotate the map in that direction e Click the brown area that surrounds the square map to rotate the map in that direction 4 Use the Pitch controls to change the pitch of the 3 D map Tips 190 The pitch range depends on the terrain 90 looks straight up 90 looks straight down and 0 is horizontal You can control the pitch using one of the following methods e Press and hold the up arrow to increase the pitch e Press and hold the down arrow to decrease the pitch e Drag the reference arrow to the new pitch e Click anywhere on the graphic to update the pitch If you selected the Outside looking in perspective you can adjust the distance from the map center using the Distance up down buttons by clicking the Distance graphic at the distance you want or by dragging the numeric distance display in the Distance graphic OR If you selected the I nside looking out perspective you can adjust the elevation of the view over the 3 D map using the Elevation up down buttons by clicking the Elevation graphic at the elevation or by dragging the numeric elevation display in the Elevation graphic Note Elevation indicates the height above terrain not the height above sea level To pan the 3 D map and simulate a fly over drag the circle in the Pan graphic in the direction you want Click Hide 3 D when fi
71. on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed Any newly created symbol whether imported pasted or dragged into the XSym Symbol Editing Grid has a default position of center anchor 176 Using the Draw Tools XSym lets you change the anchor position of your symbol To Select the Anchor Position Use the following steps to select the anchor position of a symbol op 1 Once your symbol is created click the Anchor Position Fe utton When you pass your pointer over the Symbol Editing Grid it changes to a Small cross hair plus sign 2 Click the pixel grid within the symbol to position your anchor The anchor location pixel coordinate numbers display after the position text to the right of the Anchor Position button The large cross hair in the Symbol Editing Grid moves from its default anchor position to the new anchor position To Center the Anchor Position Click Center Anchor to place the anchor point in the exact center of the Symbol Editing Grid Cursor Position Any symbol created in XSym is 24 x 24 pixels square Each of these pixels is represented in the Symbol Editing Grid When you move your cursor over the Symbol Editing Grid the cursor position by pixel number displays to the right of the Cursor Position text next to the Image Preview as shown below Image Preview and Cursor Position m Cursor Position 16 14 As you move the cursor ov
72. on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished Notes These steps describe how to add Draw MapNotes To show delete Route MapNotes see Setting Your Routing Preferences You can also add MapNotes by right clicking the map on the point you want to label point to Add MapNote and then select a MapNote option Add a waypoint 1 Click and hold the Tracks Waypoints tool and select the Waypoints E A Then select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options You can also select a different font style size and color for the waypoint name 2 Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box displays 3 Click the Hyperlink button al and browse to the document you want to hyperlink your point object to optional The address displays in the URL field 4 Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location display in the Using the Draw Tools corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes 5 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished e Add an image 1 Click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol Image tool and select Image Under Images select an existing image or click Add browse to an image and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection Note You can delete an image from the Images s
73. operation To Send Route Directions Use the following steps to send route directions to your Palm OS device oe aE 10 11 Click the Exchange button on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Palm OS Select Send to Device Select Route Directions from the Object Type drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route directions you want to send to your device Select the User Profile the route file will sync to from the User drop down list Click Prepare for Sync Repeat the steps for each route file you want to send to your device Click Finish The route directions are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button LE Exchange On the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab 249 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Sending Waypoints to Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your Palm OS device To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Palm OS device 1 Click the Exchange button on the toolbar 2 Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 3 Under Device Type select Palm OS 4 Select Send to Device 5 Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Object Type drop down list 6 Click Next 7 Select the waypoint file you want to s
74. options available in the statistic list and or the profile info box List options are bold Statistical Data Option Description Linear Distance The flat distance of the profile Does not take elevation into account Terrain Distance The 3 D distance of the profile accounting for elevation rise and descent Climbing Distance The total distance where the terrain is uphill Descending The total distance where the terrain is downhill Distance Current Elevation The elevation above sea level at a specific point Elevation Gain The difference in elevation from the start of the profile to the end of the profile Climbing Elevation The amount of ascending vertical distance Descending Elevation Grade The amount of descending vertical distance Actually percent grade rise over run 100 x rise run For example 6 means that for every 100 ft you gain 6 ft in elevation Average Average of the grade from the start to the current cursor Grade position or finish Minimum Elevation The elevation of the lowest point on a profile Maximum Elevation The elevation of the highest point on a profile Zone A named grid system of any of the UTM UPS MGRS or State Plane coordinate systems used as a basis for coordinate display For example UTM zone 19 specifies the six degree swath between longitude 66W to 72W and running from 84S to 80N Another example is zone ME W in the Sta
75. or along a particular road Turn off Auto Calculate when you are adding many stops and vias Use Add instead of Insert when your Start and Finish are at the same place Don t place the Finish point until you add all your stops and vias Place vias near the beginning of the road or trail you want to use When you calculate the route if it goes to a via and then returns to the Original path insert another via toward the end of that road where you want to turn onto the next road to force it to use that road Note When using a road as a stop or via zoom in to ensure you select the correct road The selected road segment is highlighted when you click it To Add a Stop or Via To Your Route The Add Stop Via function adds stops and vias in the order you add them to the route Use the following steps to add a stop or via to your route L 2 oF Create a route In the New Edit dialog area in the Route tab make sure the button next to the Stop tool s if you are adding a stop or the Via tool s if you are adding a via is labeled Add If it is not click the arrow next to the button and select Add from the shortcut menu To add a stop or via to the route click the Stop or Via tool and then click the location on the map OR e To use an address book entry as your stop or via location 1 Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop down list 2 Select an Add
76. os Columbia 660 2421 a 660 2421 www drivebc ca 800 550 4997 www infratrans gov ab ca Connecticut Florida 800 443 3061 Outside CT 860 594 2650 302 760 2080 302 760 2080 www deldot net static travel htm 511 partial coverage Central 866 874 3368 Lake City 800 749 2967 Miami 800 435 2368 Orlando 800 780 7102 Southwest 800 292 3368 Tampa 800 226 Denver 303 639 1111 877 315 7623 800 443 3061 Outside CT 860 594 2650 511 partial coverage Central 866 874 3368 Lake City 800 749 2967 Miami 800 435 2368 5 Orlando 800 780 7102 Southwest 800 292 3368 Tampa 800 www cotrip org www ct gov dot www fl511 com www dot state fl us www fhp state fl us 265 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 7220 226 7220 Turnpike 800 Turnpike 749 7453 800 749 7453 l 75 or l 10 800 l 75 or l 10 475 0044 800 475 0044 808 536 6566 808 536 6566 www hawaii gov dot publicaffairs roadwork Idaho Treasure Valley Treasure www itd idaho gov 208 336 6600 Valley 208 All other areas 336 6600 888 432 7623 or All other 511 areas 888 432 7623 or 511 Illinois Toll free roads Toll free www illinoisroads info Toll free roads Oe eee www gettingaroundillinois com 800 452 4368 Toll free Toll highways roads 800 800 865 5394 452 4368 Toll highways 800 865 5394 317 232 8300 317 232 8300 www in gov dot motoristinfo lowa 511 www dot
77. spline style from the Style drop down list 4 Click the color button next to the Style drop down list to select a line arc spline color 5 If available select a line arc spline width from the Width drop down list 6 If available select the Highlight check box to make your line arc spline appear translucent on the map 7 Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points on the map as you draw the line arc spline As you add each point a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing or angle leg line segment length and total length of the line arc spline on the map Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected 8 To draw a line or spline click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line OR To draw an arc click the map to designate the start and end points of the arc e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the line options e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes 9 To finish the line arc spline click the last point on the map screen and then click Done OR Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Double click the last point of the line arc spline Drawing a Track on the Map You c
78. tab area Using the Horizontal Resize Tool Drag the horizontal bar up down to expose the tab area you want to see Click the up arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally increase the tab height You can repeat this step until the top of the tab area is flush with the bottom of the compass rose in the control panel Click the down arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally decrease the tab height You can repeat this step until only the tab names display Double click the bar to the right of the up arrow to expand the tab height to its maximum percentage if the tab height is at the default mode or higher Note Ifthe tab area is below the default mode double click the bar to return the tab height to its default percentage Double click the bar to the left of the down arrow to decrease the tab height to its minimum percentage if the tab height is at the default mode Note Ifthe tab area is above the default mode double click the bar to return the tab height to its default percentage Double click the bar between the up and down arrows to return the tab height to its default view Using the Vertical Resize Tool 70 Drag the vertical bar left to expose the area of the overview map you want to see Drag the vertical bar right to expose the tab area you want to see Click the right arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the tab width You can repeat this stop until the ove
79. the color for your fill style 5 Select an outline style for your circle from the Outline drop down list 6 Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your area object 7 Select the width for your area object outline from the Width drop down list 8 Select the Show Measurement check box to display area and radius information for circles on the map as you draw the object 9 To draw a circle click the location for the circle s center on the map and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle Release as soon as you achieve the radius you want The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle s center display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area OR To draw a rectangle click the location for the rectangle s upper left corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width height and area for the rectangle Release as soon as you achieve the size you want The coordinates of the upper left corner point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options The distance and bearing angle of the 161 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 10 11 final corner point from the first corner point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options OR To draw a polygon click the map to enter each point of the polygon The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right
80. the Book check box to hide address book contacts on the map and disable address book searching with the Find tab Route tab and toolbar Deleting Your Entire Address Book Once you have created an address book you can delete the records it contains one at a time or all at once To Delete an Entire Address Book Use the following steps to delete an entire address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button w The DeLorme Address Book dialog box displays 116 Using Address Book Contacts 3 Click Clear All A confirmation message displays asking you if you re sure you want to delete the address book 4 Click OK to delete the address book 5 Click Done Exporting Your Address Book You can export your address book to another program using the Export function in the Address Book dialog box Exported address books are in DeLorme Address Book binary or comma separated file csv text format Latitude and longitude values are not exported To Export Your Address Book Use the following steps to export your address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button w The DeLorme Address Book dialog box displays 3 Click Export The Save As dialog box displays 4 Browse to the location where you want to save the exported address book file 5 Type the file name for your exported file in the File Name text box 6 Select DeLorme Address Book dab binary format or Comma separated File
81. the QuickSearch tab 1 2 3 Notes Click the Find tab and then click the QuickSearch subtab Type a major trail name mountain name address ZIP Code town name coordinate draw object label address book contact name street intersection etc in the Search For text box See Searching Tips for a description of input formats OR Select From Address Book from the Search For drop down list to find an address book entry in your DeLorme Address Book and then click OK Notes e The Book check box under the Address Book buttons must be selected to search for address book contacts For more information see Searching for Address Book Contacts e Do not enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search e Address searches should be in the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Code OR street address city state Zip Code Click Search If your search is Very Successful The results list displays and if there is one excellent match the map centers on that place and a MapTag displays if the MapTags check box is selected The only time a MapTag Is not placed is when you find and then go to a labeled area that has no Single map point associated with it for example a large park Successful The results list displays Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate To center an item on the map double click it or select it and then click G
82. the System on an auxiliary computer in addition to your principal computer However one of these two computers must be portable and the software may not be used simultaneously on both computers Otherwise once you have installed the System on one computer you may use the System on a second computer only if you delete the System from the first computer or purchase a separate license Installation of any part of the System on a network is prohibited unless you have a separate network license For information on network or multiple user licensing contact DeLorme at ProSales delorme com or 1 800 293 2389 You may use the System as instructed by the documentation to perform its designed functions only for the purposes authorized by this Agreement Paper Map Printout Rights You may reproduce paper copies or static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of any TOPO USA map for personal or household use or if you are a business or institution for in house purposes provided that distribution and use of such printouts and copies of printouts is limited to the location where the System is installed or limited to use by employees based at that location Paper Locator Map Distribution Rights You may distribute to family and friends including via fax paper copies or static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of TOPO USA map printouts depicting locations of personal interest You may distribute to your colleagues clients customers or prospects i
83. the draw file you want to edit is displaying on the map A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Verify that the file is selected in the Active column in the file editing area Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Click the Select tool A and then click the draw file object on the map that you want to edit Click File and then click Save to save the changes you made to the draw file Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area To Lock a Draw File Use the following steps to lock a draw file Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Select the Lock check box for each draw file you want to lock Note Clear the Lock check box to make changes to a draw file Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Exporting Draw Files to Text Files You can export draw files as text files Draw objects exported to text files contain coordinate information for each line area or point object You can open these text files in other DeLorme products 137 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Export Draw Files to Text Files Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file L 2 8 9 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map The Active column shows the active layers From the file list click the draw file to export Click Export The Export Draw File dialog b
84. the existing road trail and can be used when creating a route Tutorial Using MapShare MapShare lets you create static maps with or without route directions or profiles to send to your friends family and associates Step 1 Open the MapShare Wizard Click the MapShare button on the toolbar The MapShare Wizard opens Step 2 Select the type of information you want to share Select Share the Current Map View a static map Share a Route Map and Directions or Share the Current Profile and then click Next For this tutorial we will share a route map and directions 48 Tutorials Welcome to MapShare DeLorme s Web based map sharing system that allows you to share maps and route directions with friends family and associates To begin select a sharing option below and then click Next C Share a Route Map and Directions C Share the Current Map View Share the Current Profile Manage My Map Shares Help cancer Step 3 Select the route to share Select the route file you want to share from the Available Routes drop down list and then click Next 49 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Share Route Directions Select the route file you would like to share from the drop down list below The routes in the list are all of the routes contained in your current Map File Then click Next Available Routes Montezuma C to General Tell T Step 4 Add a title or notes to the route map
85. the multi page map Note Place the removable tape on the corners and edges not along the seams 7 For each seam fix the tape to the work surface not on the sheet so the tape is in alignment with the seam 8 Spool off enough permanent tape to cover the entire seam Be careful not to let the tape touch the map until you are ready to apply it in step 9 129 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 9 Keeping the length of the tape taut carefully apply the tape to the seam until both sides are fixed to the work surface 10 Press the tape along the seam to remove any air gaps 11 Repeat steps 6 through 10 until all seams are completely pieced together 12 Using the straight edge ruler carefully trim the edges of the map at the seams where the tape Is affixed to the workspace 13 Peel off the removable tape at the corners and the edges You are now ready to display your multi page map 130 Using the Draw Tools Draw Overview You can add draw objects such as routable roads routable trails waypoints tracks text symbols MapNotes images lines arcs splines circles polygons and rectangles to your map with the tools provided in the Draw tab You can save draw objects in a single draw file or in multiple draw files You can view draw files individually or with other draw files What is a Draw File Imagine a draw file as a sheet of glass laying on top of your map You can add various objects to the draw f
86. the plus sign next to Track Layers and then click the track layer or contents you want to send to the Earthmate GPS PN 20 OR To send all tracks just click Track Layers Note You cannot replace an existing track on the Earthmate GPS PN 20 if the track details page for that track is displaying on the device 4 Click Send A progress bar indicates the copy status 5 Click Done To Receive Tracks Use the following steps to receive tracks from your Earthmate PN Series GPS 1 Click the Exchange button pee on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens 2 Inthe right pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Tracks and then click the track you want to receive into Topo USA OR If you want to receive all tracks just click Tracks 3 Inthe left pane of the dialog box click the track layer where you want to receive the track or tracks If you want to copy the track information into a new track layer click New and then click Track Layer Notes 239 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e f you do not perform this step and an existing track layer is highlighted in the left pane of the dialog box the track is received in that layer If a non track option is highlighted for example a waypoint layer a new track layer is automatically created e If you use the Exchange dialog box to send the active track to Topo USA the file name displays as a time date stamp based on the time date information in th
87. the same finish location that you used for your start point in step 1 Step 5 Select your activity type To ensure the route is calculated for your activity select the Walking J ogging button and then select Trail as the route calculation method Road Quickest Road Shortest Direc 43 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Step 6 Calculate the route Click Calculate to calculate the trail route The route displays on the map Tip Select the Auto check box next to the Calculate button to automatically calculate the route after you add each point Y we Tutorial Converting Tracks into Trails You can send and receive objects such as handheld maps routes waypoints tracks and GPS log files to and from an Earthmate PN Series GPS or another GPS or PDA device This tutorial provides instructions for receiving a track from an Earthmate PN Series GPS to Topo USA and then converting it to a trail so you can use it when calculating trail routes If you are not using an Earthmate PN Series GPS click Use Other Device in Step 1 to open the Exchange Wizard and follow the instructions for receiving a track from a GPS device Then go to Step 3 Step 1 Connect Your Device to Your Computer e If you have an Earthmate PN 20 connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on e If you have an Earthmate PN 40 connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on On the Connec
88. the selected contact Editing a Contact In Your Address Book Once you have imported your address book contacts you may need to edit the information if your contacts have moved changed phone numbers etc Instead of importing the information again you can simply edit the information e The Address Book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e Your can resize and sort the columns inside the Address Book dialog box e You can also delete address book entries To Edit a Contact In Your Address Book Use the following steps to edit a contact in your address book i 2 Click the Find tab Click the Address Book button w The DeLorme Address Book dialog box displays Double click the record you want to edit OR Click to select the record you want to edit and then click Edit Edit the applicable information If you want to move the contact select how you want it to be geoplaced on the map from the Update Location drop down list Click OK Manually Moving a Contact s Location On the Map Once you have created a contact in an address book you can manually move it on the map using the move address book entry function To Move a Contact s Location on the Map Manually Use the following steps to move a contact s location on the map manually 1 2 Click the Find tab yg ae Click the Move Address Book Entry button w Your cursor changes to when you hover over the location
89. the time and date on your camera or athletic device and on your GPS device match before you begin This ensures that your photos and data are correctly matched to the GPS log file or track file If you do not have the correct time on your device you can update the information with the Timestamp Offset option tn the wizard See Calculating the Timestamp Offset Tagging an Image Once you successfully tag your digital images to a GPS log file or track file you can view the points at which the photos were taken on the map in your DeLorme program Before you begin you must download the GPS log file or track file and digital photographs to your computer See Receiving a Track From Your Third party GPS Device for information on using the Exchange Wizard to transfer files To Tag an Image 1 Click the GeoTagger button aj on the toolbar to open the GeoTagger Wizard 2 Select I mages and click Next 3 In the Photo Directory box type the path and file name for the folder not specific images on your computer where the images are stored OR Click Browse to search for the folder on your computer 4 Under Time Zone select the time zone where you were when you took the pictures See GMT Time Zone Information for a table of time zones by state If Daylight Saving Time was in effect second Sunday in March through first Sunday in November select the Adjust for Daylight Saving Time check box 5 Under GPS Data select Track or GPL Fil
90. to send to your device To send all saved map packages just click Saved Map Packages OR 236 Using Handheld Devices To send a regional map package click the plus sign next to Regional Map Packages in the left pane of the dialog box Click to region you want to send to your device To send all regional map packages just click Regional Map Packages In the right pane of the dialog box under Map Packages select Internal or External memory 5 Click Send The map is sent to the device SD card and a progress bar indicates the copy status 6 Click Done To Receive Maps Use the following steps to receive maps from your Earthmate GPS PN 20 or an SD card 1 To receive a map package from internal memory or on an SD card that is in the device Connect your Earthmate GPS PN 20 to your computer with the USB cable power it on and then select Earthmate GPS PN 20 from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box OR To receive a map package on an SD card with an SD card reader Insert your SD card into your SD card reader and then connect it to a USB port on your computer Using the drop down list in the upper right corner of the Exchange dialog box select the removable disk option that represents your SD card reader 2 Click the Exchange button Le on the toolbar 3 Select Earthmate GPS PN 20 or Removable Disk for an SD card from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box 4 I
91. tool select the line twice then type the label in the text box that displays next to the track Using the Draw Tools e Reshape the track by dragging any of the points in the line to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected track segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected track segment e Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit their numbers Click Apply to initiate the changes 6 Click Done to finish your edit OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click outside the object s active box on the map Placing a Routable Road Routable Trail Line Arc or Spline at a Specific Location You can place any line object routable road routable trail line arc or spline ata specific coordinate location To Place a Line Object at a Specific Location Use the following steps to place your line object at a specific coordinate location 1 Click the Draw tab 2 To place a routable road or trail click and hold the Routable a Sil Roads Routable Trails tool and select the tool you want OR To place a line arc spline click and hold the Line Arc Spline tool 7 7 and select the tool you want Then select the line style width if available and color for your line arc spline 3 Select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and B
92. up information box that displays when you click the diagram click on another part of the diagram Creating a New Symbol With DeLorme XSym you can add a new symbol to an existing or new symbol set dim file You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Create a New Symbol Use the following steps to create a new symbol 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool iT Pe E to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set you want to add your new symbol to from the drop down list Select New to create a new symbol set Under Symbols click Edit to display the DeLorme XSym dialog box Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and the tools under Transparency and Anchor to create the new symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 7 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Note Once a name is assigned to a symbol in a symbol set each occurrence of that symbol placed on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol 8 Click OK when finished Note As you create a symbol an image preview displ
93. use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgments normally appear 282 Legal Information 4 The names Xerces and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their name without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAI MED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APAC
94. your owner manual Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Send to Device Select User Map Data Track from the Object drop down list Click Next Select the track file you want to send to your device from the Track File drop down list 10 Optional Designate a track name or a track number for the file on the device 11 Click Send to Device 12 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device 244 Using Handheld Devices 13 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button LE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending Waypoints to Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your device To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your device 1 Connect your device to your computer 2 If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual 3 Click the Exchange button 4 Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 5 Under Device Type select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your dev
95. your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Ze Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab ee a A a Receiving a Route From Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive a route created on your Pocket PC device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive a Route From Your Pocket PC Device Use the following steps to receive a route from your Pocket PC device Click the Exchange button iL on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Receive from Device Select Route from the Object Type drop down list Select Route from the Save As drop down list to save your route as a route file 7 Click Next ae a 255 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 8 9 10 Li 12 Select the route file on the device that you want to receive Select New from the Route drop down list and type the new route name in the text box Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each route file you want to receive Click Finish The route information displays Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Lg Exchange E Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving Waypoints From Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints created on your Pocket PC Once
96. 04096 Codes only Minor Point of Interest POI name City State Wal Mart Columbus OH 19 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Major Point of Interest or POI landmark name Mount Rushmore Landmark POI landmark name Space Needle WA State Latitude Longitude See Chart of Supported of Supported Coordinate Formats Exiting Topo USA To exit the program click the Close button EJ in the upper right corner of the screen The Save Changes dialog box opens if you made changes to a project or projects e Click Yes to save changes Note If only one change was made the program closes after you save the project e Click No to discard changes and close the program e Click Cancel to return to Topo USA No changes are saved If you made more than one change to the project or changes to more than one project once you save your project the Exit dialog box opens e Click Save and Exit to save changes to the selected files and close the program Note Clear the check box for any file you do not want to save e Click No to discard changes and close the program e Click Cancel to return to Topo USA No changes are saved About the I nterface Tab Area You can access most of the application s functions from the tab area at the bottom of the screen To access Help for a specific tab click the Help button 2 on the tab e Map Files e Find e Print e Draw e GPS e Route e Profile e 3 D e Info e NetLink e Handheld Ex
97. 20 Sending Receiving I nformation Sending Receiving Maps to From an Earthmate PN 20 You can use Topo USA 7 0 to send custom or regional map packages to your Earthmate GPS PN 20 Regional map packages are DeLorme created multi state data regions that provide much greater detail 25 mile scale and up more roads 235 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide better routing connectivity etc than the base map on the device Regional map packages contain Topo USA 7 0 data only Use the Handheld Export tab to create custom map packages of any size that cover any location in the U S The data included in a custom map package is dependent on the data that is available for the export area as well as the preferences made in the Handheld Options settings Notes e Because the base maps on the Earthmate GPS PN 20 include only major roads it is important that you send regional map package data and or saved map package data to your device Regional map packages do not contain local roads To create the most efficient routes on the Earthmate GPS PN 20 it is strongly recommended that you have access to regional map package AND Saved map package data on your device To calculate a route on the device you must have regional map package coverage for the route area To rename delete or send receive a waypoint layer track layer route or map right click the option in the list and select the appropriate option You can also delete a map by clicking t
98. 3 Using Eartha Community Atlas ccc ccccccces cess cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeneeeeeneags 263 USING Mapohna Esensi ie ial laa a oetee as tated oo aaa hanens 263 Recreational and Travel Contact INfOrMatiOn cccc cece cesses ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneas 265 Road Condition Construction Contact Information ccc cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 265 Hotel Car and Airline Contact Information cccce cece ee eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeteaeeneees 269 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Recreational Contacts 24 lt 5sgeasigh thesia cde okat aeaaus ea eveute sain eee a ane a a ew a 272 LEG al UM Orma Nara a a a a a A eeaniuana 279 DeLorme Topo USA 7 0 Single User License Agreement ccc cece cece eeeeeeeeees 279 Apache Software License Version 1 1 cc cccccee cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeennnnengs 282 MOE a a ais Ieee mittee ao wise em cn eee ice ae nia an a ence es 285 Getting Started Welcome to Topo USA These are just some of the many features that you can enjoy with Topo USA Download 40 worth of data with Data Download Dollars FREE Publicly Managed Lands data and FREE Game Management District data registration required You can also subscribe to the DeLorme Map Library for unlimited downloads Map Library subscriptions allow you to download unlimited data and imagery for just 29 99 a year Exchange maps tracks routes and waypoints with an Earthmate PN Series GPS Search for trails
99. 600 W0700950 6400 W0700950 6400 N43 48 30 W70 9 52 48 30 W70 9 52 N43 48 30 W70 9 52 N Dea A e W N 43 48 29 46 W 70 9 50 64 70 9 50 64 18 Getting Started UTM UPS 19T O406311E 4850964N Zone Easting Northing O0406311E 4850964N 19T 0406311 4850964 Zone Easting Northing 0406311 4850964 19T 0406311 4850964 Zone Easting Northing 19T 0406311 4850964 MGRS USNG 19TD 06354 51187 same as QuickSearch 19TDJ 0635451187 NAD27 19TDJ 06355109 19TDJ 064511 19TDJ 0651 SPCS ME W 0500490 0355150 Zone Easting Northing ME W 0500490 0355150 Use this example for USNG with non standard datum Searching Tips When you use the Find or Route tabs to search for a location you must enter the information in a specific format Tips e Use punctuation as in the examples in the table below e Do not use periods e Search with the minimum amount of information to increase the number of results For example tf you search for Kalalau Trail in Hawaii but you are not sure of the spelling type Kal HI and then scroll through the results until you find a match This table shows formats for search types For this type of Use this format search Address Street address City 100 Baxter Blvd Portland State ME Street address ZIP Code 100 Congress St 04101 Street address City 100 Congress St State ZIP Code Portland ME 04101 City State Atlanta Georgia ZIP Code HH FHF 5 digit ZIP
100. 75639 GRENPZ Step 6 View license agreement and submit order The first time you download imagery or data a license agreement displays Read the agreement and click I Agree Step 7 Download your imagery or data Once you have completed the checkout process the Downloads subtab opens and displays your order in progress When the download is available e You are notified on the Downloads tab Follow the download instructions e If you are not on the Downloads tab a notification dialog box opens when your download is ready Follow the download instructions e You are also sent an e mail to the e mail address you provided when you registered so you can be notified when Topo USA is closed Open Topo USA and when the notification dialog box opens follow the download instructions Step 8 View your imagery Use the map resize tool to expose the left map view Then use the drop down list in the upper left corner of the left map to switch the imagery type to the one you purchased 41 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Note You can view imagery only in the left window To view roads and other data over the imagery click the Hybrid Map button at the top of the left window color Aerial Imagery 2 Hybrid Map 13 3 7 t rmouth Maine 04096 Tutorial Creating a Route There are several different methods for creating a route on the Route tab You can designate a start stop via and finish for your ro
101. Activate Your Earthmate PN Series GPS Use the following steps to activate your device before you use it with Topo USA 1 With Topo USA open connect your device to your computer and power it on 2 PN 40 only The Connect to Computer screen appears on the device and Data Exchange Is highlighted Press ENTER on the device 3 In Topo USA click the Exchange button in the toolbar to open the Earthmate PN Series Exchange Dialog box The device is activated when it appears in the drop down list in the top right corner of the dialog box Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide How do get maps from Topo USA to my Earthmate PN Series GPS device To get started see these tutorials Tutorial Creating Maps for an Earthmate PN Series GPS Tutorial Exchanging Data with an Earthmate PN Series GPS For more information see the PN Series GPS Help topics under Using Handheld Devices Is my GPS device supported DeLorme software interfaces with different GPS devices as outlined below e DeLorme GPS Devices Any DeLorme GPS will interface with a current DeLorme software release e USB GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a USB GPS if the device meets one of the following criteria e When the GPS ts attached to the computer it is recognized and displayed under Ports in the Microsoft Windows Device Manager e The unit is a Garmin USB device and the Garmin drivers are installed Note Magellan USB device
102. As Description Amusements Airport private Airport commercial public Airport general aviation public Business Amusement Recreation Specialty or Department Camping at data zoom level 14 p Camping at data zoom level 11 thru 13 Cemetery Educational Facility Exit with services at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 7 N rrt O lt Exit without services at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 7 a L Pe r ery Pe Exit food at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 Exit gas at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 Exit lodging at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 Exit other at data zoom levels 12 thru 17 Fast Food Gas Hospital Lodging Metropolitan City National Capital data zoom level 7 thru 10 National Capital data zoom levels 2 thru 6 Point of Interest smaller black square Population Center Public Service Religious buildings Rest Area with Facilities at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 Rest Area with Facilities at data zoom level 12 Rest Area without Facilities at data zoom levels 10 thru 11 ee i _ Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide F A Rest Area without Facilities at data zoom level 12 Restaurants general Restaurants specialty Small City State Capital e Unique Natural Feature at data zoom level 8 Line Features Topo Street Colors Colors Description County Boundary Dam Game Management District International Boundary Park Boundary Pipe
103. CW rrera pie tin dade dnigeaueahe nadine EA A EA 207 MOJIZA OGP Sorra E E NE E mi tania tank TE 207 Tracking a ROUE With GP Sivas bass eerie A eeelaes 210 Getting Back on Track When Off Course ccccc cece cece esse eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeneenas 211 Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking cccceceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 211 Playing Back a Log Pilescsrennaasaianre ciel datath ode naaenadai EEA asta 212 PFeEVIEWING a GPS LOG File sreccnira aus iine E tame thease aes elated aaa eee Raa 213 Viewing File Details for a GPS LOG c cece cccc cece eect esse eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeetseeaees 214 Monitorin YOUr GPS Slatus amp issuseosieiieerdienweteediedscwhed a a a pe line dient 215 Monitoring GPS Satellite INfFOrMAtION cc cece cece eee eeeeee ener ee eeeeeneenneneenees 216 Viewing SUN ANd Moon INFOrMAtION ccccceee esse cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeennneengs 217 MOOUE GPS is devirebadia a a a bebe a aia ena onadebe enor aan 218 USING Handheld DCW COS yieee a e rat enceie ceases scene eae E 221 HanOneld EXPO erener a verted ecndaen sida a aea indian 221 Creating a Map Package hiss siod cj isdssuincneiexeeleapesnoiave bniauseiewiakeasainuneeeiades 221 Setting Your Handheld Export Preferences c cece ccc cce ence eee eeeeeeeeseneneeeeeas 222 Data Zoom Level Scale Bar Translation ccc ccceee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesenaeees 224 GHG SIZE Compar SONS denne e a E a esata tu bikin daar E
104. DGPS and WAAS corrections available Blue WAAS enabled receivers only Indicates a WAAS satellite used for corrections Viewing Sun and Moon Information You can use the Sun Moon subtab in the GPS tab to view information about the rising and setting of the Sun and Moon relative to a specified date time and location To View Sun and Moon Information Use the following steps to view Sun and Moon information in the GPS tab Click the GPS tab Click the Sun Moon subtab Click the down arrow next to the date to change the date Use the scroll arrows to change the time After you update the date and time you can view a a R The Sun and Moon traveling across the compass as time passes with the Sun Moon compass In the center of the compass a shadow grows and shrinks and changes direction as the Sun moves across the compass similar to a sun dial Sun rise set and Moon rise set information Moon cycle information such as the day of the moon cycle and the phase 217 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide About GPS What is GPS The Global Positioning System GPS applies modern technology to the ancient basics of navigation The U S Department of Defense has developed and launched a series of positioning satellites in an orbiting constellation These satellites are used as reference points much the same way stars have been used in conventional navigation Using these satellites a GPS receiver can determine your posit
105. Default to cancel the reordering process and use the default tab order showing all available tabs Click OK Exit Topo USA Open Topo USA 83 Using Keyboard Shortcuts Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme Your application comes with three DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes e 3 D Navigation e Desktop Mapping e I n vehicle Navigation You cannot edit DeLorme schemes however you can create custom schemes that you can edit You can create as many additional custom schemes as you need To Select a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme Use the following steps to select a keyboard shortcut scheme l BE Options l 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 2 Select a scheme from the Scheme drop down list 3 Click Apply to activate the selected scheme Creating a New Custom Scheme You can create a custom keyboard shortcut scheme for different program uses To Create a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to create a custom scheme MS Options l 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 2 Click File and then click New The Scheme drop down list is completed with Custom Scheme where indicates the incremental number for the number of custom scheme files you have created Note If you want to rename the new scheme file click File click Rename and then type a new name in the Scheme text box Press the ENTER key on your keyboard when f
106. E EERE AE EEES EAA E EE AAE nies 155 Assembling a Multi page Map 127 Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom SV FV OO ecin e e 169 Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts 85 Auto Zoom TO TUIMN cc eee eee 207 Automatically Detect GPS 207 Average Grade ccceceeceeeeeees 182 Avoiding a Specified Area When ROUN Od ta inaciaticsveesceanterinsevernes 198 B Back ON Track cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 211 DIEM AD sitieiaaadaeaes 15 171 173 174 Breaking Linear Objects 160 C Category enii r a 170 Category Searches cceeeeee eens 107 Center ON GPS ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeees 211 Centering Routes on the Map 203 Centering the Map 0ceeeeeee 14 Centering the Map on an Address Book COMO Clini eamieraeeuee eatin etna 114 Changing Draw Object Types 145 Changing How POls Display on the Wap Aik erties ETA A 73 Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map cccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 126 Changing the Map Colors 72 Changing the Map Magnification 73 Chart of Supported Coordinate FOMO Senner a aE 18 EE E AE E E A E E E 161 Clear Ti ll orrien an a ONTT 212 Clearing a Profile c0eeeeees 186 Climbing Distance 0 ceeeee 182 Climbing Elevation 0000eee 182 Compass ROSE cc ccc ece eee e eee e eens 21 Configurations 81 Contact Information 265 269 CONMEOUMS wicutetledtrtitatciehervawtin
107. HE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation and was originally based on software copyright 1999 International 3 5 Machines Inc http www ibm com For more information on the Apache Software Foundation please see http www apache org 283 Index 3 3D A E E E 189 191 192 ID MaD eee a Ea 189 3 D Map Preferences 0 eee 192 3DTQ Region Coverage 0065 74 A ADOUL GPS inition tsa ae 218 Adding draw objects 155 156 161 163 Adding Points to Draw Objects 153 Adding Stops and ViasS 006 195 Address Book 113 114 115 116 117 ADP rerne ee a 38 Advance oenina a aa 170 Advanced Search ccccesseeeeees 102 Aligning Text and Graphic Items on YOU MaD ceiceastn Ret aren Series tal Ou ea uci 124 AIIM ANAC iarsira a i 216 Along the Way cceeeeeees 120 199 Anchor POSItION ccceeee eee eeeees 176 N
108. Lorme mapping program The tools provided help you to create unique symbols to add to your map The following are the tools available in the Draw Tool Box Pencil Draw freehand lines within the grid Line Draw lines by clicking and dragging to the end point you want within the grid Ellipse Create an ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size or shape of the ellipse you want Filled Ellipse Create a filled ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size or shape of the filled ellipse you want Rectangle Create a rectangle by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size of the rectangle you want Filled Rectangle Create a filled rectangle by clicking and dragging until you achieve the size of the filled rectangle you want Fill Use the fill tool to fill an area of the grid with a color chosen from the color palette poe 0 N gt 175 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Select Use select to choose an area of the symbol to copy from the Symbol Editing Grid and then paste into the same symbol or another Symbol in the grid Using the Transparency Option The transparency option in DeLorme XSym lets you display a selected color as transparent in the final symbol image you place on a map within a DeLorme mapping program For example you may want to view the symbol object without the square of the surrounding background color You would then select the background color to appear tr
109. MOON siemano vor 217 SYMON 163 T Welw Al O a E diwaawuusinnes ores 20 Tab Manager cccccceeeeee eee eeeees 81 Terrain Distance cccee eee e eee e ees 182 Text Label cccccccsseeeeeseeeeeeees 163 TOODA arna 63 64 65 66 67 TOPO COll Sarte ae Deck 72 TOW NY BOGE Ss cacicxwtesawistatanetaniaes eet 74 EACK a a A ila atest oue 156 TRACKING ereenn anena 210 211 Track Laye acia aa a 135 Trall yel viiviuesvivistivertevetecsser Ponts 135 TMRANSICR F WG eee 96 98 Transparency Option 0000ee 176 Travel Package ccccceeeeeeeeeees 120 HOI Detalls oceno a e 120 Tutorials 27 32 36 38 42 44 48 54 U Urban Area Color ccccccceeeeeeees 74 Use Custom Map Features 77 USGS Quadrangle Coverage 74 USING rere ue 18 78 182 UTM UPS titre sotiswcutesetantes 18 78 182 V Vertical Resize Tool cceeeeeees 69 VIS hata e A AE A AAA 195 View TWO MapS sesssererererersrrrrn 71 Viewing Hidden Draw Tools 134 W Wayponts ea 163 Waypoint ID cece eee eeeeeeeeeeees 169 WaypoOintLayer ccc cece eeee eens 135 WGS 84 aarnior 18 78 182 Wilat S Ne Wawin iaa 2 X XSym 168 169 170 172 173 174 175 176 177 Z ZIP Postal Code c ccc cece a eaeaes 257 LONC cision asda sce aed ee a eae aka eee eee 182 ZOOM COONS ororena 13 21 289 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Zooming IN and OUL eee
110. N 20 ccc cece cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 241 Firmware Updates for the Earthmate PN 20 cece cece cece eee e ee eeeneeeeeeenenees 242 States Included in Regional Map Packages cccccceeseeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeags 242 Exchanging Information with a Third party GPS DeVICE ccc cece ee cece teen eens 243 Sending Route Information to a Third party GPS De VICE ccc cece eee eee eee e eens 243 Sending Tracks to Your Third party GPS Device cc ccccccc cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 244 Sending Waypoints to Your Third party GPS De VICE c cece ce eee eee e eee eeeeee eee ees 245 Receiving a Route From Your Third party GPS Device cece eee c ee eeeeeeeeeeeees 245 Receiving a Track From Your Third party GPS De VICE cccc cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 246 Receiving Waypoints From Your Third party GPS Device ccc eee ee seen eee ee ees 247 Exchanging Information with a Palm OS Device c ccc cee ee cece teen eeeeeeenneees 248 Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS DeVICE ccceee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 248 Sending Route Information to Your Palm OS Device cc ccc ce cesses eect eeeeeeeeeeas 249 Sending Waypoints to Your Palm OS Device cece cece ce ceee eset eteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneas 250 Receiving a GPS Log From Your Palm OS De VICEC ccc cece ccee sete ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneees 250 Receiving a Route From Your Palm OS DeVvice
111. Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 5 Under Device Type select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device 6 Select Receive from Device 7 Select Route from the Object drop down list 8 Select Route from the Save As drop down list 9 Click Next 10 Select the route name or route number on the device that you want to receive 11 Select the route file you want to add the route information to If you want to create a new route file select New from the Route drop down list and type the new route name in the available text box 12 Click Receive from Device 13 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to receive from your device 14 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button E Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving a Track From Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive tracks created on your device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program Note When you open a track you ve imported from your GPS device you may notice that the track does not join existing roads Use the select tool in the Draw tab to snap the end node of the track to a road For more information see Snapping Draw Objects To Receive a Track Use the following steps to receive a track from your device and save it as a track 1 Connect your device to your computer
112. P Codes associated with the city at the current map center e Current Map Rectangle Searches for the specified location within the currently visible map area e Distance from Map Center Performs a search in all directions from the center of the map using the specified distance Also called a radius search The minimum distance you can use is 50 feet the maximum distance is 100 miles e Current Route Searches for objects within the specified distance from your currently active calculated route The minimum distance you can use is 500 feet the maximum distance is 10 miles Results are listed in the sequence they occur along the route from start point to finish point Note This search may take longer than other types of searches Type information in the text boxes to the right of the Find and Within fields The text boxes available are based on the selected Find and Within fields Tip A few text boxes are optional and you may get more results by leaving them blank To see if a text box is optional hold your cursor over the text box label or down arrow and read the ToolTip for that text box Click Search or press the ENTER key on your keyboard The Results list displays your search results with closest matching items at the top of the list Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate To center an item on the map select it and then click Go To or double click it A yellow MapTag disp
113. Pinhoti Trail Ruby Crest National Recreation Trail Sheltowee Trace National Recreation Trail Shining Sea Bike Trail Slickrock Bike Trail Snack Den Ridge Teton Crest Trail Timberline Trail Tonto Trail Wild Azalea Trail Wonderland Trail 278 TX lt O PAA TS gt lt WN lt MA UT NC TN WY AZ LA www nps gov bibe backcountry outermountai nloop htm www fs fed us oonf ozark recreation oht html www hmtc org apt html www alabamatrail org hikingAL Pinhoti Pinhoti Atm www travelnevada com activities_hiking asp www nevadawilderness org northeast ruby_tr ails htm www sheltoweetrace com www fs fed us r8 boone recreation sheltowee shtml www nps gov grca backcountry trails www fs fed us r8 kisatchie www nps gov mora trail wonder htm N A 479 968 2354 N A 702 873 8800 859 745 3100 N A 800 635 6622 N A N A 503 668 1700 N A 318 473 7160 Longmire Wilderness Information Center 360 569 HIKE White River Wilderness Information Center 360 663 2273 ext 222 Wilkeson Ranger Station 360 829 5127 Legal Information DeLorme Topo USA 7 0 Single User License Agreement This is an Agreement between you the end user and DeLorme By using the Topo USA 7 0 software data and documentation the System you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement If you do not agree with the terms of
114. Receiving Waypoints to from Earthmate PN 40 You can use Topo USA to exchange waypoints with the DeLorme Earthmate PN Series GPS Notes e Waypoints that are exchanged between Topo USA and the Earthmate PN 40 retain their exact waypoint symbol only if they are part of the Earthmate PN Series symbol set Otherwise the closest matching waypoint symbol is shown To rename delete or send receive a waypoint right click the item in the Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option You can also delete a waypoint by clicking it and then clicking the Delete button If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device go to the Device Setup gt Connect to Computer menu and select the option you want from the USB Setting drop down list For more information see the Exchanging PN Series Data tutorial To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Earthmate PN 40 GPS 1 Connect the Earthmate PN 40 to your computer with the USB cable and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears 2 On the device highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER 3 In Topo USA click the Exchange button on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens 4 In the left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Waypoint Layers and then click the waypoint layer or contents you want to send to the Earthmate PN 40 OR To send all waypoints just click Waypoints 5 Click
115. SA DVD into your DVD drive From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to Topo USA 7 0 and then click Topo USA 7 0 12 Getting Started Zooming In and Out You can use the drag and zoom feature zoom tools or the data zoom level Data zoom level is the relationship between what you see in a map view and how it exists in reality It is the amount of geographic data displayed on a computer monitor The data zoom level is similar to the traditional fractional relationship expressed on paper maps For example 1 24 000 1 100 000 1 500 000 and so on to quickly change the zoom level of the map view Notes e Increasing the data zoom level number shows a smaller geographic area at greater detail e Decreasing the data zoom level number shows a larger geographic area at lesser detail e If you view both the right primary and left secondary maps at different data zoom levels a box or lines depending on the current data zoom level displays on the map that is zoomed out the furthest The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the other map e If you view the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are not equally represented on the screen 50 50 a box or lines displays on the map that is covering the most screen area The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the other map To Drag and Zoom In Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map 1 Click
116. Select each check box for data you want to add and clear each check box for data you want to remove 5 Follow the remaining on screen instructions to install or remove the data 92 Creating Editing and Saving Projects Map Files Overview You can save all of your work as a single project file so you can open it again later You can create various map views and Save each in a different project What is a Project A project consists of the map center coordinates the current data zoom level the current magnification rotation preferences and links to routes or draw layers you have added to it As you create routes and draw layers they are added to the current project Projects are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Projects Each associated file is saved in its respective folder in the C DeLorme Docs directory For example a draw layer is saved in C DeLorme Docs Draw Can Reuse Draw Layers and Routes in Other Projects After creating routes or adding your own roads you may not want to do all of the work again in another project You can share routes and draw layers between projects using the Add button in the Map Files tab Can Send Routes or Draw Layers to Another DeLorme User Projects including their routes and draw layers can be packaged into one Transfer File for convenience The transfer file facilitates e mailing copying project information to other computers and copying projects between DeLorme program
117. Send A progress bar indicates the copy status 6 Click Done To Receive Waypoints Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Earthmate GPS PN 40 GPS 1 Connect the Earthmate PN 40 to your computer with the USB cable and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears 2 On the device highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER 233 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 6 7 In Topo USA click the Exchange button ae on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens In the right pane of the dialog box If you want to receive one waypoint at a time into Topo USA click the plus sign next to Waypoints and then click the waypoint you want to receive OR If you want to receive all waypoints just click Waypoints In the left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Waypoint Layers and then click the layer where you want to send the waypoint If you want to copy the waypoint to a new waypoint layer click New and then click Waypoint Layer Note If you do not select a layer and an existing waypoint layer is highlighted in the left pane of the dialog box the waypoint is received in that layer If a non waypoint option is highlighted for example a track layer a new waypoint layer is automatically created Click Receive A progress bar indicates the copy status Click Done Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE Exchange on the GPS tab or th
118. Setting Your Routing Preferences To move and delete Draw Map Notes see Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes To Move a Route MapNote Use the following steps to move a MapNote Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Click the Move Route MapNotes button bal Click the MapNote to select it Drag the text box to the new location AA WU N e Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map All the routes you create are automatically displayed The active route displays as a gold line outlined in red Each inactive route displays as a dashed orange line outlined in green You can choose to display only certain routes without deleting them from the map To Display a Route on the Map Use the following steps to display a hidden route on the map 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 In the route list on the left select the check box next to the route you want to display OR To center the map on the route double click the route name To Hide a Route from the Map Use the following steps to hide a route from view on the map 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab 2 In the route list on the left clear the check box next to each route you want to hide from view on the map OR Right click the route you want to clear from the map view point to Manage Route and then click Hide Route To Center the Map on a Route Use the following steps to center a route on the map
119. Share Launch the Eartha Community Atlas ECA wizard where you can upload information to the ECA website Set route start finish and stop points and calculate a route This feature can also be found on the Route tab Start or stop your GPS connection This feature can also be found on the GPS tab Exchange routes waypoints or tracks with a DeLorme Earthmate PN Series GPS or PDA Combine images and data with GPS information on the map with the GeoTagger Wizard Grab and pan the map in any direction Profile a linear object on the map You can also click the Profile tab right click the linear object on the map and select the Profile option Measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Get information about a location on the map You can also right click a location on the map and select the Info option Open the Options dialog box to set GPS display map feature and keyboard Shortcut preferences Tip You can show or hide toolbar options and change the order of the toolbar options 22 Getting Started Using the Help System Help Overview There are several ways to get more information about the program s features and functionality On screen Help There are three ways to access Help within the program e Pop up Tutorials When you perform some actions in the program a pop up Did you know tutorial opens These provide additional informatio
120. Symbols select the symbol set from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays The symbol selection for the new symbol set displays under Symbols in Set and the Symbol Editing Grid updates with the first symbol of the new symbol set 178 Profiling Linear Objects Creating a Profile You can use the Profile tab to create elevation graphs of linear objects on the map Linear objects can be part of the map or part of a draw layer A linear object is profiled from one end of the line to the other The profile includes statistical data you can determine which available data you want to display You can also create a profile that includes user data from some athletic devices from Timex and Suunto The list below includes samples of map features and draw objects that you can profile e Routes created using the e Streams pouty e Tracks created using the Draw tab or imported from e Trails a GPS device e Roads e Lines created using the Draw tab e Boundaries e Arcs created using the Draw tab e Railroads e Splines created using the Draw tab e Power lines e Measure Lines created with the Measure tool e Pipelines Notes e You can create profiles only on 2 D maps however with split screen functionality you can view the highlight of the profiled object on a 3 D map e You can also profile an object or route at any time by right clicking the item and selecting Profile from the shortcut menu e The Profile
121. To view information about the Route click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another You can copy draw objects from one draw file to another using the right click feature in the draw file list Copying retains the draw object in the original draw file while placing a copy of it in a selected draw file If you want to move a draw object to another draw file see Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File To Copy a Draw Object to a Different Draw File Use the following steps to copy a draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 3 Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy 4 Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected 5 Right click the draw object that you want to copy to another draw file point to Copy To and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to The draw object remains in the original draw file and is copied to the selected draw file Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File You can move a draw object to a different draw file using the right click feature in the draw file list In order to move a draw object to another draw file a secondary
122. Topo USA 7 0 User Guide Updated for Service Pack 1 September 25 2008 This user guide is a printable version of the Topo USA Help system When you are using Topo USA use the Help system to take advantage of links to related Help topics Table Of Contents GENO SAECO wii dinner tuid na ndvannnted a ee raia rea nna 1 Welcome tO TODO US Areare E acne ueaedroen eee ap ndeaceniemep oie 1 Whats Newin TODO USA vivstasneseurdiwdeatedubienen lik earn leeuiemun iets a a aa KEE 2 Frequently Asked QUAESTIONS ccc cece cece eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeaaeeeeeeeennas 3 HEP UTD Stands Gxt aa a a ted tes mutacin ow on tae eee cae ees 8 TODO USA Datla REGIONS suits ears eta a aaa Rhea alana eioneaen 12 BaS FUNCION crac hocnseusrerotune a e a a ude eaineau ran toe acrunersine sent sees 12 RUPANING TODO USA errita e a iva mak aa E 12 ZOOMING Land OUT mer R E a E E E R 13 Panning Centering the Mapwisidsciciitintbal again E E E 14 Copying Your Map tothe CllO D6 Gl d sinne aa aa aa 15 Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG IMAGE nsnnnnnnnnnnnnnererererrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 15 Measuring Distance and Area ssssessrrsrerorrrrerrrrrrerrrrerrrrrrsrrrrrrrrerrrrerrrrrrerre 16 Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats s ssseserrrererersrsrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 18 CACAN WHOS Ter EE a E A Dealnaeeaiaiclaons 19 EXIEING TOPO USA resprirerteiei oneri a i a r aka eee wrens 20 ADOUNC INC ACC eraan E a E E EE TE 20 TIDA a A A EA A
123. Trail Balsam NC TN www nps gov arsm 865 436 1200 Mountain www nps gov gqrsm gsmsite justforfun html h Trail iking Black Creek www fs fed us r8 mississippi 601 965 4391 Trail Black www nps gov boaf blackheritagetrail htm 617 742 5415 Heritage Trail www afroammuseum org trail htm Centennial www fs fed us r2 blackhills index shtml 605 673 9200 Trail Chattooga www fs fed us r8 fms forest recreation trailm 864 638 9568 Trail atrix shtml Chilkoot AK www nps gov klgo chilkoot htm 800 661 0486 Trail Canada Freedom www nps gov bost freedom_trail htm 617 242 5642 Trail www thefreedomtrail org Glacier www nps gov romo visit park hike sugqgested 970 586 1206 Gorge Trail html Greenstone www nps gov isro grnstone htm N A Ridge Trail John Muir CA www pcta org about_trail muir over asp 916 349 2109 Trail Kalalau HI www state hi us dinr dsp NaPali na_pali htm 808 587 0300 Trail Kekekabic MN www kek org index2 html 800 818 HIKE Trail King Ravine NH www fs fed us r9 forests white_mountain recr 603 528 8721 Trail eation hiking Long Path NJ NY www dec state ny us website dlf publands cat 845 256 3000 s hiking www nynjtc org trails longpath Long Trail www greenmountainclub org page php id 2 802 244 7037 Ouachita AR OK www friendsot org N A National Recreation Trail 2171 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Outer Mountain Loop Trail Ozark Highlands National Recreation Trail
124. You can also use the Exchange dialog to download waypoint and tracks to the Draw tab See the Help topics under Using Handheld Devices for more information Important To add a draw file such as a track to a project click the Add button on the Map Files tab For more information see Editing a Project If you import this That results from this The following is imported type of file source Text File txt Lat Lon Text File Annotation draw objects displaying with the current symbol and line style selections GPS Log File gpl Any DeLorme product Line or waypoint object that supports GPS displaying with the current tracking line preferences 139 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide GPX File gpx DeLorme product on May contain one or more third party application routes tracks or waypoints as well as comments Note e When you import a GPX file all the waypoints tracks comments and routes found in the file are imported at the same time e When you download a GPX file from www geocaching com the hints on the website are added to the Comments column of the file When you export the file to an Earthmate PN Series GPS the comments are included Location File loc Waypoint file from Coordinate information name www geocaching com and URL link Magellan Track Magellan Track Log Latitude longitude elevation File log name and date time if specified Magellan Waypoint Magellan Waypoint Fil
125. a transparent background To Print Maps With a Transparent Background Use the following steps to turn off the yellow background when printing a map 1 Center the map on the area you want to print 126 U pP WN 6 Printing Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select the Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Click Setup The Print Setup dialog box displays At the bottom of the dialog box select the Print Maps with a Transparent Background check box Click OK All map printouts print with a transparent background To Print Maps With a Yellow Black Background Use the following steps to turn on the yellow black background when printing a map Se oe a Center the map on the area you want to print Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select the Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Click Setup The Print Setup dialog box displays At the bottom of the dialog box clear the Print Maps with a Transparent Background check box Click OK All map printouts print with a yellow background or black if you are using High Contrast Colors Manually Assembling a Multi page Map After you have printed the sheets for your multi page map you are ready to assemble the map Before you begin be sure you have a clear work surface large enough to accommodate the final map size You will need the following tools to assemble your map Pencil Razor
126. aa a 63 SHOWING HIGING TOOIDar QDUIONS ccsivcisinaciveiciwaaveticiten a A a 63 Reordering the Toolbar Options cccccccccccce eee e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanas 63 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide TO Create New Projects scared ieae ravae acne a a ned Maka tiaideepinhdee aaa 63 TOS ave a Projectie aaa ick Ala nctha oun a bate tiaina eb anbal aan eke ee iain 63 IE Or A Ll Ur Avaieth atone headin ds nein ar d aae e ea a Seae da cate caus ee eat 63 POs PHN EAC Map S CEC roae A ATE enced neem A aetna ees eis 63 Be eet d ie CS 8y MaD ee ane tee aren Re a eR oP 64 To Share Online With Eartha Community AtlasS ccc ccceee cece eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeees 64 TO Create a ROUTO priren iy nieaa a E EE aud RNS Re 64 To Start Stop Your GPS Connection sesesesssssrsrerrrrrrrrsrerrrrrrrrrrnrerrrrernrrrrrrrrre 65 To Exchange Files with a GPS or PDA cccccccecceeee cece eens eeeeeeeeeeeeeneneenenegs 65 To Add Images and Data to a GPS Location sesesesererersrnrsrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrene 65 ToGraband Pan the Ma Deeriin o a E aa E 65 TO Cr ate a Prole eraran a a a e A E eens 65 TO Measure DISCAING Eariri an E OE EE EEA 66 To Get Information About a Location s s sssserererererrsrererrrrrrrrrrnrerrrrerrrrrrrrrrre 66 To Open the Options Dialog BOX mirtisrrireriiasia i no a E O 67 Customizing the Map and Tab Display ccc ccccc cece cece cece ee eeeeeeseeeneeeeesaneeeees 69 Display ODON OVelVICW
127. ab information for tracks Getting Started Frequently Asked Questions These questions are asked most frequently by our customers How do enable Earthmate PN Series GPS device exchange features in Topo USA During the product installation you were give the option to select each Earthmate PN Series GPS you own If you did not select a device and you do own an Earthmate PN Series GPS you can enable the exchange features in Topo USA using the Help menu You must enable the exchange features to send and receive maps waypoints tracks and routes to and from your device You must also activate your device To Enable Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange Features in Topo USA Use the following steps to enable the exchange features in Topo USA 1 From the Topo USA Help menu click Enable Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange Features 2 If you have not enabled Topo USA the following message displays Would you like to use Topo USA 7 0 to send receive maps waypoints tracks and routes to from an Earthmate PN Series GPS Click Yes to enable the exchange features OR If you have already enabled Topo USA the following message displays Topo USA 7 0 has already been updated to include the Earthmate PN Series GPS features Click OK 3 Restart Topo USA How do activate an Earthmate PN Series device in Topo USA You must activate your Earthmate PN Series GPS before you transfer maps waypoints tracks or routes To
128. add a draw object to the map a draw file is automatically created that includes that object The draw file type varies depending on the draw object that was created Draw Object Type Draw File Type Routable Road Road Layer Routable Trail Trail Layer 145 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Waypoint Waypoint Layer Track Track Layer Area Object Polygon Circle Rectangle Draw Layer Point Object MapNote Text Label Symbol Image Line Object Line Arc Spline You can right click a draw object on the map and change it to a road track trail waypoint or draw layer depending on the type of draw object you selected When the draw file type is changed the original draw file is maintained and a copy is made and switched to the new draw file type leaving you with two files the original draw file and the copied draw file which has a new draw file type To Change a Draw Object Use the following steps to change a draw object type 1 Use the Draw tab to place a draw object on the map 2 To change a routable trail track or line to a road layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw and then click Copy to Active Road Layer OR To change a routable road or routable trail to a track layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw and then click Copy to Active Track Layer OR To change a routable road track or line to a trail layer right click the object point to Manage Draw a
129. age that you want your route to cover from the Miles Per Page drop down list Note When setting the number of miles per page keep in mind that the number of miles is not the distance of the route Instead it equals the width of the strip map and determines the scale of the map Select Increasing from the Trip Time Distance drop down list to end the route directions with the total time and distance OR Select Decreasing from the Trip Time Distance drop down list to start the directions with the total time and distance similar to a countdown Optional To view a preview of your selection click View Click Print Printing a Profile You can print a profile you have created To Print a Profile Use the following steps to print a profile 1 2 3 Create a profile Click the Print tab and click the Profile subtab to display the Profile options Optional Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer change printer properties select paper size and select paper orientation Click OK when finished Under Profile select On Map or Profile Only If you select On Map select whether you want to print the profile as shown on the Left or Right map IF you THEN you will print select this option On Map The background map with the main Profile graph at the bottom of the page Profile Only The main Profile graph without the map Note Click the Copy to Clipboard button a to 121 Topo USA
130. aiian Airlines Midwest Express Airlines Northwest Airlines Southwest Airlines Recreational Contacts Tip You can find most trails using QuickSearch on the Find tab If a search is not successful you can use the Advanced search option on the Find tab to search for trails e If you know the name of the trail you want to search for select Name and or Category from the Find drop down list and then select a Within option U S State is helpful when you do not know the city town the trail is located in Type the name of the trail in the Name text box type trail in the Keywords text box type the location information if applicable and then click Search e f you do not know the name of the trail select Category from the Find drop down list and then select the Within option Type trail in the Keywords text box type the location information if applicable and then click Search 2 2 Recreational and Travel Contact Information National Recreation I nformation Contact Web Site Information Phone cio eee Recreation Recreation gov WWW www recreation gov OV 877 444 6777 444 6777 National www fs fed us 202 205 8333 Forest Service NFS Locator www fs fed us recreation map state_list shtml 202 205 1706 National Park Www nps gov NPS Center for Service Recreation amp Conservation 202 354 6900 NPS Locator www nps gov archive parks html National www bim gov nics monuments BLM National Monuments La
131. al Cadence Purple rps rom rph Depends on data Temperature Maroon For C Depends on data 186 Profiling Linear Objects To View Information for a Specific Data Type When you have multiple types of user data you can choose which type to focus on using the follow function 1 Profile a track with user data The data types display in the profile toolbar The scale for the currently followed data type displays to the right of the graph 2 To follow a different data type e n the toolbar click the arrow next to the data type and select Follow from the menu OR e Right click the line for the data type on the graph point to Follow in the shortcut menu and click the data type 3 Move your cursor along the data profile in the profile graph to view the data in the info box For more information about viewing the profile graph see Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs To Hide or Show a Specific Data Type You can hide and show data on the profile graph 1 Profile a track with user data The data types display in the profile toolbar The scale for the currently followed data type displays to the right of the profile graph 2 To hide or show a data type on the toolbar click the data type button to toggle it on or off To Change the User Data Type Color You can change the user data type default colors or change from a user defined color back to the default 1 Profile a track with user data The data types dis
132. an add lines arcs and splines to a draw file and adjust their line style color width and display them with map line features Use lines to mark boundaries or to add railroads or utility lines You can draw lines with varied line styles weights and colors including lines that reflect actual map line types Use arcs to add curved line features to a draw file You can draw arcs with varied line styles weights and colors including lines that reflect actual map line types Note An arc is created by entering only three points on the map The first and second points determine the distance of the first arc base from the last arc base The third point placed between the first two determines the radius of the arc and fixes the arc in place Use splines to add trails or any other map feature that contains curves You can draw splines with varied line colors weights and styles including lines 155 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide that reflect actual map line types Note As you draw a spline points are entered in much the same way as those entered when creating a line The difference between a line and a spline is that when you enter each point the line segment between the points curves instead of staying straight To Draw a Line Arc or Spline Use the following steps to draw a line arc spline 1 Click the Draw tab ft 2 Click and hold the Line Arc Spline tool 7 ew and select the tool you want 3 Select a line arc
133. an add tracks to the map and adjust their line style color width and display them with map line features To Draw a Track Use the following steps to draw a track 156 Se ee Using the Draw Tools Click the Draw tab Click and hold the Track Waypoint tool and select the Track tool Pel Select a track style from the Style drop down list Click the color button next to the Style drop down list to select a track color Select a track width from the Width drop down list Select the Highlight check box to make your track appear translucent on the map Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the points on the map as you draw the track As you add each point a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the bearing or angle leg line segment length and total length of the track on the map Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected Click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the line options e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the track click the last point on the map screen and then click Done OR Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your
134. and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in a down right direction on the map to encompass the area you want to display A view box displays on the screen and changes dimension as you move the mouse A label displays the data zoom level at the current map center 2 Once you reach the map area or data zoom level you want to display release the mouse button The area you selected fills the map window the map re centers and the map view adjusts to show the appropriate level of detail Tip You can move the view box to another location by pressing the SHIFT key at anytime during this procedure To Drag and Zoom Out Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map 1 Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in an up left direction on the map A staircase with a small circle displays on the screen 2 Continue dragging the mouse in an up left direction The small circle moves up the steps one step per data zoom level A label displays the data zoom level to the bottom right of the staircase 3 Once you reach the data zoom level you want to display release the mouse button The map view adjusts to display the appropriate level of detail The map center is retained on your screen 13 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Zoom I n Out Using the Zoom Tools There are two sets of zoom tools The zoom tools for the right map are located in the control panel The zoom tools for the lef
135. ansparent To Make Part of a Symbol Transparent Use the following steps to make part a symbol transparent 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool eth to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays 5 Select the symbol you want to edit from the Symbol Selection The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Select the Transparent option under Transparency 7 Click the Select Color tool Pal The pointer changes to a dropper tool 8 Select the color on the symbol you want to appear transparent The Transparent Color display box updates with the selected color and the Image Preview displays the chosen color area as transparent 9 To display all colors select the Opaque option under Transparency The Image Preview reflects this change 10 Click OK when finished Note Be sure the color in the symbol you want to appear transparent is not repeated in another part of the symbol you want to display as opaque Select a new color from the color palette and fill the area on the symbol you want to display as transparent with the new color Use the Select Color tool to select the new color in the symbol grid Anchor Position Being aware of Cursor Position is important for choosing the anchor position of a symbol The anchor is the pixel position
136. ap Or right click the POI search result and click Info to view the extended information in the Info tab POI searches will find more objects than may be currently visible on the map To see all POIs on the map click the Options button on the toolbar click the Map Features tab select the Points of Interest Minor check box and click OK To Find a Point of I nterest Use the following steps to find a point of interest with the POIs subtab 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the POIs subtab 3 Type the name of the point of interest you are searching for for example Wal Mart or Sheraton in the Name text box 4 Type the category that best fits your POI name for example type Hotel if you are searching for a Sheraton type Department Store if you are searching for Wal Mart in the Keywords text box See Keywords for Category Searches for more information OR Select an appropriate keyword from the Keywords drop down list examples and history 5 Type the distance you want to search in the Distance text box Type the number of miles followed by mi for example 5 mi 6 Select From Map Center or Along Current Route 7 Click Search If your search is Very Successful tThe results list displays and if there is one excellent match the map centers on that place and a yellow box displays at the location of the POI match Successful The results list displays Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you fi
137. arent yellow background paper orientation paper size and paper source click Setup The Print Setup dialog displays Note From the Setup dialog box click Properties to view additional options If the options are available set the graphics mode to use raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics Consult your printer manual for additional information 9 Click Print to print your map Tip To adjust the print area of a Page map select the Lock Print Center check box select the Select tool h and then drag the frame to the new position Printing a Route and Directions You can print maps of your route and route directions for any route you create Additionally you can save your directions or along the way results in a text file For more information see Saving Route Directions as Text For specific recommendations on best printing results see your printer manual To Print a Route Use the following steps to print an existing route 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab Note If you do not have a route on this Project the route options are unavailable 2 Optional Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer change printer properties select a transparent yellow background select paper size and select paper orientation Click OK when finished If the options are available under Printer Properties set the graphics mode to use raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to pr
138. aring a Profile Once you select an object to profile you can clear the highlighted feature from the map and the profile graphs from the Profile tab To Clear a Profile Use one of the options below to clear the map object highlight and the currently displaying Profile graph e Click the Clear button LS 4 in the Profile tab OR e Press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking a profiled object on the map OR e Right click the profiled object and click Clear Profile User Profile Data User profile data is data you add to a DeLorme mapping program You can attach it to a track or gpl file using GeoTagger or use the Exchange Wizard to download a track that contains the data from a device that records GPS data such as some athletic devices from Timex and Suunto or an Earthmate PN Series GPS Types of Data You can profile several types of data When you profile a track or a gpl file that includes the data the profile graph displays a colored line for each type of data The types of data their scales and default graph colors modifiable are Data Type Default Color Map Elevation Black ft mi m or km Default type from map Matches the units set on the Display tab in topographic data the Options dialog box Track Elevation Green ft mi m or km Matches the units set on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Speed Blue fos mph mps or kmh Matches the units set on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Ped
139. articipate in forum discussions You do not have to be registered or signed in to browse the website If you want to post to a forum or manage map information you must register and sign in AEJ To launch the Eartha Community Atlas ECA wizard click the ECA button on the toolbar You can access the website from the first page of the wizard If you need help with the Eartha Community Atlas website click Help on the toolbar Using MapShare MapShare lets you create static maps with or without route directions or profiles to send to your friends family and associates See the Using MapShare tutorial for more information For help with e mailing maps routes and profiles using the MapShare Wizard click the Help button on any screen in the wizard To open the MapShare Wizard click the MapShare button O on the toolbar 263 Recreational and Travel Contact I nformation Road Condition Construction Contact Information This list provides phone number and website information by state or province for road conditions and road construction forecasts in the United States and Canada For information in Mexico go to www travel state gov State Province Road Road Construction ory Alberta 780 427 2731 Calgary 403 246 5853 Edmonton 780 471 6056 Arizona 888 411 7623 www dot state az us www azdot qov Arkansas 501 569 2227 569 2227 800 245 1672 245 1672 WWW www arkansasinterstates com www arkansasinterstates com
140. atetx us tx us ee WWW www dot stateutus www dot stateutus ut us www aot state vt us travelinfo htm 800 429 7623 268 Recreational and Travel Contact Information Virginia 511 511 www virginiadot org default_flash asp 800 367 7623 800 367 7623 www 51llva org Washington 800 695 7623 800 695 7623 www wsdot wa gov traffic West Virginia PNA 877 982 7623 www wvdot com 6_motorists 6_motorists htm 800 762 3947 800 762 3947 www dot state wi us Wyoming 307 772 0824 888 996 7623 www wyoroad info Outside WY 307 772 0824 Yukon Territory 867 456 7623 867 456 7623 www gov yk ca roadreport 877 456 7623 877 456 7623 Hotel Car and Airline Contact Information This list provides hotel car rental and airline information Hotel Information Hotel Name Phone Number AmeriHost Inn 800 434 5800 AmeriSuites 877 774 6467 Reservations 800 833 1516 Baymont Inn amp Suites 866 999 1111 Reservations 877 229 6668 Country Inns amp Suites 888 201 1746 Courtyard by Marriott 800 321 2211 Reservations 888 236 2427 U S and Canada Crowne Plaza 888 303 1746 Reservations 877 227 6963 Doubletree Hotels 800 222 TREE Econo Lodge 800 55 ECONO Reservations 877 424 6423 269 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Embassy Suites 800 EMBASSY Holiday Inn 800 HOLI DAY Reservations 877 410 6667 Holiday Inn Express 800 HOLI DAY Reservations 800 465 4329 Homewood Suites 800 CALLHOME Howard J ohnson 800 446
141. ay help you use the various features in Topo USA The Did You Know pop up tutorials provide hints while you are working in the application Tips e To disable a specific pop up tutorial select the Don t Show Again check box before you close it e To disable all pop up tutorials click the Help button T on the toolbar and click Shut Off All Pop up Tutorials Getting Started e To enable all pop tutorials after you have shut off one or more click the Help button on the toolbar and click Reset All Pop up Tutorials Control Panel Zoom the map out in Drag the map cursor in an up left direction to zoom quickly the map out or drag it in a down right direction to zoom the map in Pan the map quickly Position your cursor on the edge of the map it becomes a white hand that you can use to drag the map to the new location Update the coordinate Update your measurement preferences at any time format that displays in using the Display tab in the Options dialog box the Control Panel View the last map center Press the middle button in the Compass Rose in the Control Panel to center the map on the previous map view This button performs an undo function for the last pan or zoom up to 256 times Measurement Tool Measure the Use the measure tool to draw a polygon on the map area perimeter of a and determine its area and perimeter J ust click point specified location on the by point to draw the polygon on the map and then map double
142. ays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview a 168 Using the Draw Tools or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol With DeLorme XSym you can create a custom symbol set that includes all of the waypoint symbols on your third party GPS device By creating this custom symbol set the waypoints you create display the same in both the mapping application and on your third party GPS device no matter where they originated Third party GPS waypoint symbols are identified by their waypoint ID number which is assigned by the device s manufacturer To successfully view third party GPS waypoint symbols in the mapping application you must assign the proper waypoint identification number to each symbol you add to the custom symbol set Important To create a custom symbol set of your third party GPS device s waypoint symbols you must contact the device s manufacturer to obtain the graphic files and the waypoint ID number associated with each symbol Notes e Waypoint ID numbers vary by manufacturer and model e If you import multiple waypoints from a third party GPS device without assigning a waypoint ID to each first the waypoints display in the mapping application with the same default symbol e f you do not know the identification number for a third party GPS device s waypoint impo
143. b and view your track or GPS log Find a point on the track or GPS log where you Know you took a picture or recorded data Make a note of the time Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the steps When you get to the screen with the offset option highlight the image or data point in the file list The image or data timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box 261 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Calculate the Timestamp Offset When Using the Wizard Use the following steps to calculate the timestamp offset if you are using the GeoTagger Wizard L 2 3 262 Click Cancel to exit the GeoTagger Wizard Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture or recorded data Make a note of the time Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the steps until you get to the screen with the offset option Highlight the image or data point in the file list The image or data timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box Sharing Online Using Eartha Community Atlas Eartha Community Atlas is an interactive atlas where communities exchange their common experiences and location based information using shared customizable searchable maps You can geoplace photos on a map upload waypoints upload and download tracks and p
144. box if you want to rename the project 3 Click Save To Print To print a map using the current settings in the Print tab click the Print button on the toolbar For more information see Printing a Map To Print the Map Screen To print the current view as it displays on the screen the control panel tab area map view and so on click the Print Screen button ma on the toolbar 63 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Share Maps To share your current map view a route map and directions or a profile click the MapShare button O on the toolbar to open the MapShare Wizard MapShare lets you share maps even 3 D maps routes and profiles For information on e mailing maps routes and profiles with the MapShare Wizard click the Help button in the MapShare Wizard To Share Online With Eartha Community Atlas ala To launch the Eartha Community Atlas ECA wizard click the ECA button on the toolbar You can also access the Eartha Community Atlas website See Using Eartha Community Atlas for more information To Create a Route To set route points using the toolbar 1 Type the location where you want to start your route in the Start text box next to the green Start button OR Click the green Start button and then click the location on the map where you want to start your route OR Select an address book entry a previous location or your current GPS position from the Start drop down list 2 Ty
145. c maps produced by the United States Geological Survey Downloaded using the NetLink tab o Aerial Imagery DOQQ 15 17 Black and white 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography Downloaded using the NetLink tab o Color Aerial Imagery 13 17 True color 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography Downloaded using the NetLink tab o Topo USA 7 0 Data Series 8 17 All vector data points lines and polygons in DeLorme Topographic datasets and any other user vectors other than draw layers Tip This is the same data as on the detailed data DVDs that came with your PN Series GPS If you installed the detailed data clear the Topo USA 7 0 Data Series check box on the Handheld tab of the Options dialog box Raster maps have very large file sizes For information on how data zoom levels display on the Earthmate PN Series GPS see Data Zoom Level Scale Bar Translation 223 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Data Zoom Level Scale Bar Translation Your DeLorme application and the Earthmate PN Series GPS use different methods for representing the map s scale In Topo USA scale is represented as a data zoom level 1 17 The Earthmate PN Series GPS uses a scale bar based on the units chosen in the Device Setup Page If you create a saved map package to send to your Earthmate PN Series GPS the following table describes what the data zoom levels translate to on the Earthmate PN Series GPS Scale Bar Label oem 16km
146. ceive from Device 5 Select Waypoints from the Object Type drop down list 6 From the Save As drop down list select to save the waypoints as User Map Data Waypoints 7 Click Next 8 Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the Waypoint File drop down list To create a new waypoint file select New from the Waypoint File drop down list and type the new waypoint file name in the text box 251 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 9 If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol such as the default red flag select the Use Current Waypoint active waypoint option If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third party GPS device select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then select the appropriate set from the drop down list For more information on creating a custom symbol set see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol 10 Click Receive From Device 11 Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive 12 Click Finish The waypoint information displays Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Le Exchange On the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Exchanging Information with a Pocket PC Device Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send maps you cut using the Handheld Export tab to your Pocket PC device See Creating a Map Package for more information Not
147. click to close the polygon The area and perimeter display in the center of the polygon Tab Area Adjust the size of the Adjust the size of the tab area by dragging the top or tab area right side of the tab area Show hide or reorder Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to tabs show hide or reorder tabs Import or export a tab Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to configuration file import or export a tab configuration file Map Area Know the best data Click the Options button in the toolbar to open the zoom level to view Options dialog box and then click the Handheld tab certain datasets The green range in the Zoom Range sliders next to each type of data show the best data zoom level range for that data Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Map Display Settings Know the best map Street Map Colors are best viewed when Contours feature options to Shaded Relief and Land Cover are turned off Use the display with Street Map Map Features tab in the Options dialog box to clear Colors these features Map Files Learn how to add route To add existing route and or draw files to your and or draw layers to project click the Add button and select the Draw your Project File or Route File option Modify a Find search Right click a result item in the Find tab to add it asa result MapNote insert it as a stop in your route copy the information to your clipboard and so on Stop a page in a multi If you d
148. compatible draw file must exist Moving a draw object removes it from the current draw file If you do not want to remove it but copy it to another draw file see Copying a Draw Object from One Draw File to Another To Move a Draw Object to a Different Draw File Use the following steps to move a draw object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map 147 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 3 Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy 4 Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected 5 Right click the draw object you want to move point to Move To and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to all compatible draw files display in the Move To shortcut list The draw object is moved to the new destination Using Draw Objects Copying and Placing Draw Objects You can copy any draw object you place on the map To Copy Draw Objects Use the following steps to copy draw objects 1 Open the existing project that contains the draw object you want to copy 2 Click the Draw tab 3 To copy a single draw object click the Select tool A and then click the draw object on the map A box displays around the active object OR To c
149. create a route 1 Right click the map location where you want to begin your route point to Create Route in the shortcut menu and click Set as Start 2 Right click the map location where you want to end your route point to Create Route in the shortcut menu and click Set as Finish 3 If the route doesn t automatically calculate right click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and click Calculate Road Quickest Calculate Road Shortest Calculate Trail or Calculate Direct Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box displays with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK 4 Optional Click the Route tab Then click the Directions subtab to view the route directions the Advanced subtab to display advanced routing options or Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Create a Route Using the Toolbar See Using the Toolbar to view the steps for creating a route using the toolbar 194 Routing Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias You can add or insert stops or vias in any route you create A stop is a location along a route where you want to stop and then proceed from A via is a point on the map that you want your route to go through You can use stops and vias to route you through a particular place
150. ctions that you saved to your hard disk drive are available from the data drop down list Note For more information about saving data to your hard disk drive see Saving Topo USA Data to Your Hard Disk Drive Note The graphic above displays color aerial imagery available separately from DeLorme Additional Facts About Split Window Functionality The maps interact as follows e If you are viewing both the right and left maps at different data zoom levels a box or lines depending on the current data zoom level displays on the map that is zoomed out the furthest The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the opposite map e If you are viewing the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are not equally represented on the screen 50 50 a box or lines displays on the map that is covering the larger amount of screen area The box lines indicate the area that is in view on the opposite map e Both windows are centered on the same coordinate position Panning or rotating in one map causes the same action on both maps e The left map window has its own zoom level controls You can change the zoom level of the left map without affecting the zoom level in the right map window However after you adjust the zoom level in the left map window the Zoom tools on the Control Panel incrementally adjust the map For example if the left map is at zoom level 6 0 and the right map at zoom level 8 0 and you click the Zoom Ou
151. d 3 mph or more and your GPS status 3 D status provides the most accurate information To Monitor Your GPS Status Speed and Heading Speed Displays the speed you are traveling based on the units you selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Heading Displays as degrees T True North or M Magnetic North based on the bearing selected on the Units area in the Options dialog box Heading is provided as a numerical value as well as a compass direction Coordinates Elevation Coordinates The coordinate fields display based on the units you selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box Elevation Displays the current elevation if the GPS status is 3 D and is based on the selected Units preference Elevation can be displayed with a 2 D status your position is indicated accurately on your screen as you travel unless you are in an area where your elevation varies greatly GPS Status No GPS A red circle with a slash indicates the GPS receiver is not yet detected by your computer This status usually displays when initialization first begins Acquiring A red blinking circle indicates the GPS receiver is not yet receiving sufficient satellite data to determine your position This status displays while the GPS receiver is acquiring satellite data and can take several minutes 2 D A yellow circle indicates the GPS connection is successful but 215 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide ther
152. d or another measurement object This ensures a more accurate measurement of distance or area The snap function is essential when measuring area TO measure area you must completely enclose the area by snapping your finish point to your starting point 16 Getting Started Notes e The measure tool is the best way to measure short distances on the map If you want to measure the distance of a road try creating a route If you want to measure a large area on the map use the area object tools in the Draw tab e To disable the auto snap function hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while using the Measure tool e Measure objects lines and areas are saved with the current project When you create a new project file the measure objects do not display If you want the Same measure objects on your new project you must recreate them e To view information about a measurement line right click it and select Info from the shortcut menu The measurement information is automatically displayed in the Info tab To Measure Distance or Area Use the following steps to measure linear distance or area on the map 1 Verify you have the correct units of measure selected in the Display tab of the Options dialog box For more information see Setting Units of Measure Preferences 2 On the toolbar click the Measure tool al The pointer changes to T 3 Click point by point to draw a measurement line on the map A text box displays next to you
153. d party device select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then select the appropriate set from the drop down list For more information on creating a custom symbol set see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol 12 Click Receive From Device 13 Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive 14 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Ze Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Exchanging Information with a Palm OS Device Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send maps you cut using the Handheld Export tab to your Palm OS device See Creating a Map Package for more information Note You must have Street Atlas USA Handheld installed to view exported maps on a PDA To Send a Handheld Map Use the following steps to send a handheld map to a Palm OS device on the 1 Click the Exchange button ni on the toolbar OR click Exchange Handheld Export tab to open the Exchange dialog box Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Palm OS Select Send to Device Select Handheld Map from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Under Source select the map you want to send to your handheld device from the Handheld Map drop down list The maps saved in the specified location display in the list To view maps Saved in an alternate location click the browse butto
154. d then click the Delete button To change a stop to a via select the stop and click Make Via To change a via to a stop select the via and click Make Stop Click Reverse Rte to reverse the order of all of the points in the route Click Calculate if the Auto check box is not selected in the New Edit subtab Editing Roads You can change the characteristics of any road on a map to Two Way One Way N or E No Left Turn N or E No Right Turn N or E No Way One Way S or W No Left Turn S or W No Right Turn S or W To Edit a Road Use the following steps to edit a road 1 Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab 201 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Click Edit Roads Select the Display Road Edits check box to show existing road edits on the map Click the Select tool A and select the road on the map you want to edit Select a direction e If you select Two Way you can also select No Left Turn No Right Turn e If you select One Way you can also select No Left Turn or No Right Turn e If you select No Way you cannot select any other options Note Click Default to change the road properties to the default settings Click Clear All Edits to remove all road options and return all road properties to their default settings Click Done Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote The easiest way to label your route points start stop via and finish with a MapNote is to use the Route Preferences section of th
155. data in the table in ascending order click the column header Click the column header again to sort in descending order Optional To modify a draw object s name comment or URL in the table click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again do not double click Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Right click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename in the Shortcut menu Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Note To add a line break to text in the Comment field press CTRL ENTER on your keyboard Optional To view the contents of a track file in a dialog box right click the file in the draw file editing area and click Details in the shortcut menu Optional To launch a Web browser for a draw object that includes a URL right click the file in the draw file editing area and click Launch Browser Optional To delete a draw object click the draw object in the table and click the Delete button Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to Using the Draw Tools cancel OR Right click the draw object in the table and click Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel 11 Optional Click Less to return the tab height to its default height Note To edit the Comments field click once in the cell type your text in the box and t
156. ddress Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names e Right click the map where you want to add the stop or via Point to CreateRoute in the shortcut menu and then click Insert Stop or Insert Via e Use the toolbar to insert a Stop 3 If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate to recalculate your route to include the stop or via OR Click the Calculate button G on the toolbar OR If the Auto check box is not selected right click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and click Calculate Road Quickest or Calculate Road Shortest Note Ifthe program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you entered a dialog box displays with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and click OK 4 Click Directions to view the route directions AND OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options Changing the Routing Methods You can change your routing calculation method at any time You may need to do this to update your routing preferences To Change the Route Calculation Method 1 From the Route tab click the New Edit subtab 2 Select a calculation method Fo Driving Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle SB leyeting Use this method to calculate a bicycle route Walking running Use this method to calcula
157. dicate the height and distance of the particular location as you move along the graph e As you move your cursor along the graph an info box provides statistical data about the profile such as coordinates elevation grade and so on See Statistical Data for more information about this data If you downloaded an object with supported profile data the info box 180 Profiling Linear Objects may also include additional data for example speed See Profile Data for more information e As you move your cursor along the profile graph a small crosshair follows along the corresponding object on the map Click the More button __ near the bottom of the tab area to expand the view If you generate a profile from a route you have created select the Show Text check box to view route numbers road names waypoint numbers and their associated waypoint names Notes The route displays in the profile graph with small markers indicating the start and finish for the route as well as any waypoints it contains If the profile object contains additional supported data such as that downloaded from an athletic device a toolbar appears above the graph See Profile Data for more information about viewing and managing this data View the current statistical information options you have selected to the right of the profile graph See Statistical Data for more information about adding removing and reordering the statistics Terr Dist 3 6
158. dicates the map package creation status 34 Tutorials Step 5 Send the map package 1 Connect your Earthmate PN 40 to your computer with the USB cable and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears 2 On the device highlight Map Transfer and press ENTER Then highlight Transfer to SD Card to send the map to an SD card or Transfer Internal to send the map to internal memory and press ENTER When the Transfer Maps message appears your Earthmate PN 40 is ready for transfer Set it aside 3 In Topo USA click the Exchange button E thange on the Handheld Export tab or click the Exchange button F on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens x Waypoint Layers Waypoints a Track Layers Aap Tracks 2 Routes Hip Routes Saved Map Packages senda f i Map Packages 4 If you are transferring to an SD card in the device select the removable drive for example Removable Disk E Removable Disk from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box OR If you are transferring to internal memory select the internal memory drive for example EM_USERMAPS E Removable Disk from the drop down list The internal memory is treated as if it is an external drive 5 Inthe left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Saved Map Packages and then click the map package you want to send to your device OR To select all map packages just click Saved Ma
159. e If you selected Track the list of track layers in the Draw tab displays in a tree menu Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu and click the track You ai 259 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide can select only one track at a time If you selected GPL File in the GPS Data box type the path and file name for the file or click Browse to search for the file on your computer 7 Click Next The Image list displays the images that will be tagged Click a photo to preview it in Image Preview window 8 Under Time Offset if the time on your camera differed from actual time when you recorded the data calculate the offset type the actual time in the Matching GPS Time text box 9 Click Next 10 Select how you want to place the image on the map e Hyperlink A MapNote with a hyperlink to the image displays on the map e Embedded A MapNote with a thumbnail image hyperlinked to the image displays on the map e Symbol A camera symbol with a hyperlink to the image displays on the map 11 Click Next A message displays telling you that you successfully tagged your images Click Finish When you view the GPS log file or track on the map you can see where the images are tagged OR An error message displays usually this is because the timestamps for the camera and the file or track do not match Tagging Data Once you successfully tag your data to a GPS log file or track file you can view the points where the data was recorded
160. e PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box to send and receive waypoints tracks routes to and from the Earthmate PN Series GPS When planning a trip use Topo USA to create a set of waypoints a track and a route that identify the locations you are interested in visiting Tip To manage waypoints and tracks for a particular trip create and name a new layer for the trip s waypoints and tracks It is also helpful to create new projects for each of your trips Step 1 Create your trip information Use Topo USA 7 0 to create your trip information For more information see the following Help topics e Creating a Route e Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or Image to the Map e Drawing a Track on the Map e Creating a Map Package and the detailed Creating Maps for an Earthmate PN Series GPS tutorial e See also the help topics for your specific device under Using Handheld Devices Step 2 Connect Your Device to Your Computer e If you have an Earthmate PN 20 connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on 36 Tutorials e If you have an Earthmate PN 40 connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on On the Connect to Computer screen highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER Step 3 Open the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box Click the Exchange button F on the toolbar to open the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box Your device displays in the
161. e Exchange button E on the toolbar 2 Select Earthmate GPS PN 20 from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 In the right pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Routes and then click the route you want to receive into Topo USA OR To receive all routes just click Routes 4 Click Receive The route is sent to Topo USA and a progress bar indicates the copy status 5 Click Done 238 Using Handheld Devices Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending Receiving Tracks to from Earthmate PN 20 You can use Topo USA to exchange waypoints tracks routes and maps with the DeLorme Earthmate GPS PN 20 Notes e You must connect the Earthmate GPS PN 20 to your computer with the USB cable to send information to the device To rename delete or send receive a track right click the item in the Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option You can also delete a track by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete button See also the Exchanging PN Series Data and Converting Tracks into Trails tutorials To Send Tracks Use the following steps to send tracks to your Earthmate PN Series GPS 1 Click the Exchange button i on the toolbar 2 Select Earthmate GPS PN 20 from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 Inthe left pane of the dialog box click
162. e Handheld Export tab 2 Under Export Map Format select DeLorme Earthmate to send maps to an Earthmate PN Series GPS OR Under Export Map Format select Palm OS Pocket PC to send maps to a Palm OS or Pocket PC PDA 3 Under Export Data Zooms select the check box next to each map data type you want to export with the Handheld Export tab Only connected map data types are listed Tip Topo USA 7 0 Data series is the same data that is on the detailed data DVDs that came with your PN Series GPS If you installed the detailed data for the map you are creating clear the Topo USA 7 0 Data Series check box on the Handheld tab of the Options dialog box so you do not duplicate data in your map 4 Under Zoom Range drag the left slider control to the minimum data zoom level at which to view the data 5 Under Zoom Range drag the right slider control to the maximum data zoom level at which to view the data 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each map data type you selected in step 3 The respective minimum and maximum data zoom levels display to the right of each map data type 7 Optional Click Use Defaults to return the slider controls to their default minimum and maximum values 8 Click OK to accept the changes and close the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the changes and remain working in the Options dialog box Notes e Raster imagery such as USGS Quads aerial imagery NOAA nautical charts and satellite imagery includes c
163. e Handheld Export tab Sending Draw Layers to an Earthmate PN 40 If you have draw layers excluding waypoints and tracks that you want to send to an Earthmate PN 40 you can use the Handheld tab in the Options dialog to create a map that includes the data You can then use the Exchange dialog to send the map to the device To Create a Map with Draw Layers Use the following steps to create a map with draw layers to send to the device 1 2 oy N 234 Click the Draw tab Select each draw layer you want to send to the device Selected layers appear on the map Click the Handheld Export tab and zoom to the area of interest on the map Click the Options button to open the Handheld tab in the Options dialog box Under Export Map Format select DeLorme Earthmate Under Export Map Source select the map with the draw layer Left or Right Under Export Data Zooms select Draw Layers Choose the zoom ranges at which you want to view the data at on the handheld device Select Less Detail or Full Detail Full Detail saves the data as it appears on the map but the file size is larger Less Detail reduces the detail on the map so the file size is smaller Using Handheld Devices 10 Click Select Edit nE select the grids that cover the draw layers you want to send to the device You can use the Grid Size control to modify the grid size When selecting grids you will receive an error in the Info box if the map output is too lar
164. e Latitude longitude elevation File upt name comment and symbol are imported POI Garmin Waypoint File Waypoint location data for Factory Garmin custom points of interest CSV File csv Draw Layer Files Topo USA 2 0 ano Annotation draw objects displaying with the current symbol and line style selections MapDocs sa 7 Street Atlas USA Point objects and annotation sa8 Sa9 mn5 7 0 8 0 and 9 0 draw objects displaying with mn6 mn7 AAA Map n Go 5 0 the current symbol and line 7 0 and 7 0 style selections To Import Files Use the following steps to import a file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area 140 Using the Draw Tools 3 Click Import The Import Draw File dialog box displays 4 Browse to the source folder of the file The default directory is C DeLorme Docs Export 5 From the Files of type drop down list select the type of file you want to import 6 If you selected Text File or All Files from the Files of Type drop down list select the file s coordinate and datum from the applicable drop down lists OR If you selected GPS Log File format select how you want the file to display on the map from the Import As drop down list 7 Select the file and then click Open The draw objects in the imported file display A new draw file is automatically created for the imported file 8 Click Done to return to the Draw dialog area Notes You ca
165. e Preferences You can change the units of measure used to represent how coordinate formats distance datum and bearing listings display Changing these preferences affects how units of measure display in several areas of the program such as on the map and in the Control Panel As you change your unit of measure preferences a description of each choice displays in the information box in the center of the Options dialog box immediately after you select it To Change the Coordinate Preferences Changing the coordinate preferences affects the e Coordinates display on the Control Panel e Coordinate MapNotes e Grid label display if Grids are selected in Map Features e lt Any other place where coordinates display or print 78 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Use the following steps to change how coordinate measurement units display 1 2 a 4 Notes g Options Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Display tab Select the coordinate display format from the Coordinates drop down list e Degrees e Degrees Minutes e Deg Min Sec e UTM UPS Universal Transverse Mercator Universal Polar Stereographic e MGRS Military Grid Reference System e USNG United States National Grid e SPCS State Plane Coordinate System Note When you select SPCS an additional drop down box displays for Zone Select the zone from the list Select the datum from the Datum drop down list e WGS84 World Geodetic S
166. e Route tab In this area you can select to Show Location MapNotes Show Comments MapNotes or Show Summary MapNotes If you select more than one option each category of information location comments and or summary displays in the same MapNote To Label a Route Point with a MapNote Use the following steps to label a route point with a MapNote L 2 3 Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area Under Route Features select the check box next to each MapNote you want to display at your route points e Show Location MapNotes Displays Location MapNotes with the coordinate information for each point in your route e Show Comments MapNotes Displays comments about each point of the route as specified in the Route Advanced subtab To modify route comments click the Route tab click the Advanced subtab select the route and then click in the Comments column twice do not double click next to the route point you want to create a comment for The information you type in the Comments field for that point is placed in a Comments MapNote when you selected to show it on the map e Show Summary MapNotes Displays time and distance information for each point in your route Click Done Moving Route MapNotes You can move Route MapNotes The text box moves but the point stays on the map location 202 Routing To show delete Route MapNotes see
167. e You must have Street Atlas USA Handheld installed to view exported maps on a PDA To Send a Handheld Map Use the following steps to send a handheld map to a Pocket PC device 1 Click the Exchange button ae on the toolbar OR click LE Exchange Handheld Export tab to open the Exchange dialog box Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Send to Device Select Handheld Map from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Under Source select the map you want to send to your handheld device from the Handheld Map drop down list The maps saved in the specified location display in the list To view maps Saved in an alternate location click the browse button and browse to the location Then select the map from the Handheld Map drop down list 8 Click Prepare for Sync 9 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 10 Repeat the steps for each map you want to send 11 Click Finish The exported map is available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab on the a ee 252 Using Handheld Devices Sending Route Information to Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions to your Pocket PC device To Send Route Points Use the following steps to send route points to your
168. e active track 4 Click Receive A progress bar indicates the copy status 5 Click Done 6 Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending Receiving Waypoints to from Earthmate PN 20 You can use Topo USA to exchange waypoints with the DeLorme Earthmate GPS PN 20 Notes e Waypoints that are exchanged between Topo USA and the Earthmate GPS PN 20 retain their exact waypoint symbol only if they are part of the Earthmate PN Series symbol set Otherwise the closest matching waypoint symbol is shown To rename delete or send receive a waypoint right click the item in the Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option You can also delete a waypoint by clicking it and then clicking the Delete button For more information see the Exchanging PN Series Data tutorial To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Earthmate GPS PN 20 1 Click the Exchange button Le on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens 2 Inthe left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Waypoint Layers and then click the waypoint layer or contents you want to send to the Earthmate GPS PN 20 OR To send all waypoints just click Waypoints 3 Click Send A progress bar indicates the copy status 4 Click Done To Receive Waypoints Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Eart
169. e command list view at any time by clicking the heading you want to sort by Group Command or Shortcut The following keyboard shortcut combinations cannot be changed O O O O O O O O 0 2 ALT F4 Close Window F1 Help ALT F1 Help Menu SHIFT F10 Context Menu CTRL C Copy CTRL V Paste CTRL X Cut CTRL Y Redo CTRL Z Undo ALT M Set Focus on Map The following keyboard keys cannot be used when assigning shortcuts O O O Windows Key Application Key Print Screen Scroll Lock O O O O O O O Using Keyboard Shortcuts Sleep Pause Break Enter Caps Lock Num Lock Spacebar Insert Backspace Multi media Keys o Letters and numbers cannot be assigned alone for example you cannot assign a keyboard shortcut with the number 3 You must use a modifier such as CTRL or ALT with letters and numbers Customizing a DeLorme Scheme You cannot edit DeLorme schemes however you can create a copy of a DeLorme scheme that you can modify to fit your needs To Customize a DeLorme Scheme Use the following steps to customize a DeLorme scheme 1 fe Options Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the DeLorme scheme you want to copy from the Scheme drop down list Click File and then click Copy The active scheme will change to Copy of Desktop Mapping Copy of In vehicle Navigation Copy of 3 D Navigation etc depending on the DeLorm
170. e is a missing local road you can add it to the current Draw layer using the Routable Roads Draw tool For more information see Drawing Routable Roads or Trails on the Map e To report an error to us 1 Click the NetLink tab 2 Click the Corrections subtab 3 Click the Map Correction link 4 Use the Customer Revisions wizard to submit the change Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e How dol initialize my GPS receiver Each time you use your GPS receiver you initialize it which means you set your starting position on the map by obtaining the initial coordinates of your location This can be done automatically or manually For more information see Initializing GPS e What is a project You can save all of your work as a single workspace so you can open it again later These saved workspaces are called projects A project consists of the following items coordinates of the map center current zoom level current magnification map display preferences any added items such as draw layers routes and so on As you create new routes or draw layers change preferences or the map center and so on they are added to the current project You can save or discard changes To learn how to create a project see Creating and Deleting Projects e What do the different colors and symbols on the map mean The different colors on the map represent different areas of land use and land cover for example parks population centers water fo
171. e is insufficient satellite data to determine your GPS position This usually indicates insufficient data for an accurate location due to e Only three satellites being used e Poor signals from the satellites Move your receiver to another location until you get better reception 3 D A green circle indicates the GPS receiver is receiving sufficient satellite data to determine your location When the status reads 3 D your current coordinates elevation and heading are displayed along with the speed you are currently traveling Note If you are tracking with a WAAS enabled device a 3 D fix displays as 3 D DGPS Monitoring GPS Satellite Information Click Sat Info in the GPS tab to view the current satellite status Sat Info is a toggle button that switches to Status Click Status to return to the original Status dialog area Dilution of Precision Dilution of Precision The Dilution of Precision area lists your Position Dilution of PDOP 0 00 Precision your Horizontal Dilution of Precision and your HDOP 4 40 Vertical Dilution of Precision For definitions of these terms see Glossary Terms YDOP 0 00 Satellite Listing Satellite Listing The Satellite Listing window displays the satellites that are currently visible in the sky The columns list the satellite number elevation azimuth and signal to noise ratio Satellite Listing information is only available for DeLorme receivers and NMEA compatible receivers
172. e list all draw layers are grouped together and so on 4 Select a draw file from the file list and then click Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel OR Right click the draw file in the list and click Delete Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to cancel 5 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Hiding Draw Files You can hide draw files you created This removes from view all the draw objects in that file without permanently deleting them To Hide a Draw File Use the following steps to hide a draw file 136 Using the Draw Tools Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type For example all road layers are grouped together in the list all draw layers are grouped together and so on Hide any files in the file list by clearing the check box next to the file name e A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map e A draw file with a cleared check box does not display on the map Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Editing Locking Draw Files You can edit the current active editable draw file You can also lock a draw file making it uneditable To Edit a Draw File Use the following steps to edit a draw file 1 7 8 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Verify
173. e map features and changes the map area that you save as an image If you increase the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc are larger and your map area is reduced If you decrease the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc are smaller and your map area is enlarged The reduction enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo Zoom drop down list d Optional If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print area print photo zoom or other settings select the Lock Print Center check box This locks the print area and changes the tab label to red 6 Optional Add text or graphics to your map 7 Optional Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire area that will be saved as a bitmap image Clear the check box to return to your previous data zoom level 8 Click the Save button hl OR To cancel saving the file and return to the Print Map dialog area click Cancel 9 Type the file name in the File Name text box select to save the file as a bmp or jpg from the Save as Type drop down list select the DPI dots per inch value optional and click Save The map is saved Measuring Distance and Area Use the Measure tool cu on the toolbar to measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box The snap function snaps attaches the point of a measurement line to a point on a roa
174. e map in that direction e Click the Grab and Pan button on the toolbar to drag pan the 2 D or 3 D map in any direction e Click anywhere on the overview map The point you click becomes the new map center This allows you to traverse greater distances with each mouse click than you can within the main map 14 Getting Started e Point anywhere on the black view box in the Overview Map window When the poater Siemon a ee drag the view box to the new location AUTAS WASHINGTON Charlotte e Use the search features in the Find tab to center the map on a particular location e Assign shortcut keys to pan the map up down left or right in small increments Copying Your Map to the Clipboard Click the Copy to Clipboard button a on the Print tab to copy your map to the clipboard You can then paste it into a graphics program such as Microsoft Paint or Adobe Photoshop You can also right click anywhere on the map and select Copy Map to Clipboard Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Image You can save the current map view as a bitmap bmp or J PEG jpg image in all page layout formats Single 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 If you select a multi page format all the active pages are saved as individual bitmaps or J PEGs The file name is the specified file name with an incremental page number at the end To Save a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG Use the following steps to save a map as an image 1 Locate the area on the map t
175. e map to internal memory and press ENTER When the Transfer Maps message appears your PN 40 is ready for transfer Set it aside In Topo USA click the Exchange button Exchange on the Handheld Export tab or click the Exchange button i on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens If you are transferring to an SD card in the device select the removable drive for example Removable Disk E Removable Disk from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box If you are transferring to internal memory select the internal memory drive for example EM_USERMAPS E Removable Disk from the drop down list The internal memory is treated as if it is an external drive In the left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Saved Map Packages and then click the map package you want to send to your device OR To select all map packages just click Saved Map Packages In the right pane of the dialog box under Map Packages click Internal Memory or SD Card Click Send A progress bar indicates the copy status Click Done 10 On your Earthmate PN 40 press ENTER to return to GPS use To Receive Maps Use the following steps to receive maps from your Earthmate PN 40 GPS into Topo USA 1 Connect your Earthmate PN 40 to your computer with the USB cable and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears On the device highlight Map Transfer and press ENTER Then highlight Tran
176. e mirrored in the other view Dragging a Bitmap into XSym You can drag a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol Using drag to bring in an image is much like importing a bitmap into XSym Ideally the new bitmap Should be 24 x 24 pixels in size You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Drag a Bitmap into XSym Use the following steps to drag a bitmap into XSym 1 2 10 Notes 174 Click the Draw tab Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool uT E to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid Browse your computer to locate the bitmap bmp file Drag the file into XSym The bitmap image displays in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Click OK when finished If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message b
177. e scheme you chose to copy Assign keyboard shortcuts for the copied scheme Optional Rename the scheme Renaming a Custom Scheme Custom schemes can be renamed to whatever name you choose You cannot rename DeLorme schemes To Rename a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to rename a custom scheme L AE Options Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select the custom scheme you want to rename from the Scheme drop down list Click File and then click Rename The Scheme text box becomes active Type the name in the Scheme text box 87 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 5 Click Apply The new name displays OR Press the ENTER key on your keyboard The new name displays OR Press the ESC key on your keyboard to keep the old name Deleting a Custom Scheme Once you have created a custom scheme you can delete it at any time You cannot delete DeLorme schemes To Delete a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to delete a custom keyboard shortcut scheme i fie Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 2 Select the custom scheme you want to delete from the Scheme drop down list 3 Click File and then click Delete 4 Click Yes when asked if you are sure you want to delete the scheme Importing a Custom Scheme You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users To Import a Custom Scheme
178. e the pitch press ALT S on your keyboard To increase the distance elevation press ALT Page Up on your keyboard OR To decrease the distance elevation press ALT Page Down on your keyboard To pan the map to the right press ALT Right the right arrow on your keyboard OR To pan the map to the left press ALT Left on your keyboard To pan the map forward press ALT Up on your keyboard OR To pan the map backward press ALT Down on your keyboard Options To Fly Over a 3 D Map Using the Pan Tool Use the following steps to fly over a 3 D map L 2 View a map in 3 D Click the 3 D tab to open it and drag the circle in the Pan graphic in the direction to view 191 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Setting Your 3 D Map Preferences Use the 3 D tab in the Options dialog box to customize your 3 D maps with increased vertical exaggeration billboards a GPS tracking cursor type and more To Set Your 3 D Map Preferences Use the following steps to set your 3 D map preferences I 192 l IS Options Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the 3 D tab OR Click the 3 D tab to open it and click the Options button E Options If you want the right map to rotate pan in the same direction as the left map select the Link 2 D and 3 D Map Rotation check box The 2 D map updates after the 3 D map finishes panning rotating Note If you do not select this check box you can use the data zoom level to
179. e two additional spheres of possible locations These three spheres intersect at two points however one of these points is eliminated because it is far away from the earth s surface Therefore the second point is assumed to be correct The data from these three satellites provides the receiver with a two dimensional location Data acquired from a fourth satellite pinpoints the receiver s exact location This additional positioning information allows the GPS receiver to calculate its elevation which is particularly important for GPS users in mountainous locations GPS Position Accuracy The accuracy of the data your GPS receiver provides is dependent upon many factors including the quality of your equipment A low quality clock within the receiver decreases the accuracy of your location The atmosphere the ionosphere and the number of channels your receiver can handle all affect the accuracy of your system Consult your GPS hardware manuals for information on how your receiver adjusts for errors Any buildings natural structures or heavy foliage that obstruct the GPS antenna s view of the sky prevent satellite signals from reaching the receiver and decreases the accuracy of your position 218 Using GPS Your accuracy will also depend on your level of clearance with the U S Department of Defense There are two available radio signals that receivers can use the Standard Positioning Service SPS for civilians and the Precise Positio
180. earched for using the Find functionality National Scenic Trails State s Located In Trail Name Appalachian National Scenic Trail Appalachian Trail Conservancy Web Site I nformation www nps gov appa index htm www appalachiantrail org site c jkLX J 8MQKtH b 694599 k CCB5 Home htm www nps gov appa Phone Number Appalachian Trail Conservancy 304 535 6331 Appalachian Trail Conservancy 304 535 6331 2 5 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Continental CO www cdtrail org page php 303 838 Divide ID MT www fs fed us r2 trails cdnst 3760 or National NM WY 888 909 Scenic Trail Info CDTA Center CO Florida FL www floridatrail org 877 HIKE National FLA Scenic Trail Ice Age www iceagetrail org 414 278 National www nps gov iatr 8518 or Scenic Trail 800 227 0046 Natchez www nps gov natt N A Trace National Scenic Trail North www northcountrytrail org 866 hikeNCT Country www nps gov noco National Scenic Trail Pacific Crest www pcta org 916 349 National www fs fed us pct 2109 Scenic Trail Potomac www potomactrail org 571 436 National 888 223 Scenic Trail 4093 Trails of Interest Trail State s Web Site I nformation Phone Number Name Located In Abol Trail ME www mainerec com baxterl asp Category 10 N A L amp PageNum 101 2 6 Recreational and Travel Contact Information Achenback ND www nps gov thro tr_no trail htm N A
181. earing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box Note If you are placing an arc enter new numbers into the Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes for the two base points of the arc only When the central shape point of the arc is selected the text options change from Distance and Bearing Angle to Radius and Direction Enter the appropriate radius number and direction to change the radius for this point 4 Click Apply and repeat the procedure for the second point The line object displays on the map at those coordinates distance and bearing or angle OR After placing the first point coordinate move your pointer to the map screen and place the other points by hand by clicking on the screen 159 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 5 To place additional points lines or other draw objects on the map in reference to the first line enter a specific distance and bearing into the corresponding text boxes and click Apply Joining and Breaking Linear Objects You can join two or more routable roads trails tracks lines arcs or splines into a single entity You can also break routable roads tracks lines or splines You cannot break arcs To Join Use the following steps to join linear objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard and
182. ect the waypoint file you want to send to your device 8 Click Prepare for Sync 9 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 10 Repeat the steps for each waypoint file you want to send to your device 11 Click Finish The waypoints are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Ze Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab 254 Using Handheld Devices Sending a GPS Log to Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send GPS logs you created in your mapping program to your Pocket PC device To Send a GPS Log Use the following steps to send a GPS log to a Pocket PC device Click the Exchange button i on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Send to Device Select GPS Log from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Under Source select the GPS log you want to send to your handheld device from the GPS Log drop down list The logs are saved in the specified location display in the list To view logs saved in an alternate location click the browse button and browse to the location Then select the log from the GPS Log drop down list 8 Click Prepare for Sync 9 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 10 Repeat the steps for each GPS log you want to send to your device 11 Click Finish The GPS log is available on
183. ected as the coordinate system in the Display tab of the Options dialog box This statistical information is available only if a latitude longitude format is selected as the coordinate system in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Note For information on manually setting your minimum and maximum elevation see Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation You can manually set a maximum or minimum elevation to display in your profile graph To Manually Adjust Minimum and Maximum Elevation Use the following steps to manually adjust minimum and maximum elevation 1 Create a profile The Profile tab area displays 2 Click the More button 04 3 To control the maximum height displayed on the profile graph under Manual Scale select the Max Elev check box and type the maximum height in the text box This adjusts the top end of the vertical scale of the profile graph to not display heights above the defined height 4 To control the minimum height displayed on the profile graph under Manual Scale select the Min Elev check box and type the minimum height in the text box This adjusts the base level of the vertical scale of the profile graph to not display heights below the height specified Note Distance displays in the units you set in the Options dialog box For more information see Setting Units of Measure Preferences 185 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Cle
184. ed below and that you provide a link to the DeLorme Web site at www delorme com from any page featuring a DeLorme map image If you subcontract a web developer to display map images said web developer must purchase a license Legend Any System output that is provided to a third party must include the following credit and copyright notice 2008 DeLorme www delorme com TOPO USA You may not remove alter or conceal any copyright or trademark notices appearing on any System output except that when creating a mural map you need only retain a single legend with scale for use in the field Copy Services You may use a commercial copy service to reproduce paper copies that are authorized by this Agreement NetLink Tab All data downloaded or purchased through the NetLink Tab is subject to DeLorme s specific data use license agreement associated with those products Commercial use of NetLink data is prohibited You understand and agree that the trademarks trade names service marks copyrights and other proprietary rights of DeLorme are and Shall remain the sole and exclusive property of DeLorme and that you will not hold yourself out as having any ownership rights thereto You further agree that you will make no use of such rights except as provided in this Agreement PROHIBITIONS ON USE No Resale or Distribution Except as expressly permitted in this Agreement you do not have the right to sell or to reproduce or distribute fo
185. ed on your paper size or screen size If you choose to print a map based on your paper size you can also print a multi page map that you can assemble using the Manually Assembling a Multi page Map instructions To Print a Map Use the following steps to print a map Locate the area you want to print Click the Print tab Click the Map subtab Under Map select Left map Right map or Both maps Note If the left or right and or both options are unavailable it is because only one map view is displayed To make all selections available use the map resize tool to expose the left and right map views To print a full page 3 D map use the map resize tool to expose only the left map window 5 Under Print Layout select Page the map print area is based on the paper size you have specified in the Setup options or Screen the map print area is based on the screen size The print area for a Page map displays as a red box on the map which may not always be visible The overview map and the print area for a Screen map display as a blue box on the overview map 6 If you selected Screen in step 5 go to step 7 If you selected Page in step 5 the following options are available a Under Print Layout select a layout option Single 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 The print area displays on both the Map and the Overview Map RWN Print Layout Single ae 3x3 Page Screen O b Optional If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 In step 6a on the Map Lay
186. eed for this road type These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route If you selected Road as your route type in step 3 type your average driving speed within an urban area for this road type in the Urban Speed text box These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route The Urban Speed text box is available only for road routes Repeat steps 3 6 for each road type e When you are finished setting your road preferences click Review to display your settings e Click Use Defaults to restore all road types to the Standard preference level In the Route Features list select one or all of the check boxes e Show Location MapNotes Displays Location MapNotes with their coordinate information for each point in your route e Show Comments MapNotes Displays comments about your route e Show Summary MapNotes Displays time and distance information for each waypoint and the finish point of your route e Display Waypoint Labels Displays start stop via finish labels on the map when the route is created e Display Route Vias Shows or hides your route vias on the map 10 Click Done Note Click Use Defaults to restore all route preferences and road type preferences to the default settings Editing a Route You can modify existing routes by 200 Adding removing and rearranging stops and vias Adjusting your route preferences based on road type Customizing your route based on your driving style and speed And mo
187. eeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeetteneeagennrnngs 156 Editing a Routable Road Routable Trail Line Arc Or Spline c cece cece eee es 157 EGIEMNG a Trae K aae Wanita ta tena iid eid ade nea dean a 158 Placing a Routable Road Routable Trail Line Arc or Spline at a Specific Location EA EEEE E E aa ea ater Gas gaa ane A E Teach word ete ee A TE A EEA 159 Joining and Breaking Linear ODJe CtS ccc cece cece cee cee eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeneages 160 vi Table Of Contents Circles Rectangles ANd POlIYGONS ccceeeeee cece ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeengeneeeeeeneenaes 161 Drawing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 161 Editing a Circle Rectangle Or POIYQON cccc cece sees e eee eeeeneeeeeseneeeeseeeagenes 162 Placing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 Waypoints Symbols MapNotes Text Labels and IMAGES cc cceeee cece eens 163 Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or Image to the Map 163 Editing a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or Mage c ccc eeee eee 165 Placing a Waypoint Symbol Text Label or Image at a Specific Location 166 Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotess ccc cece cess eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeteesegneegs 166 CUSTOM SOO IS daca d ne erro eeraa ann naka neaa anuiannaacoat mtn aaaewinnie Tae ies 168 CUSTOM SYMDOIS OVElVIEW somarina nea we
188. eeeeeeeeeeeseeennenneegs 127 USING ThE Draw TOOIS eerte tepian i a a backer doen a a a 131 Draw OV EWI W rreran Na E EEE A AAEE Gare Ea e alaneeee 131 Viewing Pidde Draw TOONS 6 cicesiaaaccns eres ie ina A EREE 134 GeOCaChinG Features iera e EE A E AE TEA EA O E A 134 Draw File Managemen tasser a E AE T A 135 Creating a New Draw File nunununanensrsrernrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrsrererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerene 135 Saving a Drow Fiere aae ea e a a a ladie a 136 Deleting a Draw Fe sire a aN T A A EE T 136 AGING DraWw FIESSO 136 Editing LOCKING Draw FIGS xs siniatays i deleeiadanietateluiiaiad tained oietangad EE 137 Exporting Draw Files to Text FIl S cccccccee cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeenegs 137 Exporting Track Data Files to Text Files ccc ccc cc cece ee eeeeeeee eee eeeteeeeeenennennes 138 Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX FileS cc cece cce cece eee eeeeeeeeeeenenees 139 Importing Files to Draw FileS wiwiwatiieiinoetianitars Mini r S 139 Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File ccc cece cece ee eeee eee eeeeeeneees 141 Copying a Map Line to a Draw File cece cece cece cece eeee eens ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeenenanas 143 Saving a Track as a GPS LOG wissit caaicaiaic a ia eieweiss caeeah omaevorieeis eee aes 143 Viewing the Contents of a Draw File ccc cece cece cee e cece ee eeeeeeeseeeneeeessannnnees 143 COPYING a Drow FE iera eraa sae Ororiorienatncuda E aa enn
189. elect Directions or Along the Way 4 Click the Save button l in the Route tab 5 To rename the txt file type the new name in the File Name text box and click Save Setting Your Routing Preferences Once you master basic routing you can customize your routing preferences and create more advanced routes The routing preferences allow you to favor or avoid various road types when calculating your route You can also set your speed preferences The default settings are based on the calculation method you chose when creating the route To change your route calculation method see Changing the Routing Methods 199 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Set Your Routing Preferences Use the following steps to set your routing preferences L 2 3 Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area Select the route type Direct Trail or Road from the Route Type drop down list From the Road Type drop down list select the road type for which you want to set preferences If you selected Trail or Road as your route type in step 3 select Preferred Standard or Avoid from the Routing Preference drop down list Preferred favors this type of road whenever possible Standard is the default level and Avoid avoids this type of road whenever possible An avoided road may be used when no other road is available In the Speed text box type your average driving sp
190. election by selecting the image and then clicking Delete 2 Click the location for the point object on the map The URL Label text box displays 3 Click the Hyperlink button al and browse to the document you want to hyperlink your point object to optional The address displays in the URL field 4 Type the name or phrase into the Label field The coordinates or distance and bearing angle numbers of the location display in the corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing Angle text boxes 5 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the object s active area when you are finished Tip Search for a point object by its label name using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start Finish Stop or Via text boxes when creating a route in the Route tab Editing a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or I mage Once you add a point object to a draw file you can edit name only copy move or delete it at any time You can edit multiple point objects at the same time by dragging a box around the objects you want to edit Any changes are made to all of the point objects included in the box To Edit a Point Object Use the following steps to edit a waypoint symbol MapNote text label or image 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and then click the point object on the map twice 3 Type a new name or phrase in the Label field change the name s font sty
191. elete a map by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete button If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device go to the Device Setup gt Connect to Computer menu and select the option you want from the USB Setting drop down list You cannot create trail routes on an Earthmate PN Series GPS To follow a trail route create a trail route in Topo USA and then send it to your device using the instructions below If you stray off of a trail route s course while navigating with the device you will be asked if you would like to recalculate the route Because the Earthmate PN Series GPS cannot create trail routes the route will be converted to a direct route if you choose to recalculate If you do not want to change the shape of your trail route be sure to answer No when asked if you would like to recalculate the route See also the Exchanging PN Series Data Creating a Route and Converting Tracks into Trails tutorials To Send Routes Topo USA 7 0 supports multiple calculation types including Road Quickest Road Shortest Direct and Trail Earthmate PN Series GPS supports Road Quickest and Direct routes If you create a Road Shortest or Trail route in Topo USA you can send it to the Earthmate PN 40 and it will display on the device s map the same as it did in Topo USA however the calculation method will display as Road for Road Shortest routes or Direct for trail routes in the route details on the device
192. eme 88 Exporting Draw Files to Text Files 137 Exporting Tab Manager Preferences 81 Exporting Your Address Book 117 F File PreVieW ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 213 Find 105 106 110 114 116 170 Finding a Custom Symbol 170 Finding a Symbol by Its Name 106 Flying Over a 3 D Map 191 Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File riesci a 141 G Game Management Districts 74 Getting Back on Track 5 211 Global Positioning System 218 OP i 65 207 212 213 214 218 GPS LOO ierogioraern 212 213 214 GPS Log File Details 214 GPS Position Accuracy 000008 218 GPS Settings ccceeeee eens 207 211 PSS tAtlS sisia a E 215 Orab ahd pannaan aaan 65 Orad errare arar A 182 Gi OS EE TEE E E A 74 H Handheld Export 00ceeeeeees 222 Handheld Export Preferences 222 FCAGING nariais a eet 215 Hidden Draw TOols 000000e 134 Hide ROUTO aea 203 Hiding Address Book Contacts on the NADL ciate paciicniia E id eae ee 116 Hiding Draw FIl S 000eeee ees 136 AIGING TaS ricco a 80 Hiding Toolbar Features 63 High Contrast Colors 72 207 Horizontal Resize ToOol 005 69 I Mage nnan 15 163 171 173 174 IMAG SKY rre e Ea 38 Importing a Bitmap 005 171 Importing a Custom Scheme 88 Importing Ex
193. end to your device from the Waypoint File drop down list 8 Click Prepare for Sync 9 Repeat the steps for every waypoint file you want to send to your device 10 Click Finish The waypoints are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Lg Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving a GPS Log From Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive GPS logs created on your Palm OS device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive GPS Logs From Your Palm OS Device Use the following steps to receive GPS logs from your Palm OS device Click the Exchange button i on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Palm OS Select Receive from Device Select GPS Logs from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Select the GPS log you want to receive from the GPS Log drop down list Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each GPS log file you want to receive 10 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab O P Ap ae a a 250 Using Handheld Devices Receiving a Route From Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive a route created on your Palm OS device Once imported you can use the file in
194. eps a E 168 creatino a NEWS VITO vaste ane a a a a a ini eantorpa din caus 168 Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom SYMDOIL ccc cece eee e eee e eect ee eeeeeeeeneeees 169 EQUuNG a SV MNO ostia E oniiidunen E A A TET 170 FINGING a CUSO SVIND niari Ea Er A E Er AA 170 IMPON O a BINI isteach e a E T E AAN A EA 171 COD VNC ANG PASEN O a eas E ans E E E 172 Pasting a BitMapP INTO XSY M iere eaa a a r A E a a a oa 173 Dragging a Bitmap into XSYM ssasesesssrerrrrererrrrerrrrrrsrerrerrrrrrrrerrrrerrrrrrerrrrne 174 REMOVING a SyMDOl eere R E a A a a a aa 175 DAW TOOLBOX mamara a E Aaa a a 175 Using the Transparency OPUONsierein eiar arenen a a a eeadian 176 ANCHO POSIMOW reernrnniiarernei eraa a a Ea AT 176 Cul SOF POSITION ea E E O E EE EE E A 177 Ccreatinga New SYMDOl Seoid A E A A bees 177 OPENING a SVIMDO ES Cl teksts E EE Ea 178 PronIno Linear OD CCS irera dieters evita dated AAi 179 Cheating a Proe siaaa A einer ci EE AA AE 179 Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs esesessrsrerererrrrrrrrerrrrrrrerererererrrrrrrre 180 SUAUISEICAlli Daa nannaa A E A e E E eee ed A 182 Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation cccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 185 Clearing a PLOG e 202c54505 potateesadhehbisueats a a a TA AEEA 186 User ProtUe Data srce a a E a E EE 186 VIEWING YOUR Mapin 3 D iya a a O A pene 189 VIEWING a e DMAP ae E E E E E E T 189 PIVING OVS a 32D Map errara a ear aaa a aE 191 Setting Your 3 D Map PreferenceS
195. er screen and then selecting the device in the Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box however transfer will be slow as the device is not being used as an external drive If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device go to the Device Setup gt Connect to Computer menu and select the option you want from the USB Setting drop down list You can also use an SD card and an SD card reader instead of an SD card in the device You do not have to connect your device to your computer Just insert the SD card reader into your computer and in the Exchange dialog choose that drive to transfer your map to To rename delete or send receive a map right click the item in the Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option You can also delete a map by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete button To Send Maps Use the following steps to send maps to your Earthmate PN 40 s internal memory or an SD card 1 Use the Handheld Export tab and the handheld export settings to create a map package To learn how to create maps see Creating a Map Package and the Creating Maps for an Earthmate PN Series GPS tutorial 228 9 Using Handheld Devices Connect your Earthmate PN 40 to your computer with the USB cable and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears On the device highlight Map Transfer and press ENTER Then highlight Transfer to SD Card to send the map to an SD card or Transfer Internal to send th
196. er the grid the numbers update according to where you are in the 24 x 24 grid The first number in the above sample 16 refers to the number of pixels across the X coordinate from the upper left corner of the grid beginning with zero The second number 14 refers to the number of pixels down the Y coordinate from the upper left corner of the grid beginning with zero Symbol Sets Creating a New Symbol Set Symbols created in DeLorme XSym are saved within a symbol set dim file which can contain up to 250 symbols To Create a New Symbol Set Use the following steps to create a new symbol set 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool O T M to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej 177 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 3 Under Symbols select lt New gt from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays 4 Under Symbol Set Name type the name for your new symbol set The default name for the new symbol set is CustomSymbolSet 5 Import a bitmap into your new symbol set OR Create a new symbol to add to your new symbol set Opening a Symbol Set Open an existing symbol set dim to add new symbols or edit existing ones To Open a Symbol Set Use the following steps to open a symbol set 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool UTE to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej 3 Under
197. er time copy the map files to external memory using an SD card with an SD card reader Using an SD card and reader e A Maps folder is automatically created on the card the first time you power on an Earthmate PN series GPS with the SD card in the device or when you use the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog to transfer data to an SD card reader e You can save regional maps or map packages to an SD card Map packages do not include routes tracks or waypoints e Using an SD card allows you to e Quickly transfer maps e Improve performance of map packages with large file sizes such as those with imagery Creating a Map Package Step 1 Optional Download imagery for the area you want to include in your map package Your purchase of Topo USA 7 0 entitles you to free imagery and data downloads that you can view in Topo USA as well as on your Earthmate GPS PN 20 For more information see the Downloading Imagery tutorial Step 2 Modify your Handheld Export preferences Before you use the Handheld Export tab to create your map package ensure the Handheld Export preferences are set to include the datasets and zoom levels you want to include 28 1 2 3 Tutorials Click the Options button on the Handheld Export tab to open the Handheld Options dialog box Eg Draw Layers 4a 7 Color Aerial Imagery x Aerial Imagery DOQQ lw USGS Quads 30TQ NOAA Harbor Detailed Charts x NOAA Harbo
198. es of data and units that the program recognizes For example if your device recorded the speed in kilometers per hour make sure you select Speed kmh If you do not have data for a particular category leave it blank e You can use the second row to assign columns of data in your csv file to a specific type of data For example if you have a temperature field named T select T from the drop down list that is below the Temperature category in the first row For Generic CSV Files only select your device s time format from the Time Format drop down list Under Offset if the time on your device differed from actual time when you recorded the data calculate the offset type the actual time in the Matching GPS Time text box Click Next A message displays telling you that you successfully tagged your data Click Finish You can view the data on the Profile tab OR An error message displays usually this is because the timestamps for the device and the file or track do not match Calculate the Timestamp Offset The time on your camera or data device must match the time in the track or GPS log so the images or data display in the correct place If they do not you must calculate a timestamp offset If possible do this before you use the GeoTagger Wizard To Calculate the Timestamp Offset Before Using the Wizard Use these steps to calculate the timestamp offset before you use the GeoTagger Wizard L 2 Click the Draw ta
199. ever Connect your GPS device to the program and track your progress on a laptop as you travel Use the Measure tool to measure linear distance or the area and perimeter of a polygon measurement object on the map And much more Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide What s New in Topo USA GeoTagger a new toolbar feature provides updated image and data tagging features allows you to combine digital photos or data with GPS locations in a completely new way Toolbar access to the Eartha Community Atlas ECA wizard ECA is a new geographic social networking website where you can share your map data with others Hybrid Map option allows you to view roads contours and points above imagery in the secondary map Includes four million searchable places of interest from Street Atlas USA ideal for use on an Earthmate PN Series GPS device Includes points of interest from the DeLorme Atlas amp Gazetteer paper series including boat ramps campgrounds unique natural features and much more Includes advanced Find features for searching by category using keywords without having to narrow location Includes 40 of Data Download Dollars for all available datasets including USGS Quads NOAA Nautical Charts and color high resolution imagery Datasets now available for individual purchase allowing you to mix and match a variety of data Downloads require the use of NetLink Includes a bonus DVD dataset of Topo USA 7 0 precut map
200. features OR If you have already enabled Topo USA the following message displays Topo USA 7 0 has already been updated to include the Earthmate PN Series GPS features Click OK 3 Restart Topo USA 226 Using Handheld Devices Activating an Earthmate PN Series GPS You must activate your Earthmate PN Series GPS before you transfer maps waypoints tracks or routes Important If you have previously used another PN Series GPS with Topo USA and created maps using the Handheld Export tab you will be prompted to update your maps to work with the new device If you do not update the maps when you activate the device you will be prompted to update each map when you send it to the device To Activate Your Earthmate PN Series GPS Use the following steps to activate your device before you use it with Topo USA 1 With Topo USA open connect your device to your computer and power it on 2 PN 40 only The Connect to Computer screen appears on the device and Data Exchange is highlighted Press ENTER on the device 3 In Topo USA click the Exchange button F in the toolbar to open the Earthmate PN Series Exchange Dialog box The device is activated when it appears in the drop down list in the top right corner of the dialog box T Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange x Earthimate PM 40 oi Waypoint Layers Waypoints ofp Track Layers Boop Tracks Routes f Routes fA Saved Man Packages Send P HA Map Packages
201. following steps to change the date and or time settings 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your user manual and then turn the receiver on if necessary l g Options l 2 Click the Options button and then click the GPS Settings tab 3 To use the date and time on your computer select the Use Current System Date Time check box OR To use the time and date of your choice clear the Use Current System Date Time check box and then e To manually set the time select the time zone from the Zone drop down box and if Daylight Saving Time is currently in effect where you are select the DST check box Then use the scroll box to select the desired time Note Time is displayed in 24 hour format with Midnight as 00 00 00 209 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e TO manually set the date click the down arrow next to the Date field and select the date from the calendar 5 Click OK to exit the Options dialog and return to the GPS tab in the tab area 6 Click Start GPS Your GPS receiver begins acquiring satellite data and the GPS Status dialog area displays Notes e The GPS Status dialog area displays on your screen so you can view the status of your GPS connection while your GPS receiver acquires data from the satellites Once your GPS receiver acquires a fix on your location your position on the map displays as a yellow or green dot that changes to an arrow as you trave
202. from a project select that file and then click Remove Note This process does not delete the file it just removes it from the current project 3 Click File and then click Save OR Click the Save button b on the toolbar Projects have tpx extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Projects directory Note Under the tree menu you can use the check box next to each draw or route file to display or hide it in the current map view Saving a Project Use the Map Files tab to save each of your projects quickly and easily using one of the following methods e Click File and then click Save or click the Save button H o Ifyou have not saved the project before the Save File dialog box opens Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save o Ifyou have saved the project before the Save dialog box opens All of the changes made to the current project display as a check list Select the check box next to each change you want to save and clear the check box next to each change you do not want to save Click Yes to save the selected changes click No to save the file without the changes or click Cancel to cancel the saving process e Click File and then click Save As The Save File dialog box opens Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save You can also click the Save button Hl on the toolbar 95 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Creating Transfer Files A project and its contents can be
203. gain A text box displays Splines Type the label name in the text box and then press Tracks the ENTER key on your keyboard Waypoints Images Place the object on the map MapNotes The URL Label text box displays Symbols Type the label for your draw object in the Label Taak section of the text box Waypoints Note When viewing a hyperlinked draw object on the map the object displays as an active hyperlink If you want to click the object without opening the hyperlink press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click the draw object Routable Roads Trails Tracks Lines Arcs and Splines Drawing Routable Roads or Trails on the Map The Routable Road and Routable Trail tools allow you to add a new road or trail to a draw layer in the current project You can then incorporate any new roads or trails you add to a route when you create a route You must be at data zoom level 11 0 or greater when adding roads or trails with the Routable Road or Routable Trail tools To Draw Routable Roads or Trails Use the following steps to add routable roads trails to a road layer 1 Click the Draw tab 154 Using the Draw Tools a Sil Click and hold the Routable Roads Routable Trails tool and select the tool you want Type the name of the road or trail you want to add in the Road Trail Name text box Name each routable road trail you add so you can locate it using the find feature Hover the mouse pointer over exis
204. ge You can select fewer grids or adjust the Draw Layers zoom ranges to reduce the map output size To Send Draw Layers See Sending Receiving Maps to from an Earthmate PN 40 for more information about sending the map package to the device Firmware Updates for the Earthmate PN 40 Occasionally DeLorme releases updates to the firmware for the Earthmate PN 40 GPS If you have activated a device in Topo USA you can check for firmware updates on the NetLink tab at any time The easiest way to transfer an update is to an SD card in your device To Transfer an Update to an SD Card in the Earthmate PN 40 Follow these steps to transfer a firmware update to an SD card in your device 1 Connect your Earthmate PN 40 to your computer and power it on 2 On the Connect to Computer screen highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER 3 Press the MENU button and go to the Device Setup Connect to Computer menu 4 In the USB Setting drop down list select Firmware Transfer and press ENTER The Firmware Transfer screen displays Set the device aside 5 On your computer run the installation program and follow the on screen instructions 6 On your device highlight Restart and press ENTER The device shuts down and powers back on the update transfer status displays You can also transfer updates to an SD card in an SD card reader Once the update is on the SD card insert the card into your device and power it on to start the transfer PN
205. ge On the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab 256 Using NetLink NetLink Overview NetLink is an online portal within Topo USA You must have an Internet connection to use NetLink The NetLink tab has four subtabs Within each subtab follow the on screen instructions or click the NetLink Help button for more information Home Purchase or activate a Map Library subscription activate a Data Download Dollars certificate learn more about our data and imagery and much more Map Library Purchase Methods e Map Library subscription The most cost effective method for purchasing datasets is an annual DeLorme Map Library subscription For just 29 95 a year you can download an unlimited number of our available datasets e DeLorme Data Download Dollars Included with your purchase Is a certificate for 40 worth of data downloads This gives you the opportunity to see how imagery and data can enhance your maps e Purchase You can always purchase downloads If you prefer to receive your datasets on DVD you must use this method Datasets The following datasets are available e USGS 1 24K Scanned Maps 7 5 minute 1 24 000 scale quadrangle series e SAT10 Satellite Imagery True color 10 meter resolution imagery from the French based SPOT satellite Satellites d observation de la Terre e Color DOQQ Aerial Imagery True color 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography e USGS DOQQ Aerial Imagery Black and
206. ge with Draw Layers Use the following steps to create a map with draw layers to send to the device 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Select each draw layer you want to send to the device Selected layers appear on the map 3 Click the Handheld Export tab and zoom to the area of interest on the map 4 Click the Options button to open the Handheld tab in the Options dialog box 5 Under Export Map Format select DeLorme Earthmate 6 Under Export Map Source select the map with the draw layer Left or Right 7 Under Export Data Zooms select Draw Layers 8 Choose the zoom ranges at which you want to view the data at on the handheld device 9 Click Select Edit EX SelectEdi to select the grids that cover the draw layers you want to send to the device You can use the Grid Size control to modify the grid size When selecting grids you will receive an error in the Info box if the map output is too large You can select fewer grids or adjust the Draw Layers zoom ranges to reduce the map output size 241 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Send Draw Layers See Sending Receiving Map to from an Earthmate PN 20 for more information about sending the map package to the device Firmware Updates for the Earthmate PN 20 Occasionally DeLorme releases updates to the firmware for the Earthmate PN 40 GPS If you have activated a device in Topo USA you can check for firmware updates on the NetLink tab at any time Follow the on screen
207. gestion you can draw a circle rectangle polygon over that area to avoid it when you calculate your route You can create multiple regions to avoid To Avoid a Specified Area When Routing Use the following steps to designate an area to avoid when calculating your route 1 2 si 198 Create a route Click the Draw tab to open the Draw dialog area omo Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool to view its hidden options Select the tool you want to use Optional Select one or more of the following e From the Fill drop down list select the fill style you want to apply to the draw object e Click the fill color button to the right of the Fill drop down list to select the color for your fill style e Select an outline style for your draw object from the Outline drop down list e Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your draw object e Select the width for your draw object outline from the Width drop down list e Select the Show Measurement check box to display measurement information for your draw object as your draw it on the map If you selected the Circle tool click the location for the circle s center on the map and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle Release as Routing soon as you achieve the radius you want The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle s center display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill
208. ght click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and then click Delete Route Importing Routes Routes can be imported from many other DeLorme mapping programs using the Route tab To Import an Existing Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to import an existing route using the Route tab 1 Click the Route tab and then click the New Edit subtab 2 Click File and then click Import The Import dialog box displays 3 Browse to select the route file and then click Open The map centers on the imported route and is available in the Name drop down list 204 Routing Converting a Route to a GPS Log You can convert any route to a GPS log using right click functionality To Convert a Route to a GPL Use the following steps to convert a route to a GPS log file 1 Create a route 2 Right click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and then click Save as GPS Log File The Save Route as GPS Log File dialog box displays 3 Browse to the location where you want to save the gpl file The default location is C DeLorme Docs GPSLogs 4 Type the file name in the File Name text box 5 Click Save 205 Using GPS GPS Overview You can take advantage of the Global Positioning System GPS through an interface with most GPS receivers such as the Earthmate PN Series GPS USB Earthmate GPS Earthmate GPS LT 20 or Earthmate Blue Logger GPS Using your DeLorme application a lapt
209. gments from Draw Objects 085 153 Deleting Your Entire Address Book 116 Descending Distance 00000e 182 Descending Elevation 65 182 Dilution Of PreCiSION 0eeeees 216 Directions ceeeeeeees 120 197 199 Disable Screen Saver 207 DISD AY eede e ie 12 13 Displaying Basic Map Features 74 Displaying Routes on the Map 203 Drag ANd ZOOM cc cece cence ee eeees 13 Dragging a Bitmap into XSym 174 Draw 134 135 136 137 143 145 147 149 150 152 153 155 156 161 163 171 175 178 198 Draw MapNotes cceeee eens 166 Draw Tool BOX cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 Di AWLAY CF ctits decades eetaeetetsndedes 135 E BaSUING oe a a aren 182 Editing a Contact In Your Address BOOK aridas io E es 115 Editing a ROUtE ccc cee eee ees 200 Editing a SyMboOl cceeee eens 170 Editing draw objects 00006 165 PGILING ROJAS arcra in E EEO 201 Editing Locking Draw Files 137 Elevation ccecee eee 21 185 215 Elevation Gain cccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 182 Elevation Grapns ccccceeeee ees 180 Enable GPS Voice Navigation 207 286 Enable LED on GPS Device 207 Enable Stationary Logging 207 Enable WAAS US6 00ceeeeeees 207 Entering Address Book Information 114 EIS aed ects eo ies esate a ence ober 74 Exporting a Custom Sch
210. graph automatically updates when you select a new object to profile e Double click a location on the Profile graph to center the map on the location without changing the data zoom level e The highlighted profile object on the map is retained if you go to another tab and then return to the Profile tab The selected object is not retained between program sessions e To view all the features available on the Profile tab click the More button _ Mores near the bottom of the tab to expand the view To Create a Profile Use the following steps to create a profile 1 Center your map on the area with the linear object you want to profile OR Center the route you want to profile on the map 2 Click the Profile button on the Profile tab or on the toolbar to activate it 3 Move your pointer over the 2 D map The pointer changes from to when it passes over an object that you can profile 179 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 4 Select a linear object or route on the map to generate its profile When you select the object it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the Profile tab area 5 Move your pointer along the elevation profile in the Profile graph The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top of the terrain profile These lines indicate the elevation and distance of the particular location A small crosshair follows along the corresponding object on the map An Info box dis
211. h previous topics Click the Forward button to browse forward through the topics previously viewed Print any of the Help topics by selecting a topic page with question mark or heading book symbol and then clicking the Print button You can print only the selected topic or a heading and all subtopics OR Right click the topic displaying in the right window to print only that topic Tip Before you click Print expand any links in the topic that include information you want to print within your topic While in the Help system the pointer changes to a hand when it passes over text or graphics that you can click for more information You can move resize and minimize the Help window Getting Started e To exit Help click the close button x in the upper right corner of the screen Help Documentation Conventions To help you easily locate and interpret information this Help system is formatted There are also links that expand jump to another location within the same topic or link you to other topics The table below defines each convention and its use ALL CAPITALS Acronyms names of certain commands and keys on the keyboard Note Use of the plus sign between key names indicates key combinations that perform various actions For example in the directions Press CTRL SHIFT F3 on your keyboard you must press and hold the CTRL and SHIFT keys while pressing F3 Command buttons tab names and options when used in pr
212. hange the circle s size The center of the circle remains in its original location OR If you selected a single rectangle click one of the corner points of the rectangle and drag to change its width height and area on the map OR If you selected a single polygon click one of the shape points of the polygon and drag to change its bearing or angle the leg length and polygon area on the map Reshape the polygon by dragging any of the points in the polygon to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active polygon a small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment and a small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment Select the Coordinate option or the Distance and Bearing Angle option and edit their numbers Click Apply to initiate the Using the Draw Tools changes Notes You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop down arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the Distance and Bearing Angle option You can also delete points and line segments from or add points to a polygon Press the ENTER key on your keyboard to finish your edit OR Click outside the object s active box on the map Placing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map You can place any area object circle rectangle or polygon at a specific coordinate location To Place an Area Object on the Map Use the following step
213. hat you want to save as an image 2 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab if it is not already selected 3 Under Map select Left Right or Both 4 Under Print Layout select Page the map print area is based on the paper size you have specified in the Setup options or Screen the map print area is based on the screen size The print area for a Page map displays as a red box and the print area for a Screen map displays as a blue box on the overview map 5 If you selected Page in step 4 the following options are available a Under Print Layout select a layout option Single 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 The print area displays on both the Map and the Overview Map In the example below 2 x 2 is selected This means the print area encompasses four standard pages at whatever paper size you specified in the Setup options You can assemble a 15 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide multipage map into a large map Print Layout Single cae C 3X3 Page 0 Screen O b Optional If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 In step 5a and do not want to save all the pages in the multipage map on the Map Layout graphic itself click the page s you do not want to save The page appears dimmed or gray In the example below age 4 will not print C Optional Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to save If not pan the map to the location and zoom to the level you want Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges reduces th
214. he System is strictly prohibited All rights not specifically granted by this Agreement are reserved by DeLorme ADDITIONAL USE AND PUBLICATION RIGHTS MAY BE AVAILABLE UNDER A SEPARATE EXTENDED LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTACT DELORME AT CUSTOM DELORME COM FOR DETAILS AND PRICING WARNING WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMER Warning THE SYSTEM IS SUITABLE AND INTENDED ONLY FOR GENERAL VISUAL REFERENCE USE IT SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR ANY PURPOSE REQUIRING EXACT MEASUREMENT OF DISTANCE OR DIRECTION OR FOR PRECISION IN ADDRESS LOCATION OR IN THE DEPICTION OF GEOGRAPHIC FEATURES ROUTING DIRECTIONS SHOULD BE USED ONLY AS A TRAVEL AID AND MUST ALWAYS BE VISUALLY VERIFIED BY THE USER ON THE GROUND AND EXECUTED WITH DUE REGARD TO TRAFFIC AND ROAD CONDITIONS ROAD SIGNS AND REGULATIONS Please note that the Data is merely a graphical representation of geographic features appearing on the face of the earth The Data may include features such as roads and trails that are located on private property Nothing in this License grants the use of or is intended to imply the right to use any such private property You should respect all landowner restrictions You are solely responsible for complying with all legal requirements relating to land use and for your own safety and for the consequences of your actions in your use of the Data Limited Warranty on Media DeLorme warrants that the media on which the System is furnished shall for a period of sixty 60 days from da
215. he Windows Control Panel To View a Map in 3 D Use the following steps to view a 3 D map 1 Expose the left map window using the map resize tool and then select 3 D from the drop down list at the top of the left map window A progress bar displays in the lower left corner of the map to display the 3 D drawing status OR Click the 3 D tab and then click Show 3 D A progress bar displays in the lower left corner of the map to display the 3 D drawing status 2 On the 3 D tab under 3 D View select the viewing mode amp The top option is an Outside looking in perspective This view focuses on the center of the map this allows you to spin the map around the center point ra The bottom option is an Inside looking out perspective This view is from the center of the map this allows you to spin the map around you 3 Use the Rotate controls to rotate the 3 D map to the new position The reference arrow points to the direction that you will be viewing on the map which varies depending on the 3 D View selection you made in step 2 The degree of map rotation displays above the Rotate arrows You can rotate the 3 D map using one of the following methods e Press and hold the left arrow button to rotate the map clockwise e Press and hold the right arrow button to rotate the map counter clockwise e Drag the square map in the Rotate graphic to the new position 189 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e Click anywhere
216. he current GPS position e If you want to create a log of your travels select the Start GPS Log check box in the GPS tab of the Options dialog to log automatically Or click the Record button in the GPS Log subtab to log manually e The Turns option is available only during GPS tracking To Start GPS Tracking Use the following steps to track your movement as you travel 1 Create a route Important f the current project includes hidden routes they may recalculate if you selected the Auto Back on Track check box or if you selected 210 Using GPS the Recalculate When Off Route check box in the GPS Settings To ensure this does not occur clear these check boxes or delete the routes you do not want to recalculate 2 Connect your GPS device to your computer 3 Initialize the device This step is not necessary if you are using an Earthmate GPS device 4 Click the GPS tab and then click the Status subtab For more information see Monitoring Your GPS Status 5 Click Start GPS The Show Turns section of the Route tab displays the following information e A turn graphic indicating the direction of your next turn e Distance in the units chosen on the Display tab of the Options dialog box e Time and distance until next turn e The estimated time of arrival ETA of your next stop e The ETA of your finish If the signal is strong your location displays as a green arrow dark green for WAAS enabled devices on the map as y
217. he default preferences To Select Basic Map Feature Preferences Use the following steps to change the basic map feature preferences Changes made to the map view display almost immediately after selection EE Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Map Features tab 74 Customizing the Map and Tab Display 2 Select the check box next to the map features you want to display on the map OR Clear the check box next to the map features you want to hide on the map Shaded Relief Shaded relief becomes visible at data zoom level 6 0 or greater It simulates the effect of sun shining on terrain features and casting shadows providing greater depth perception of the image Lighter shades of gray indicate gentle terrain and darker shades indicate steep terrain Using shaded relief may slow down the draw time of the map screen as you pan Contours Contour lines are available at data zoom level 6 0 or greater Contour lines show the elevation of the land in feet or meters The closer the contour lines the greater the slope The distance between the lines is the contour interval which is indicated in the Control Panel distance units are controlled in the Options dialog box Land Cover Land cover colors are available at all data zoom levels Colors indicate vegetation and land cover areas on the map such as rock and sand forests transitional areas and wetlands Grids tThe Grids optio
218. he item and then clicking the Delete button Saving many regional map packages on the device or on an SD card will impact device performance Save only the regional map packages that you need To Send Maps Use the following steps to send maps to your Earthmate GPS PN 20 or an SD card 1 Use the Handheld Export tab and the handheld export settings to create a map package To learn how to create maps see Creating a Map Package and the Creating Maps for an Earthmate PN Series GPS tutorial 2 To save the map package in internal memory or on an SD card that is in the device Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable power it on and then select Earthmate PN Series GPS from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box OR To save the map package on an SD card with an SD card reader Insert your SD card into your SD card reader and then connect it to a USB port on your computer Using the drop down list in the upper right corner of the Exchange dialog box select the removable disk option that represents your SD card reader Note Saving maps on an SD card with an SD card reader is the fastest method for saving maps to use on an Earthmate GPS PN 20 3 Click CE Exchange on the Handheld Export tab OR Click the Exchange button on the toolbar 4 To send a saved map package click the plus sign next to Saved Map Packages in the left pane of the dialog box Click the map package you want
219. he map package to internal memory click the plus sign next to Map Packages in the right pane of the dialog box and click I nternal Memory OR To save the map package to an SD card within the device click the plus sign next to Map Packages in the right pane of the dialog box and click SD Card OR 31 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To save the map package on an SD card with an SD card reader go to the next step 7 Click Send The map package Is sent to the device 8 Click Done To insert an SD card into your Earthmate GPS PN 20 remove the battery cover and batteries and then gently press down on the SD card latch within the battery compartment to open the slot Insert the SD card and press the slot down to close it The device automatically detects the maps on the SD card once it is powered on See also Creating a Map Package and Sending Receiving Maps Creating Maps for an Earthmate GPS PN 40 You can use Topo USA to send custom Custom map packages are created using the Handheld Export tab and can be any size and cover any location in the U S The data that is included in a custom map package is dependent on the data that is available for the export area as well as your settings on the Handheld tab of the Options dialog box There is a size limit for map packages if your custom map package exceeds the limit you will receive an error message map packages to your Earthmate PN 40 GPS Tip Topo USA 7 0 Data serie
220. he tab area If the secondary and primary maps are both displaying the resize tool is the bar that separates them When the bar is moved all the way to the left of the map only the primary map displays When the bar is moved all the way to the right of the map only the secondary map displays There are several methods you can use to resize the map area e Drag the bar left to expose the area of the primary map you want to see e Drag the bar right to expose the area of the secondary map you want to see e Click the right arrow on the resize tool once to move the secondary map 1 4 of the screen width You can repeat this step until the primary map is no longer visible 69 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Click the left arrow on the resize tool once to move the primary map 1 4 of the screen width You can repeat this step until the secondary map is no longer visible Double click the bar above the right arrow to show only the secondary map Double click the bar below the left arrow to show only the primary map Double click the bar between the right and left arrows to display an equal percentage of both the secondary and primary maps To Resize the Tab and Map Area Using the Resize Tools There are two tab area resize tools The horizontal resize tool is located above the tab area and lets you adjust the height of the tab area The vertical resize tool is located between the tab area and the overview map lets you resize the width of the
221. hen press ENTER on your keyboard When you hover your cursor over a comment the entire comment displays as a ToolTip Copying a Draw File There are two different ways to copy a draw file You can create an exact copy of an existing file retaining its draw file type or you can copy the contents of an existing file and save it as a different file type for example convert a road layer to a draw layer To Copy a Draw File Use the following steps to copy a draw file Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area Click to select the file that you want to copy Click Copy To A shortcut menu displays the available layer types Note Ifa layer type is not available in the shortcut menu it is because the Original draw file that you are copying does not contain data that is pertinent to that file type For example you cannot copy a draw layer that contains area objects such as circles to a road layer that requires line objects 5 If you want to create an exact copy of the original file select the layer type that matches the original file A new file is created and inserted into the table OR If you want to copy the file and save it as a different layer type select the option you want A new file is created and inserted into the table Tip You can also change a draw object type using the right click feature For more information see Changing Draw Object Types BRWN Changing Draw Object Types When you
222. hmate GPS PN 20 1 Click the Exchange button on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens 240 Using Handheld Devices 2 Inthe right pane of the dialog box If you want to receive one waypoint at a time into Topo USA click the plus sign next to Waypoints and then click the waypoint you want to receive OR If you want to receive all waypoints just click Waypoints 3 Inthe left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Waypoint Layers and then click the layer where you want to send the waypoint If you want to copy the waypoint to a new waypoint layer click New and then click Waypoint Layer Note If you do not select a layer and an existing waypoint layer is highlighted in the left pane of the dialog box the waypoint is received in that layer If a non waypoint option is highlighted for example a track layer a new waypoint layer is automatically created 4 Click Receive A progress bar indicates the copy status 5 Click Done Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button E Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Sending Draw Layers to an Earthmate PN 20 If you have draw layers excluding waypoints and tracks that you want to send to an Earthmate GPS PN 20 you can use the Handheld tab in the Options dialog to create a map that includes the data You can then use the Exchange dialog to send the map to the device To Create a Map Packa
223. hree tabs Contents 23 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 24 To view an outline of the Help system contents click the Contents tab e To view the additional topics under a particular book double click the book e To view atopic click the page Index Use the following steps to search the Help system index 1 While in the Help system click the Index tab 2 Type a keyword in the entry field The list automatically scrolls to the closest matching entry 3 Double click the topic OR Click the topic and then click Display OR Click the topic and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Notes e f atopic has any secondary index references a window displays the secondary index options Click the item of interest to display the topic e f you don t find what you re looking for in the index click the Search tab and try a search for your keyword Search Use the following steps to search for particular words or phrases within topics in the Help system 1 While in the Help system click the Search tab 2 Type a keyword in the entry field and then click List Topics or press the ENTER key on your keyboard A list of topics containing the keyword displays 3 Double click the topic under Select Topic to Display OR Click the topic and then click Display OR Click the topic and press the ENTER key on your keyboard The Help system keeps a history of viewed topics Click the Back button to browse backward throug
224. ice 6 Select Send to Device 7 Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Object drop down list 8 Click Next 9 Select the waypoint file you want to send to your device from the Waypoint File drop down list 10 To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device type a starting point for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name check box Not all devices support starting points See your device manual for more information 11 Click Send to Device 12 Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device 13 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving a Route From Your Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive routes created on your device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive a Route Use the following steps to receive a route from your device 1 Connect your device to your computer 245 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 2 If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual or GPS Settings for Third Party Devices 3 Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar 4 Click Use
225. ice you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints created on your device and save them as a draw file or as a waypoint file Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive Waypoints as a Waypoint File Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your device 1 2 aa eS 11 Connect your device to your computer If you are using a third party GPS receiver you may have to use specific settings For example if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN GRMN For more information see your owner manual Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select your device Select Receive from Device Select Waypoints from the Object drop down list Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Save As drop down list Click Next Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the Waypoint File drop down list To create a new Waypoint file select New from the Waypoint File drop down list and type the new waypoint file name in the New Waypoint File text box If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol such as the default red flag select the Use Current Waypoint active waypoint 247 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide option If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your thir
226. ied and the draw object type symbol line polygon circle etc e Road layer contents include the routable road name comments about the routable road the URL assigned when the routable road was added to the map the date and time the routable road was last modified and the length of the road in the measurement chosen in the Display settings e Trail layer contents include the routable trail name comments about the routable trail the URL assigned when the routable trail was added to the map the date and time the routable trail was last modified and the length of the trail in the measurement chosen in the Display settings e Waypoint layer contents include comments about the waypoint the URL assigned when the waypoint was added to the map the date and time the waypoint was last modified the coordinates of the waypoint the elevation of the waypoint and the symbol name e Track layer contents include comments about the track the URL assigned when the track was added to the map the date and time the track was last modified the start and finish time of the track the total time of the track the distance of the track in the measurement chosen in the Display settings and the number of readings that the track includes Optional Double click a draw object in the table to center the map on its location OR Right click the draw object in the table and select Go To from the shortcut menu Optional To sort the columns of
227. ile to facilitate e mailing or copying You can also import transfer files allowing you to Share your projects with other DeLorme users You can import a transfer file with or without attached hyperlink files When you create a transfer file with hyperlinked files you can choose to maintain the directory information of common files By doing this the recipient of the transfer file can keep a similar directory structure as the creator This is helpful when a transfer file is shared and updated between users Note Transfer files do not include map data To Import a Transfer File Use the following steps to import a transfer file including transfer files that have been e mailed to you by other DeLorme users 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click File click Transfer and then click Import The Import Transfer File dialog box displays The C DeLorme Docs Projects directory displays by default Browse to another location as needed Transfer files have dmt extensions 3 Click a file to select it The name displays in the File Name text box 4 Click Import to finish the import process The imported project opens and displays in the map view To Import a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files Use the following steps to import a transfer file that includes hyperlinked file attachments 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click File click Transfer and then click Import The Import Transfer File dialog box displays The C DeLorme Docs Projec
228. ile to help enhance or pinpoint specific areas on the map but these objects do not become part of the map They exist in a draw file that overlays the map There are five different types of draw files draw road trail waypoint and track You can create more than one draw file and overlay one on top of the other while still viewing the map beneath See Editing Locking Draw Files When you clear or delete a draw file the objects in the draw file do not display and are deleted along with the draw file Some additional draw file facts e A draw file is automatically generated the first time you add a draw object to the map e As you create draw files they are added to the current project e You can add draw files to multiple projects e You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area e Draw files are saved by default in C DeLorme Docs Draw with the default name for example DrawLayer anl1 with indicating the number order in which the file was created You can rename draw files to better identify your specific information See Creating a New Draw File e You can have multiple draw files displaying at once while working on your map Work can be done on one draw file at a time while viewing other files beneath it You can select different draw files to be the active editable file from within the Draw tab For more information see Editing Locking Draw Files e Draw files created in a particular project a
229. inished The new name displays 3 Assign keyboard shortcuts for the commands that are listed Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme There are three non editable DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes however you can create a custom scheme that you can edit with Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box 85 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Assign Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme Use the following steps to edit a custom scheme Notes 86 1 10 EE Options Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab Select a custom scheme from the Scheme drop down list Note You cannot edit DeLorme schemes Select the List option if it is not already selected Select the command grouping you want to assign shortcuts to from the Commands drop down list If you want assign shortcuts to several groupings select All Commands Click to select the command you want to assign a shortcut to Click inside the Customize Shortcut text box Press the shortcut key combination on your keyboard that you want to assign for that command Click Assign The shortcut for that command changes to the combination you assigned and displays as pending Repeat steps 4 8 for each command you want to assign Click Apply to save the changes OR Click OK to save the changes and close the Options dialog box OR Click Cancel to cancel your pending changes and close the Options dialog box You can sort th
230. installation instructions to transfer the update to your device States Included in Regional Map Packages Earthmate GPS PN 20 ONLY Each regional map package consists of one or more states in the United States See the descriptions below to determine which states are included in each regional map package Regional maps are not used with the Earthmate PN 40 the data in regional map packages is part of the PN 40 s base map East 1A East 3A West 1A Connecticut Florida North Dakota Massachusetts Georgia Nebraska Maine North Carolina South Dakota New Hampshire South Carolina West 1B New York East 3B Idaho Rhode Island Alabama Montana Vermont Louisiana Wyoming East 1B Mississippi West 2A Indiana East 4A Kansas Ohio lowa Oklahoma Pennsylvania Michigan West 2B East 2A Minnesota Colorado Delaware Wisconsin Nevada District of East 4B Utah Columbia Aeneas West 3A Haryana Illinois a SEAE Missouri aia East 2B District of saa Columbia Texas Kentucky West 4A Tennessee Alaska Virginia Oregon 242 Using Handheld Devices West Virginia Washington West 4B California Hawaii Exchanging Information with a Third party GPS Device Sending Route Information to a Third party GPS Device If you have a compatible GPS or athletic device you can use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions to your device To Send Route Points Use the following steps to send route points to your device L 2 2 ee a
231. int as graphics 3 Select the route you want to print from the Name drop down list Only routes contained in the current project display in this list 4 Under Options select from one of the following choices e Overview Provides an optimized map of your route and the route Summary trip distance trip time start total stops and finish e Travel Package Provides maps of the route with corresponding directions e Turn Details Prints 2 x 2 maps of each of the turns in your route directions 120 Printing e Directions Provides action based directions turn merge bear depart arrive and continue including the time frame for each action Note You can Save route directions as a text file e Along the Way Prints the search results of a previous Advanced Find search within a current route The search results are listed as they are listed in the Find results The Along the Way option is only available if you have recently performed a find category within current route search in the Advanced Find subtab For more information see Performing an Advanced Search e Strip Maps Provides detailed maps in the direction of travel of the route along with directions that appear in the map margin Strip maps are not printed North Up like other printed maps They are printed so that the direction of travel is always at the top of the printed map If you selected Travel Package or Strip Maps in step 4 select the miles per p
232. ion On the Map cccceceeeeneeeeeeeeenenees 115 Deleting a Contact In Your Address BOOK ccccccceee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseenaenes 116 Showing Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 116 Deleting Your Entire Address BOOK cccccccccccee eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaneennennenees 116 Exporting Your Address BOOK ivi icitievs ads Pes tianaihreiwiavarers pian Duaewe sented des tiawas 117 Relocating Address Book Contacts ccccccccseeseee cece eeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeteeaaennenngs 117 PANED arerioa eae ea ticle tects asics ET E E eatin seed A ne eee 119 PrIMUING lt a MAO iesusciteeuee iris tenthobverdecennesvannreciwantednsheh ea a 119 Printing a Route and Directions ccc ccc cc cece eee ee eee e ee eeeneeeeeseeeeeeeseeeneeenegs 120 PANDUNG es POTN Gods ocaatnnenbicnncciasianetoewtsictanaaineads vaxe cue E a E A 121 Adding Text or Graphics to Your MaDP cccccc eee e eee e cece E O A a EA 122 Aligning Text and Graphic Items On Your Map cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeneeees 124 Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Ma p cc cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 125 Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map cccccceeeeeee eens 126 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map cccccceeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 126 Manually Assembling a Multi page Map cccc cece cece ee eeeee
233. ion anywhere on the globe GPS provides accurate information about coordinate position elevation speed and direction of travel Many people have discovered the benefits of GPS for tracking vehicles recording routes and much more How Does GPS Work The GPS constellation consists of 24 satellites each carrying several atomic clocks to ensure the most accurate time possible The satellites broadcast low power radio waves containing the satellite s identity code and the exact time to the nanosecond that the message was sent When a GPS receiver picks up a Satellite signal it identifies the satellite and compares the signal time with its own clock The time difference represents the time it has taken for that radio wave to travel from the satellite to the receiver Since radio waves travel at the speed of light the time difference can be used to calculate the distance from the satellite to the GPS receiver The satellite s identity code provides the location of the satellite and the distance to the receiver creates a sphere of possible locations for the GPS receiver Without more information the receiver only knows that it is located somewhere on that sphere Two additional satellites are necessary to narrow down the receiver s possible position Each of these satellites sends a similar radio message containing time and identity information The GPS receiver checks the orbital location of each satellite and uses the elapsed time to creat
234. ion in the Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start Finish Stop or Via text boxes when creating a route in the Route tab To Move a MapNote Use the following steps to move a MapNote i 2 3 Click the Draw tab Click the Select tool kl Click the MapNote to select it The MapNote is enclosed with a box You can e Drag the stem to a new location to move the MapNote e Drag the text box to a new location leaving the anchor point in the Same location on the map e Drag the anchor point to a new location leaving the text box in the same location on the map To Delete a MapNote Use the following steps to delete a MapNote PWN H Click the Draw tab Click the Select tool kl Click the MapNote to select it Press the DELETE key on your keyboard 167 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Custom Symbols Custom Symbols Overview DeLorme XSym lets you create and edit your own symbols which you can edit and add to maps within DeLorme mapping programs The symbols created are 24 x 24 pixels New and edited symbols are saved within a symbol set dim file and can contain up to 250 symbols Symbol set files are located at C DeLorme Docs Symbols The DeLorme XSym Dialog Box The XSym dialog box provides all the tools you need to create and edit symbols for your DeLorme mapping program Click an area on the diagram below to view Information on the various parts of the dialog box Tip To close the pop
235. ions in the basic features list To quickly search for a particular type of feature type the name of the item in the Search text box A list of matching keywords displays and corresponding feature types are listed in the Search Results window Results for the number of keywords and types found also display A selected check box indicates the feature displays on the map e Select clear the individual feature check box to show or hide that feature e Click the small None button to the right of the Search Results window to show none of the features listed e Click the small All button to the right of the Search Results window to display all of the features listed e Click Only to display only those features listed in the Search Results window e Click Exclude to display all features except those listed in the Search Results window To use the map feature tree to select which POIs display on the map click the plus signs to expand the individual branches A selected check box indicates the feature type displays on the map Note Some branches expand further than others Selecting clearing a check box at a certain branch of the tree shows hides all the items below that level e Select clear the individual map feature check box to show or hide that feature e Click All to select all map features in the program e Click None to select none of the types in the program Note A small number of features cannot be turned off They are pa
236. ish browse for the contact or type the name of the contact e Use the toolbar to search for an address book entry as a route start or finish browse for the contact or type the name of the contact With these functions you can select the lt From Address Book gt option from the applicable drop down list or you can type the name of the contact directly in the text box to find the entry If you choose to type the name of the contact the Book check box in the Find tab underneath the Address Book buttons must be selected To disable the address book search functionality clear the Book check box Importing Existing Address Book Information You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually entering each record e The Address Book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e Your can resize and sort the columns inside the Address Book dialog box e Imported address book items are merged with your existing address book Items with identical names are not replaced during the import process To Import an Existing Address Book Use the following steps to import an existing address book and view its contents on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button w The DeLorme Address Book dialog box displays 3 Click Import 4 Click Browse to find the dab txt csv or tab address book file Select the file and then click Open 5 If the first line
237. isting Address Book IATOrmMatioN iinan 113 Importing Files to Draw Files 139 Importing ROUtES cece eee es 204 Importing Tab Manager Preferences 81 Importing Transfer Files 98 ATO aa a aa 66 LAICIANIZING GPS areae 207 Inserting Stops and Vias 195 International Labels 0005 74 terval aa A ATRE 21 J Joining Linear Objects 160 PPE Gy satin iine a a AE 15 K Keyboard Shortcuts85 87 88 89 191 Keywords for Category Searches 107 L Labeling a Draw Object 154 Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote Sine ea ta eada teen en canoe nies 202 LONG COVER ererat terete 74 Large Symbols At cceeeeeees 73 EGUICUOG ooe A 182 Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map 126 LINE net aa canes oetetete ine 155 Linear DIStANCe cccceeeeeeeees 182 LONGU JE ir 182 M MAGNIFICATION raea a a 73 Magnify Map ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 207 Make Stop cccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 200 MaKe Via senere ae e iet 200 Map Center Crosshair 000eeeeee 74 Map COO Sra e EN 72 Map Coordinates cccseeeeeeeee ees 21 Map Features cce eee cece 74 77 Index Map Package s 0cceeeees 221 242 Map Rotation TOol ccceeeeeeees 21 WaD NOL eiccuttut Seco ution eles 163 MapShare ccc cceeee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeaees 64 MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and Dercetina a
238. it and click OK Click Directions to view the route directions AND OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options To Insert a Stop or Via Into Your Route The Insert Stop Via function arranges stops vias geographically in the route Use the following steps to insert a stop or via to your route 196 1 2 3 Create a route In the New Edit dialog area in the Route tab make sure the button next to the Stop tool Q if you are adding a stop or the Via tool e if you are adding a via is labeled Insert If it is not click the arrow next to the button and select Insert from the shortcut menu To insert a stop or via to the route click the Stop or Via tool and then click the location on the map OR e To use an address book entry as your stop or via location 1 Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop down list 2 Select an Address Book entry and then click OK e To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop down list e Type the stop location in the Stop or Via text box Type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address If you type an address it must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Code Routing The Book check box underneath the A
239. ity town landmark object label and so forth e Street Address Use Street Address to locate by street number and name highway number and so on You can use standard abbreviations like Rd Road St Street or Saint Mt Mount Dr Drive and Ct Court e Street Intersection Use this search to locate the intersection of two specified roads e ZIP Code s Finding a Location on the Map Use at least a partial ZIP Code to locate the covered regions The results are displayed in a browse list Name and or Category Searches for a specific name in a specific category For example if you want to find a particular trail in a state type the name of the trail in the Name text box type trail in the Keywords text box and then type a state name or abbreviation in the State box For more information on category searches see Keywords for Category Searches Note Category keywords must be at least three characters in length Category Searches for a category of items within the specified area For more information on category searches see Keywords for Category Searches Notes e Inall category searches the Keywords field is optional If the Keywords field is left blank all objects in the selected Within area display in the Results list e Category keywords must be at least three characters in length Area Code and Exchange There are no Within options for Area Code and Exchange search Use at least a partial Area Code and
240. keyboard OR Double click the last point of the track Tip To get information about a track right click it on the map and click Info in the shortcut menu The Info tab opens with information about the track Editing a Routable Road Routable Trail Line Arc or Spline Once you create a line object routable road routable trail line arc or spline you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or width copy move or delete it at any time To Edit a Line Object Use the following steps to edit the shape of a routable road trail line arc or spline L Open the project containing the draw layer with the line object you want to edit Click the Draw tab If the line object you want to edit is not active click File and activate the draw file in the file list Then click Done Click the Select tool A and then click the line object you want to edit 157 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e A box displays around the selected line e The shape points used to create the line object display as small magenta squares 5 Perform any of the following edits to the line object 6 e To edit any label on the line object select it twice then type the label in the text box that displays next to the line object OR Select the line object and edit its label e Reshape the line object by dragging any of its points to a new location When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line object
241. knife Straight edge ruler longer than the edge of the longest sheet Permanent tape invisible or magic type Removable tape To Manually Assemble a Multi page Map Use the following steps to manually assemble a multi page map 1 2 For each sheet that needs to be trimmed mark the edges of the sheet to indicate the areas to trim Use the straight edge ruler and razor knife to trim each sheet to the thin black line bordering the map Note For adjacent sheets trim only one page This makes piecing the sheets together easier The following diagrams of a 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 multi page map provide additional information on where to trim the sheets The arrows indicate the edges to be trimmed 2 x 2 multi page Map 127 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide i A 3 Align two adjacent sheets placing the trimmed edge on top of the non trimmed edge Notes e Piece together the multi page map one seam at a time This is especially important for a 3 x 3 multi page map e Build the multi page map from the inside out to minimize any misalignment 128 Printing 4 Using two small pieces of removable tape tack together the aligned sheets Note This is a temporary measure Steps 6 through 10 describe how to completely secure the sheets 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the sheets are pieced together 6 With the multi page temporarily pieced together use small pieces of removable tape to secure the corners and edges of
242. l e While your receiver is acquiring data many red dots display on your map except with Magellan receivers You may have to zoom in to see them clearly These red dots are positioned at the readings taken by the GPS receiver as it is acquiring data e For more information on the GPS Status dialog area see Monitoring Your GPS Status e Magellan receivers do not display any data until you are moving e If you have the HotSync manager loaded in the startup the default configuration it reserves the COM port If that is the one where the GPS receiver is attached you must exit HotSync manager for the GPS receiver to initialize To do this right click the HotSync icon on the taskbar and select Exit from the shortcut menu If you have two COM ports verify the correct COM port is selected for use with Topo USA e Any questions or problems regarding the operation of your GPS receiver Should be directed to its manufacturer Tracking a Route with GPS When tracking you can follow along a road route you created As you travel the current leg or segment of your route is highlighted on the map Notes e To automatically recalculate your route when off track select the Auto check box next to the Back on Track button in the New Edit subtab If you do not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off track clear the Back on Track check box and click Back on Track whenever you want to recalculate the route based on t
243. l Symbol I mage tool to view its hidden options Select the Image tool Under Images select an existing image or click Add browse to an image and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection 3 Select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and type the appropriate coordinates or numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the text style options box 4 Click Apply The point object displays on the map at those coordinates distance and bearing or angle 5 If you are placing a text label enter the text and press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the text label active area when you are finished Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes You can add your own MapNotes to a map in Topo USA 7 0 MapNotes have a white background that make them highly visible on the map They can contain multiple 166 Using the Draw Tools lines of text and can be moved off of the labeled area without losing their visual links with the points You can use MapNotes for directions or explanations Notes This Help topic describes the steps necessary to move and delete Draw MapNotes To show delete Route MapNotes see Setting Your Routing Preferences When you use right click functionality to add a MapNote it is light blue unless it is a blank MapNote You can search for a MapNote by its label name using the QuickSearch funct
244. l com www nps gov alka www octa trails org www nps gov cali www caminorealcarta org www nps gov elca www iditarodhistorictrail org www ak bIiIm gov ado index html www therapure com anza trail anzamen htm www nps gov juba www lewisandclark org www nps gov lecl www mormontrails org www nps gov mopi www nezpercetrail net www fs fed us npnht www oldspanishtrail org www nps gov olsp www octa trails org www nps gov oreg State s Web Site I nformation Phone Located In Number 816 252 2276 505 438 7400 Anza Trail Coalition of Arizona 520 325 0909 406 761 3950 801 526 4552 208 940 0053 702 874 1410 816 252 2276 Overmountain Victory National Historic Trail Pony Express National Historic Trail Santa Fe National Historic Trail Selma To Montgomery National Historic Trail Trail of Tears National Historic Trail NC SC TN VA Info Center SC CA CO KS MO NE NV UT WY CO KS MO NM OK Info Center NM AL AR GA IL KY MO MS NC OK TN Info Center AR Recreational and Travel Contact Information 864 936 7921 620 285 2054 334 727 6390 501 666 9032 www ovta org www nps gov ovvi www xphomestation com www nps gov poex www santafetrail org www nps gov safe www nps gov semo www nationaltota org www nps gov trte A trail that is a point in the data but cannot be s
245. lays at the location if the MapTags check box is selected Single click an item in the results list if you want to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Search Results Use the right click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Waypoint or Address Book entry or assign it a start stop or finish in a route J ust right click a search result and select the applicable option from the shortcut menu Note The program keeps a history of your search words during a session If you want to delete your Advanced search history click the QuickSearch subtab and select Clear History from the Search For drop down list Then click Yes to delete the search history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs 104 Finding a Location on the Map Performing a POI Search The POIs subtab gives you an easy way to find the places of interest you are looking for You can search over 4 million places of interest including Wal Mart stores post offices hospitals and much more Some POIs contain extended information such as website links hours of operation and so on To view this extended information right click the POI search result point to Add and then click Detailed MapNote to view the information on the m
246. le size or color select a new symbol if applicable or click the hyperlink button to change the URL address 4 Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the point object s active area when you are finished 165 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Placing a Waypoint Symbol Text Label or I mage ata Specific Location You can place any point object waypoint symbol text label or image at a specific coordinate location To Place a Point Object at a Specific Location Use the following steps to place a waypoint symbol text label or image at a specific coordinate location 1 Click the Draw tab 2 To place a waypoint click and hold the Tracks Waypoints tool and select the Waypoints tool EA Select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options You can also select a different font style size and color for the waypoint name OR To place a symbol click and hold the MapNote Text T Label Symbol I mage tool and select the Symbol tool eal Select the symbol from the Symbol Selection list You can also select a different font style size and color for the symbol name OR To place a text label click and hold the MapNote Text Label Symbol I mage tool and select the Text Label tool O Select the font style size and color from the text style options A sample of how your text display appears to the left of the options OR To place an image click and hold the MapNote Text Labe
247. line Power Line Railroad Abandoned HH Railroad ttt Runway ram DeLorme Atlas and Gazetteer Symbols Developed Boat Ramp at data zoom leves 11 ara 12 e Freshwater Fisting et data zoom levels 11 and2 e T satatar Fishing at data zoom levais 11 ana 32 62 Using the Toolbar Showing Hiding Toolbar Options You can customize the toolbar to show the options you use most You can also activate toolbar options that are not turned on by default To modify the toolbar 1 Right click the toolbar Toolbar options with a check mark next to them are displayed on the toolbar 2 Click the item to show or hide it on the toolbar Reordering the Toolbar Options To reposition the toolbar segments horizontally or vertically just drag the dotted vertical bar that separates each segment to the new location left right up or down You cannot move a toolbar segment above the top line on the toolbar To Create New Projects To create a new project click the New button E on the toolbar If you made changes to the open project the Save Changes dialog box opens to ask you if you want to save your changes For more information see Creating and Deleting Projects To Save a Project To save the project that is currently open 1 Click the Save button H on the toolbar The Save File dialog box opens 2 Browse to the location where you want to save the project Type a new name in the File Name text
248. locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Edit a Symbol Use the following steps to edit a symbol 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool u TE to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays 1 Select the symbol you want to edit from the symbol selection of the default symbol set or from another symbol set you have created The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 1 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 7 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set each occurrence of that symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol 8 Click OK when finished Note As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Finding a Custom Symbol The symbol na
249. me you assign to a symbol in XSym is different than the label you attach to the symbol on the map using the symbol draw tool You can use the symbol name to help locate a custom symbol you have already placed on a map using the Advanced feature under the Find tab To Find a Custom Symbol Use the following steps to find a symbol by its symbol name 1 Click the Find tab and then click Advanced 2 Select Category from the Find drop down list 170 ot a Notes Using the Draw Tools Select the applicable option from the Within drop down list Type the symbol name in the Keywords text box Click Search Click OK The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text box The Symbol Name displays in the Map Feature Type column just before the symbol s feature type draw object Double click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your selection on the map The map view centers on the item If you assigned a name for the symbol under the Draw tab a MapTag displays the name at the symbol location If you did not assign a name for the symbol a MapTag displays the Symbol Name at the symbol location If you do not assign a symbol name to a symbol in XSym you can locate it with the generic keyword of symbol or by the name or phrase given the symbol in the Draw tab For more information see Finding a Symbol by Its Name If you assigned a Symbol Name to a custom symbol in XSym and placed the s
250. ment chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box The data zoom level affects interval display Scale Bar ndicates the distance one scale bar unit equals in the measurement chosen under in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Overview Map The overview map is a smaller map in the lower right corner of the screen that offers a wide angle view of your current map view area It is approximately three data zoom levels out from the current map view Tips e Click anywhere on the overview map and that point becomes the new map center This allows you to travel greater distances with each mouse click than you can within the larger current map view 21 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Use the black view box in the overview map window to pan the map Point anywhere on the view box When the pointer becomes a drag the view box to the new location a Fr i i wa ai z z a 7 1 ogg a b 5 By I oa oe J oa Tin ee _ g m Ma EUMM WASHINGTON Chasatte Toolbar Use the toolbar at the top of the map screen to perform many functions in the program without navigating through the tab area Create save and or open Projects These features can also be found in the Map Files tab Print your current map screen Find more printing functionality on the Print tab or quick print with the current Print tab settings Share maps route directions or profiles with friends family or associates with Map
251. mi Lin Dist 3 5 mi You can also profile an object or route on the map by right clicking the item and then clicking Profile To view your object s profile in the opposite direction click the Reverse button kK The profile order flips horizontally The profile graph automatically updates when you select a new object to profile Double click a location on the profile graph to center the map on the location without changing the data zoom level OR Right click the place on the graph you want to see on the map and select Go To from the shortcut menu 181 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To View the Overview Profile Graph ee ee Use the following steps to view the overview Profile graph 1 Click More _ Mores The overview profile graph displays at the bottom of the screen it isa smaller version of the main profile graph 2 To zoom in to a specific part of the profile place the cursor over one of the horizontal bars on either side of the overview profile graph When the pointer changes to a horizontal arrow drag the bar towards the center of the overview profile graph e When you move the bars the main profile graph adjusts to show the area within the borders and the right and left vertical scales adjust to fit the data you are viewing The area you are not viewing in the main graph is highlighted with grey in the overview graph e When you hover your cursor over the area within the bars the cursor changes to a
252. must activate your device and enable the exchange features in Topo USA 225 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide See the following topics for information about exchanging information with an Earthmate PN Series GPS Earthmate PN 40 Sending Receiving Maps Sending Receiving Routes Sending Receiving Tracks Sending Receiving Waypoints Sending Draw Layers Firmware Updates Earthmate PN 20 Sending Receiving Maps Sending Receiving Routes Sending Receiving Tracks Sending Receiving Waypoints Sending Draw Layers Firmware Updates Enabling Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange Features in Topo USA During the product installation you were give the option to select each Earthmate PN Series GPS you own If you did not select a device and you do own an Earthmate PN Series GPS you can enable the exchange features in Topo USA using the Help menu You must enable the exchange features to send and receive maps waypoints tracks and routes to and from your device You must also activate your device To Enable Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange Features in Topo USA Use the following steps to enable the exchange features in Topo USA 1 From the Topo USA Help menu click Enable Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange Features 2 If you have not enabled Topo USA the following message displays Would you like to use Topo USA 7 0 to send receive maps waypoints tracks and routes to from an Earthmate PN Series GPS Click Yes to enable the exchange
253. n e Points in Routable Roads Routable Trails Tracks Lines Splines and Polygons Draw objects such as routable roads routable trails tracks lines splines and polygons consist of shape points and end points e Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the object They give the object its shape When you select a draw object on the map shape points display along the active object as small magenta squares The line object below was drawn with the spline tool e End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a draw object When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line spline or polygon e A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected line segment e A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line segment The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment 132 Using the Draw Tools e When you click the start or last end point of the line segment within a line draw object and the Show Measurement check box is available when using the Polygon or Line tool and selected it displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length of the line segment leg and the total length of the entire line object on the map e When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a polygon draw object a text box displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line the length
254. n red flag canoe etc Draw symbols Objects in non DeLorme data 108 Roads and Trails Bridge Exit Ferry Foot Trail Highway Hiking Interstate One Way Railroad Road Street Trail Tunnel Travel Amenities Airport Exit Landmark Rest Area Unique Natural Features Geographic Feature Landmark Locale Mining Trail Park or Other Open Space Tourist Attraction Notes on Category Searches Finding a Location on the Map The following list provides notes you may find helpful for performing category searches e Category keyword searches must be at least three characters in length e Keywords are not case sensitive Using all capital letters or no capital letters does not affect the search e Some generic keywords water for example match many categories and display a dialog box with specific categories Select or clear these categories depending on what you want to locate e n the Keyword Category samples below some keywords are used together to narrow the search The following two examples provide information on how results may differ using words together and separately e Example 1 Using Local Road provides many category results such as Ferry Crossing Local Road Local or Rural Road and Railroad Local Line 109 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e Example 2 Using Road provides over 100 results from more categories e Partial words are recognized when performing a search e You can use key
255. n Earthmate GPS PN 20 or an Earthmate PN 40 follow Creating Maps for an Earthmate GPS PN 20 You can use Topo USA to send custom Custom map packages are created using the Handheld Export tab and can be any size and cover any location in the U S The data that is included in a custom map package is dependent on the data that is available for the export area as well as your settings on the Handheld tab of the Options dialog box There is a size limit for map packages if your custom map package exceeds the limit you will receive an error message or regional Regional map packages are pre saved and contain general road and point data for multi state regions in the U S Regional map packages contain only Topo USA 7 0 data only map packages to your Earthmate GPS PN 20 e To create and send a custom map package follow steps 1 5 e To send only a regional map package go straight to step 5 2 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Tip Topo USA 7 0 Data series is the same data that is on the detailed data DVDs that came with your PN Series GPS If you installed the detailed data for the map you are creating clear the Topo USA 7 0 Data Series check box on the Handheld tab of the Options dialog box so you do not duplicate data in your map Optimizing Performance You can more quickly access maps on the device if they are saved to the GPS device s internal memory however for large maps the transfer process can be Slow To speed up the transf
256. n and browse to the location Then select the map from the Handheld Map drop down list 8 Select the user you want to send the map to from the User drop down list 9 Select the media destination from the Destination drop down list 10 Click Prepare for Sync 11 Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard 12 Repeat the steps for each map you want to send 13 Click Finish The exported map is available on your handheld device after your next synchronization operation Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab oe ee i 248 Using Handheld Devices Sending Route Information to Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions to your Palm OS device To Send Route Points Use the following steps to send route points to your Palm OS device oe Se SY p9 10 Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Palm OS Select Send to Device Select Route Points from the Object Type drop down list Click Next From the Route drop down list select the route file that contains the route points you want to send to your device Click Prepare for Sync Repeats the steps for each route file you want to send to your device Click Finish The route points are available on your handheld device after your next synchronization
257. n can be used to identify coordinate points on the map Grid lines automatically adjust for the data zoom level of your map Parks or Reserves Parks and Reserves are available at data zoom level 7 0 or greater and include areas such as parks preserves recreational area and public forests Publicly Managed Lands Publicly Managed Lands are only available when the Bureau of Land Management BLM dataset is downloaded and installed The feature includes areas such as lands managed through the Bureau of Land Management and displays at all data zoom levels Game Management Districts Wildlife Management Units are only available when the Wildlife Management Units WMU dataset is downloaded and installed The feature includes areas of managed wildlife and game and displays at data zoom level 6 0 or greater USGS Quadrangle Coverage The USGS 7 5 minute quadrangle coverage is indicated by red lines These display at data zoom level 8 O or greater Quadrangle names display at data zoom level 9 0 and higher To view quad info such as Orig Date and Quad Order ID number needed when purchasing quads right click a point within the quad and then click Info An information box displays in the lower right corner of the screen 3DTQ Region Coverage Displays the DeLorme 3DTQ product CD volume label which covers each map area at data zoom level 10 0 or greater Map Center Crosshair The map center crosshair indicates the map center at any data z
258. n for using that particular function If you do not want to see that specific pop up tutorial again select the Do Not Show Again check box before you close it If you do not want to see any pop up tutorials click the Help button B on the toolbar and then click Shut Off All Pop Up Tutorials e ToolTips When you point to a tool for a few seconds a short label ToolTip describing the tool displays on your screen ToolTips also display in windows and dialog boxes when you point to a button icon or other feature e Information Boxes Several tabs contain information boxes Information boxes provide descriptions about the features and functions of the selected tab Help Menu Click the Help button T on the toolbar to view the online Help options and then click an item to select it Tip To access a Help menu item using its underlined letter click the Help button and then press the underlined letter for the item on your keyboard For example to access the Map Legend click the Help button and then press the M key on your keyboard Context Sensitive Help Click the context sensitive Help button 2 to receive Help information for the tab you are using Using the Help System The Help system provides explanations of all of the features and functions of the application To access the Help system click the Help button on the toolbar and then click Help Topics or press the F1 key on your keyboard e The Help system has t
259. n import a file containing survey information as long as the survey information is formatted correctly e The file must start with Begin Survey and end with End e The second line must be a coordinate e The remainder of the file can be made up of lines or arcs A line is defined by direction and length e A curve is defined by the word curve followed by a letter representing the side of the arc to put the radius This is followed by the length of the radius and the length of the arc The arc is completed with a bearing from the start to finish point e For more information see Sample Survey File Formatting a Text File to I mport as a Draw File These are the formatting conventions with examples for creating a text file to import as a draw file BEGIN LINE BEGIN LINE LAT LON 43 807801 70 164440 LAT LON 43 807629 70 163801 LAT LON 43 807211 70 162746 END 43 806 07 70 163400 43 806696 70 163905 43 807125 70 164768 43 807801 70 164440 END Spline BEGIN SPLINE BEGIN SPLINE LAT LON 43 807801 70 164440 141 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Polygon Rectangle Circle Symbol MapNote Text Label 142 LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON END BEGIN ARC LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON END BEGIN POLY LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON LAT LON END BEGIN CIRCLE LAT LON Radius END BEGIN SYMBOL LAT LON Name Symbol Name END BEGIN NOTE LAT LON Text END BEGIN TEXT LAT LON Text
260. n on the toolbar Use the Options dialog box to set GPS display map feature handheld 3 D and keyboard shortcut preferences An Options button is also available on the 3 D Handheld Export and GPS tabs 67 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Display Options Overview See the following Help topics to learn more about the Display options in the Options dialog box e Changing the Map Colors e Changing the Map Magnification Level e Changing How POls Display on the Map e Setting Units of Measure Preferences Resizing the Map and Tab Areas You can horizontally and vertically resize the primary right map secondary left map tab area and overview map with the map and tab area resize tools Notes e The tab and overview map window size does not change when you choose another tab e Some tab areas that provide search results automatically resize depending on the number of results To Resize the Map and Tab Area Using the Drag Method Use the drag method to horizontally or vertically resize these areas 1 Point to the frame area between the tab and overview map windows The pointer becomes a OR Point to the horizontal edge of the tab main map window The pointer eae becomesa F 2 Drag to resize 3 To cancel the resize while dragging press the ESC key on your keyboard The size just prior to this resize is restored To Resize the Map Area Using the Resize Tools The map resize tool runs perpendicular to t
261. n the right pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Saved Map Packages to receive a saved map package or Regional Map Packages to receive a regional map package and then click the map you want to receive To receive all saved or regional map packages just click Saved Map Packages or Regional Map Packages 5 Click Receive The map is received into Topo USA and a progress bar indicates the copy Status 6 Click Done Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button Ze Exchange on the Handheld Export tab or the GPS tab Sending Receiving Routes to from an Earthmate PN 20 You can use Topo USA to exchange routes with the DeLorme Earthmate GPS PN 20 Notes e You must connect the Earthmate GPS PN 20 to your computer with the USB cable to send information to the device e To rename delete or send receive a route right click the item in the 237 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option You can also delete a map by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete button You cannot create trail routes on an Earthmate PN Series GPS To follow a trail route create a trail route in Topo USA and then send it to your device using the instructions below If you stray off of a trail route s course while navigating with the device you will be asked if you would like to recalculate the route Because the Earthmate PN Series GPS cannot create trail
262. ncluding via fax paper copies or 279 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Static digital images such as PDF or TIFF files of TOPO USA map printouts depicting the location of your business or institution or the locations of your business or institution related meetings or events and in flyers or brochures that contain no paid advertising Paper Report Distribution Rights You may reproduce for distribution to colleagues or clients up to one thousand 1 000 paper copies of any TOPO USA map printouts for use In paper reports such as appraisals or environmental studies provided that no such report includes more than fifty 50 different TOPO USA maps and that the distribution does not constitute a general and unrestricted publication for sale or resale or contain paid advertising Periodical Illustrations You may reproduce paper copies of any TOPO USA map printouts as illustrations to articles in printed paper periodical works such as magazines newspapers and newsletters provided that the publication is not primarily a collection of maps and provided that proper legend as described below accompanies the output Such articles may also be posted on your Web site Graphic printers hired by licensee to print DeLorme map images are required to purchase a license Web Site Map Display Rights You may display on your personal business or institutional Web site static map images derived from the System provided that you include the Legend indicat
263. nd the one you want to locate To center an item on the map double click it or select it and then click Go To Tips Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Find Results Use the right click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard center a search result on the map go to select all search results add a result as a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Waypoint or Address Book entry or assign it a start stop or finish in a route J ust right click a search result and select the applicable option from the shortcut menu 105 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Finding a Symbol by its Name Within the Draw tab you can attach a name to any symbol you add to your map For more information on adding symbols to the map see Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote or Text Label to the Map You can use a name to help locate a symbol you have already placed on a map using the QuickSearch feature on the Find tab For example if you named a symbol My House when you placed it on the map use the following steps for conducting a search on the unique symbol name To Find a Symbol by Its Name Use the following steps to find a symbol by its name 1 Click the Find tab 2 Using QuickSearch type the symbol name followed by the town and state abbreviation for example My Office Yarmouth
264. nd then click Copy to Active Trail Layer OR To change a routable road routable trail waypoint or track to a draw layer right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object to copy to OR To create a copy of an existing area object point object or line object right click the object on the map point to Manage Draw point to Copy to Draw Object and then click the object to copy to OR To change a track to a GPS log right click the track on the map point to Manage Draw and click Copy Track to GPS Log OR To change a symbol to a waypoint right click the symbol on the map point to Manage Draw and click Copy Symbol to Waypoint Tip You can also change a draw file type using the File section of the Draw tab For more information see Copying a Draw File Creating a Direct Route from a Line Object Once you have placed a routable trail line arc or spline on the map you can use the right click feature to create a direct route using the points in that line object 146 Using the Draw Tools To Create a Route from a Routable Trail Line Arc or Spline Use the following steps to create a direct route from a trail line arc or spline 1 Place a routable trail line arc or spline on the map 2 Right click the line object on the map and click Create Route from Line The original line object is retained in its draw file and a new direct route is created 3
265. ndscape Conservation System 202 208 3516 National www cr nps qov NPS Center for Historic Sites Recreation amp NPS Conservation 202 354 6900 U S Fish and www fws gov 800 344 WILD Wildlife Service National Trails www blim gov nics nsht index html BLM National BLM Landscape Conservation System 202 208 3516 National Trails 202 208 3100 NPS or NPS Center for Recreation amp Conservation 202 354 6900 National www gocampingamerica com 703 241 8801 Association of www arvc org RV Parks amp Campgrounds ARVC 273 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide National Historic Trail Information Trail Name Ala Kahakal National Historic Trall California National Historic Trail El Camino Real de Tierra Adentro National Historic Trail Iditarod National Historic Trail Juan Bautista De Anza National Historic Trail Lewis and Clark National Historic Trail Mormon Pioneer National Historic Trail Nez Perce National Historic Trail Old Spanish National Historic Trail Oregon National Historic Trail 274 CA ID KS MO NE NV OR UT WY Info Center MO NM TX Mexico Info Center NM AZ CA Mexico Info Center CA IA IL ID KS MO MT ND NE OR SD WA Info Center MT IA IL NE UT WY ID OR MT WY Info Center ID AZ CA CO NM NV UT CA ID KS MO NE NV OR UT WY Info Center a www alakahakai
266. ning Service PPS for military and authorized personnel 219 Using Handheld Devices Handheld Export Creating a Map Package With Topo USA 7 0 you can export maps to be used on the DeLorme Earthmate PN Series GPS or a compatible Palm OS or Pocket PC PDA You must have Street Atlas USA Handheld installed to view exported maps on a PDA To Create a Map Package Use the following steps to create a custom map to send to an Earthmate PN Series GPS or PDA L Notes Set your handheld export preferences using the Handheld tab in the Options dialog box Be sure to specify if you are exporting maps to a DeLorme Earthmate or Palm OS Pocket PC device Click the Handheld Export tab To manually select the export area choose an appropriate grid size from the Grid Size drop down list see Grid Size Comparisons for more information click the Select Edit button E Selectati and click grids on the map to add or remove them Grids selected for export are shaded red OR Select the grid size from the Grid Size drop down list see Grid Size Comparisons for more information type a location in the Search for and select a location box click a result in the results list and then click the FA Preview Preview button The default export area is defined with shaded grids Click the Select All EB Seect AN utton to select the default export area or click the Select Edit EB Selectati button to add or remove grids Grid
267. nished The map changes to a 2 D view OR Select 2 D from the drop down list at the top of the left map window when finished When the 3 D map window Is open you can use the grab and pan tool on the toolbar Compass Rose navigation tools Zoom tools and or the Overview Map window to adjust the 3 D map Scroll along the edges of the 2 D map or pan with the navigation tools to redraw the 2 D background the 3 D map redraws with the new map center Click a point on the 3 D map to center the map on that point When you move your cursor on the right map a 3 D cursor echoes that movement on the left map Viewing Your Map in 3 D Flying Over a 3 D Map You can simulate flying over the 3 D terrain Access these features using the Pan feature in the 3 D tab or by activating the 3 D Navigation keyboard shortcut scheme To Fly Over a 3 D Map Using Keyboard Shortcuts Use the following steps to fly over a 3 D map using keyboard shortcuts 1 View a map in 3 D FE Options l Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab OR Click the 3 D tab to open it and click the Options button Select 3 D Navigation DeLorme Scheme from the Scheme drop down list Click OK to activate the selected scheme To rotate the map to the right press ALT D on your keyboard OR To rotate the map to the left press ALT A on your keyboard To increase the pitch press ALT W on your keyboard OR To decreas
268. nsiel Files e viber Aina the a a bur bieiia aia a 96 IMPONG Transfer FICS wiinicharsatiaxahade do natnans eed A cela 98 E MalllhG at Frans el Elle vissiciiadivindsanchi aie EAA TAE EE ces 98 FINGING a Eocation ON TNE MAD vtccirassvacadinsieasnatvenns cov ioutenn tie dial ada AEE 101 Perrorming a Basie SGarchixis siisssianti ea Ah eae hires 101 Performing ahr Advanced 5S Care iaren a E EA ET 102 PerlormiNg a POI Sea C eraa a ceria ele eae 105 Finding a Symbol by its NaMe essssenerrerererrererrrrrrsrrrrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrerrrrre 106 Tips on Viewing Search Results nansnsnsrsrrrrrrrrersrersrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrne 106 Keywords for Category Searches sssrsrsrsrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrsrererererrrrrrnre 107 MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and Deleting sesererersrrrrrrrrrrerers 110 Using Address BOOK GOntacCts wiv isievtinisniiarctndatiiiaversetietadsdiertandieeeliwaieadadiaveliaes 113 Searching for Address Book Contacts ccccc cece ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeeennes 113 Importing Existing Address Book Information cccccceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeneneeeees 113 Manually Entering Address Book INformatiOn ccccccceeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeenneeenes 114 Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact ccccee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 114 Editing a Contact In Your Address BOOK cc cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeseneeeeeesaneneegs 115 Manually Moving a Contact s Locat
269. nt to view The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box displays the start location start time start coordinate total distance duration finish location finish time finish coordinate and the number of readings for the selected log Log files have gpl extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs GPSLogs directory 5 Click Open 212 6 Using GPS Click the Play button Fh to begin playing back your log OR Drag the slider in the Progress Bar see graphic at the end of this topic to the point in the log you want to play Note Playing back a log file defaults to 1x which occurs in real time and takes the same amount of time as the original trip did for example if your trip took six hours the on screen tracking process also takes six hours You can also e From the Playback Speed drop down list select an option 2x 5x 10x 25x or 50x to increase the tracking speed accordingly e Click the Pause button H to pause the tracking of the log file The Pause button turns blue to indicate the file is paused Click the Play button to continue playing back the file e Click the Stop button E to stop the play back To start the file over click the Play button again e Click and hold the Rewind button to rewind the log file to a particular point e Click and hold the Forward button bP to fast forward the log file to a particular point e Drag the slider in the Progress Bar to view a particular poin
270. o To A yellow MapTag displays at the location if the MapTags check box is selected Tip Single click an item in the results list if you want to highlight it on the map without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view For more information on viewing results see Tips on Viewing Search Results Not Successful The Advanced dialog area displays The program makes its best guess about the type of search you were trying and your search word s display in the upper right text box Click Search to proceed For more information see Performing an Advanced Search Use a comma to separate city and state Atlanta Georgia major point of interest and state Mt Washington NH parts of an address 444 E Pk Drive Milford CT or 444 E Pk Dr 06460 or coordinate points N 43 8 W 70 2 Tip You can find major landmarks or points of interest such as Yellowstone 101 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide National Park and Mount Rushmore without using the state as part of the search criteria Separate street intersections with an ampersand Congress St amp High St Portland ME or Congress St amp High St 04101 Avoid entering a period in your text Click the Search For down arrow to view a drop down list of previously used search words and examples The Search For drop down list keeps a history of your successful search words during a session and between sessions To delete your search history select Clear History from the drop down
271. o a particular draw file select the Lock check box for that draw file in the draw file editing area 6 Click Save 7 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Note You can save new draw files any time For more information see Saving a Draw File 135 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Saving a Draw File After you finish adding draw objects to a draw file you can save them in a draw file that you can view or edit later Any time you edit a draw file click Save to save your changes To Save a New Draw File Use the following steps to save a draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Add objects to the map Note For more information see topics under the Draw Objects Line Objects Area Objects and Point Objects books in this Help system 3 Click File Click Save Draw files are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Draw directory with anl extensions 5 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Deleting a Draw File You can delete a draw file you just created or one you previously saved To Delete a Draw File Use the following steps to delete a draw file from the current project 1 Open the existing project that contains the draw file you want to delete 2 Click the Draw tab 3 Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type for example all road layers are grouped together in th
272. o not want to print all the pages in a multi page map from printing page map click each page you do not want to print on the Layout graphic Draw Create a route using a When you draw a routable road trail click each road or trail you have existing road it crosses to ensure that you can route added to the map with on the new road trail When you open a track you ve the Draw tab imported from your GPS device to join the imported line with existing lines right click each intersection and click Manage Draw Join GPS ityouwantto usem SSS View a GPS log on the Use the Draw tab to import a GPS log file and view it map as a line object on the map Route Reorder inserted stops Reorder your inserted route stops using the Advanced features in the Route tab 10 Getting Started Create a route quickly For quick route creation right click the map and select one of the Create Route options or use the Route buttons on the toolbar Reorder the columns in Click the Directions list column headers to change the Route Directions list the column order Determine the difference Added stops vias are placed in the order you add between adding and them to the route Inserted stops vias are placed in inserting stops and vias the order you would approach them between the Start and Finish points of the route View information about Click the Show Turns button when GPS tracking to your second turn view information about the
273. oard Shortcuts tab 2 Select the Search option 3 In the Commands text box begin typing the name of the command or command group you are searching for As you type the list box under the Commands text box displays word matches Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme The Reference Card option in the Keyboard Shortcuts tab lets you view a complete list of all of the scheme s shortcut keys To View a List of Shortcut Keys Use the following steps to view a list of shortcut keys for a scheme FE options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab 2 Select the scheme that contains the shortcut keys you want to view from the Scheme drop down list 3 Optional To sort the list view click the heading you want to sort by Group Command or Shortcut 4 Click Reference Card The list displays in your default Web browser and is sorted by the same column you selected in step 3 5 Optional Print the list from your Web browser Tips for printing a reference card from your Web browser e Use the Print Preview functionality in your Web browser to see if the list will display as you want it to If you do not like the way the list looks in the preview for example the list prints without grid lines in the table or does not print in color change the advanced print settings in your Web browser e If you want to remove the header and footer text from the printout from the File
274. ocedures and exercise steps Also used for information that you type exactly into a particular field Headings and table headings are bold for emphasis Italic Directory names and paths Also used when referring to titles of chapters sections and publications Blue underlined Links These links act differently depending on their text context When it is e Referenced with for more information the link goes to another topic Embedded in text such as in the example Open the file the link goes to another topic opens drop down text that expands within the same topic or displays a secondary window with a definition or graphic Red underlined Opens expanding text that provides explanatory text information The expanding text is italicized blue text Note A note or notes that provide additional information Notes A tip or tips that provide helpful hints oe 25 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide User Guide The User Guide includes the entire Help system contents modified for print in a portable document format pdf file When you access the guide Adobe Acrobat Reader launches The User Guide contains a table of contents and you can print it as a hard copy reference To access the User Guide click the Help button a T on the toolbar and then click User Guide in the menu to open the Technical Support website 26 Tutorials Tutorial Creating Maps for an Earthmate PN Series GPS How it Works When you create
275. of an address book contact Drag the contact to a different location on the map The Located status for that record in the Address Book dialog box changes to Manual Click the move address book entry icon again to resume normal map operations 115 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book Once you have successfully created an address book you can edit or delete the contact information at any time e The Address Book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e Your can resize and sort the columns inside the Address Book dialog box e You can also edit address book entries To Delete a Contact In Your Address Book Use the following steps to delete a contact in your address book 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box displays 3 Click to select the record you want to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click OK to confirm the deletion 6 Click Done Showing Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map Once you add contacts to your address book you can select to show or hide the contact information on the map To Show Hide Address Book Contacts on the Map Use the following steps to show hide address book contacts on the map 1 Click the Find tab 2 Select the Book check box to show address book contacts on the map and enable address book searching with the Find tab Route tab and toolbar OR Clear
276. olor coded data zoom level suggestions under Zoom Range 222 Using Handheld Devices e Green indicates the data zoom levels at which the data is best viewed The default values are set to only export data zoom levels that are in the green area e Red indicates zoom levels at which the data is available but not necessarily the best viewed Exported maps include only data that is selected in the handheld export preferences and is available for that region For example if you have aerial imagery of only Boston you cannot cut a map of New York City that includes aerial imagery Maps with multiple data types have large file sizes To decrease the file size when exporting multiple map data types try exporting raster data with small data zoom level ranges The following list provides the optimum data zoom level ranges for each raster data type o Draw Layers 1 17 All draw layers in the current project excluding waypoints and tracks Waypoints and tracks are sent to your device separately from maps Available only for Earthmate PN Series GPS devices o NOAA Nautical Charts varies Color bathymetric nautical charts produced by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA Downloaded using the NetLink tab o Satellite Imagery SAT10 9 11 True color 10 meter resolution imagery from the French based SPOT satellite Satellites d observation de la Terre o USGS Quads 3DTQ 12 14 Color contour topographi
277. ols above the left map window to adjust the zoom level of the 3 D map If you want to view billboards on your 3 D map select the Show Billboards check box Note If you receive a message saying that 3 D billboards cannot be displayed ensure that you have a 32 MB video card with the latest drivers and that it supports DirectX and transparencies To select the cursor graphic that you want to display on the 3 D map when GPS tracking select the symbol type from the GPS Tracking Cursor drop down list To select a vertical exaggeration value click one of the vertical exaggeration graphics from left to right they exaggerate the 3 D map 1x 2x 4x or 8x Click OK to accept the changes and close the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the changes and remain working in the Options dialog box Routing Creating a Route You can create a road trail or direct route in Topo USA 7 0 using the Route tab right click feature or the toolbar Once you create a route you can use the Route tab to view route directions edit a route and display routes on a map Routes are calculated using the default routing preferences To show remove routing MapNotes waypoint labels state borders and route vias or to change the default speed road type or routing preference see Setting Your Routing Preferences Important If you have only the left map window open the route start finish via and stop icons in the Route tab and on toolbar a
278. om the data drop down list 3 Click Hybrid Map All roads contours points text labels and so on display identically to the data that is displayed in the right map window Note The Hybrid Map button is unavailable when you select a vector dataset type Note You cannot create a route in the left map window Once you create a route in the right map window the route line displays in the left map window Changing the Map Colors When you use a laptop computer while traveling it can be difficult to see the map display on your screen This can be especially true at nighttime or on a bright sunny day Changing your default map colors to high contrast map colors can make your map display easier to see To Change the Map Colors Use the following steps to change the map display l AE Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar 2 Click the Display tab 3 From the Map Colors drop down list select High Contrast Colors to make the map display darker for improved in vehicle visibility Street Colors to emphasize streets and highways on the map or Topo Colors to emphasize contours parks and public lands land cover and so on 4 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box 72 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Changing the Map Magnification Level If you want to change the size of the map image but not change the degree of
279. on see Displaying Basic Map Features 73 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide This table shows the actions that may happen if you display major and minor POIs If you You will see You will see You will see You will see You will see view the the the the the large following following following following following symbols information information information information information at data at data at data at data at data at data ZOOM zoom level zoom level zoom level zoom level zoom level level 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 names and name of name of name of name of small the POI the POI the POI the POI square and the and the and the and the symbols large large large large symbol symbol symbol symbol small name of name of name of squares the POI the POI the POI only and a small and the and the square large large symbol symbol symbol small name of square the POI symbols and a small only square symbol small name of name of square the POI the POI symbols and a small and a small and some square square names of symbol symbol POIs Displaying Basic Map Features You can show or hide basic map features on your map You can also customize map features For more information see Customizing the Map Features Preferences Notes e If you cannot make changes to the basic preference check boxes verify the Use Custom Map Features check box is not selected e Click Use Defaults to change the map feature settings to t
280. on the map and in the Profile tab in your DeLorme program Before you begin you must download the GPS log file or track file and the data file Suunto sdf Timex Trainer CSV csv or Generic CSV File csv to your computer See Receiving a Track From Your Third party GPS Device for information on using the Exchange Wizard to transfer files To Tag Data 1 Click the GeoTagger button aj on the toolbar to open the GeoTagger Wizard 2 Select Data File and click Next 3 In the Data File Location box type the path and file name for the file OR Click Browse to search for the file on your computer 4 Under Time Zone select the time zone for your device If Daylight Saving Time was in effect second Sunday in March through first Sunday in November when you recorded the data select the Adjust for Daylight Saving Time check box 5 Under GPS Data select Track or GPL File 260 6 10 11 Using GeoTagger If you selected Track the list of track layers in the Draw tab displays in a tree menu Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu and click the track You can select only one track at a time If you selected GPL File in the GPS Data box type the path and file name for the file or click Browse to search for the file on your computer Click Next For Generic CSV Files only under Data File select the appropriate data type for each category from the drop down lists e The top row categories are the typ
281. on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to the default symbol name of symbol Click OK when finished If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image Is reduced If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Copying and Pasting You can copy and paste portions of a symbol or whole symbols to create new symbols or edit existing ones To Copy and Paste in XSym Use the following steps to copy a symbol or portions of a symbol to edit an existing symbol or to create a new symbol L 2 172 Click the Draw tab Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool UTE to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays Under Symbols in Set select a symbol from the symbol selection In the Draw Tool Box click the Select tool Select the area of the symbol you want to copy or select the whole symbol Ep and then click
282. oom level Exits View exits on primary limited access roads interstates and toll roads Available at data zoom level 10 0 or greater One Ways One ways display as bright green triangles on roads pointing toward the direction of travel most noticeable in large cities They are available at data zoom level 13 or greater 75 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Places Minor Places minor include smaller towns beginning at data zoom level 6 0 subdivisions 10 0 and locales small islands and natural landmarks such as a desert 11 0 Roads Minor View secondary roads at data zoom level 6 0 and greater View local and rural routes trails and foot trails at data zoom level 11 0 and greater Points of Interest e Majyor View many different points of interest including recreational areas public safety rest areas and more e Minor View general points of interest including educational technology government and religious buildings locations e Business Major View many different travel related points of interest including hospitals camping restaurants and more e Business Minor View general points of interest including Small shops and food stores laundromats and golfing ZI P Codes 2Z1 P Postal Code boundaries display at data zoom level 8 O and greater with ZIP Code labels displaying at data zoom level 10 0 and greater Town Borders View town borders at data zoom level 10 0 and greater for the foll
283. op computer and your GPS receiver you can display a bread crumb trail to track your progress as you travel DeLorme software interfaces with different GPS devices as outlined below e DeLorme GPS Devices Any DeLorme GPS will interface with a current DeLorme software release e USB GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a USB GPS if the device meets one of the following criteria e When the GPS ts attached to the computer it is recognized and displayed under Ports in the Microsoft Windows Device Manager e The unit is a Garmin USB device and the Garmin drivers are installed Note Magellan USB devices are not currently supported e Serial GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a serial GPS device The device must be connected to a free COM port and output a generic NMEA National Marine Electronics Association stream e Bluetooth GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a Bluetooth GPS device You must configure your Bluetooth software to create a virtual serial port Bring a passenger along to serve as GPS operator while you are driving a vehicle Safety Do not use this application with automatic navigation guidance Warnings systems or for any purpose requiring precise measurement of distance or direction Initializing GPS Before you can begin GPS tracking you must connect your GPS receiver to your laptop Select the correct GPS receiver and change location time
284. option area OR If you selected the Polygon tool click the map to enter each point of the polygon OR If you selected the Rectangle tool click the location for the rectangle s upper left corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width height and area for the rectangle Release as soon as you achieve the size you want 6 Click the Select tool A and then click the draw object on the map A box displays around the object indicating that it is active 7 Right click the draw object point to Manage Draw and click Route Avoid If the object has no name it the name Route Avoid is visible on the map 8 If you do not have the Auto Calculate option selected in the Route tab click the Route tab and then click Calculate to recalculate your route Note To undo your route avoid click the Select tool in the Draw tab and click the draw object on the map Then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Saving Route Directions as Text You can save your directions and along the way results as a text file To Save Your Route Directions Use the following steps to save your directions 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab If you do not have a route in this project the Route Options are unavailable 2 Select the route you want to save from the Name drop down list If the route you want to save is not available in the Name drop down list you may not have the correct project open 3 Under Options s
285. opy multiple draw objects click the Select tool A and then drag a box over the draw objects you want to copy 4 To copy press the CTRL C keys on your keyboard 5 To paste press CTRL V on your keyboard The newly copied object is placed directly on top of the original copied object 6 To move the copied object use the table below Aus Routable Road Routable Press and hold the SHIFT Trail Track Line Arc key on your keyboard Spline Polygon and drag the object to Rectangle Circle or the new location MapNote Symbol or Text Drag the object to the new location e To undo the move of the pasted draw object click the Undo button Bho undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button e f you undo the first move of the pasted object the object is placed back on top of the original copied object 148 Using the Draw Tools e To copy and move a single object select the draw object you want to copy press the CTRL key on your keyboard and drag the draw object to the new location e Ifthe item you copied does not successfully paste it may be because you clicked out of the map display To focus the cursor back on the map click inside the map display Then try pasting again Moving Draw Objects You can move any draw object you place on the map using the Draw tab from one location to another To Move Draw Objects Use the following steps to move draw objects 1
286. ou move If you are receiving signals from three satellites a 2 D fix your location displays as a yellow arrow If your GPS device is not receiving data the arrow is red Reposition your receiver to ensure you have a clear pathway to the sky E1 6 Click the Show More Turns button to view information for the turn after the following turn 7 Click Show List to return to the Directions dialog area To Stop GPS Tracking To stop GPS tracking click the GPS tab and then click Stop GPS or click the GPS button G on the toolbar Getting Back on Track When Off Course To automatically recalculate your route when off course select the Auto check box next to the Back on Track button in the Route tab If you do not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off track clear the Auto check box and click the Back on Track button to manually recalculate the route Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking When using this DeLorme application with a GPS receiver to track a route your map automatically pans and redraws as you travel always indicating your position on the map when Center on GPS is activated To Pan the Map Automatically The following procedure demonstrates how the check box and button work together to automatically pan the map 211 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide fie Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the GPS Settings tab OR Click the GPS tab to open it and
287. our finish location in the Finish drop down text box You can type in the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address Notes An address must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Code 193 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names 5 Select a calculation method the program adjusts the default calculation values based on your selection Driving Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a vehicle Cycling Use this method to calculate a bicycle route Walking running Use this method to calculate routes when you are on foot 6 Select a route type Road Shortest Road Quickest Trail or Direct from the drop down list 7 If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed a dialog box displays with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select it and then click OK 8 Click Directions to view the route directions AND OR Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options AND OR Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Create a Route Using the Right click Function Use the following steps to
288. out graphic itself and you do not want to print all the pages in the multipage map click the page or pages you do not want to print The page appears dimmed or gray You can click a dimmed gray page again to print it Note In the example below page 4 will not print for the 2 x 2 map B C Optional Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to print To change the photo zoom select an option from the Photo Zoom drop down list or type the photo zoom in the text box Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges or reduces the map features and changes the map print area If you increase the photo zoom level map text lines symbols etc display larger and your map print area is reduced If you decrease the photo 119 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide zoom level map text lines symbols etc display smaller and your map print area is enlarged The reduction enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo Zoom drop down list d Optional If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current print area or other settings select the Lock Print Center check box Selecting this check box locks the print area and changes the tab label to red e Optional Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the entire print area Clear the check box to return to your previous data zoom level 7 Optional Add text or graphics to your map 8 To change printers or make choices for transp
289. oves to the entered location If you change the distance and bearing numbers the object moves in relationship to the object s last location Type new coordinates and click Apply to move individual end points small red circles in line segments in routable roads lines splines polygons rectangles and arcs If you change the distance and bearing numbers of the individual points not recommended for rectangles the end point s distance and bearing angle change in relationship to the start point of the segment Renaming a Draw Object Once you create a draw object you can rename it in the draw file list To Rename a Draw Object Use the following steps to rename a draw object L 2 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area All the files you have created display in a table A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map Click to select the file that includes the draw object you want to rename Click More The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is selected Right click the draw object and select Rename OR Click within the file name cell once Then click it again do not double click The file name area activates Type the file name and press the ENTER key on your keyboard Deleting Draw Objects Once you place a draw object on a draw file you can delete the object You can
290. owing states Arkansas Louisiana Mississippi North Vermont Connecticut Maine Missouri Carolina Virginia Illinois Maryland Nebraska North Washington Indiana Massachusetts New Darot DC lowa Michigan Hampshire Ohio West Kanas Minnesota New Pennsylvania Virginia Jersey Rhode Wisconsin New York Island South Dakota County Borders View shaded outlines of U S counties at data zoom levels 7 0 or greater I nternational Labels View country labels at data zoom levels 1 0 through 4 0 Urban Area Color Displays a shaded map area in populated regions 3 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box 76 Customizing the Map and Tab Display Customizing the Map Feature Preferences You can change the display of a wide variety of map features so you can customize your map to meet your specific needs You can even customize which POIs display To Set Custom Map Features This is an advanced feature that lets you create a specific custom set of map features for your map display from hundreds of options Note that changes are not visible until you click the Done button L 2 3 s fe Options Click the Options button on the toolbar Click the Map Features tab Select the Use Custom Map Features check box and then click Customize Features to display the custom options Note Custom map feature selections override select
291. ox displays Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination C DeLorme Docs Export Select Text File from the Save as Type drop down list Type a name for the file in the File name text box The default name is root name of the layer Select the datum and coordinate format for the text file Click Save 10 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area Exporting Track Data Files to Text Files You can export track files containing athletic data as text files Tracks with athletic data exported to text files contain the data from the device such as speed heart rate etc To Export Track Data Files to Text Files Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file 1 2 8 9 Click the Draw tab Click File to open the draw file editing area A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map The Active column shows the active layers From the file list click the track file to export Click Export The Export Draw File dialog box displays Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination C DeLorme Docs Export Select Channel Data Text File from the Save as Type drop down list Type a name for the file in the File name text box The default name is root name of the layer Select the datum and coordinate format for the text file Click Save 10 Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area 138 Using the Draw
292. ox to the left of the Scale Bar style options and then select the Scale Bar style 123 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide AND OR Select the Scale check box to display the current scale on the map AND OR Select the Scale Reference Length check box to display the scale reference length on the map AND OR Select the Zoom check box to display the current data zoom level on the map Click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic Once you place the Scale Bar on the map you can resize it by dragging any of the white boxes on the corners sides of the graphic To Add an I mage to Your Map Use the following steps to add an image to your map L 2 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the I mage tool Click the location on the map where you want to add your image The Select Image File dialog box displays You can reposition the image at any time by dragging it to the new position Select an image file jpg omp or gif to place on your map and then click Open The image displays on the map and the file name displays in the text box next to the Image tool under Layout Tools You can update the image at any time by clicking the Browse button p and browsing to an alternative image Select the
293. ox warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is reduced If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view are mirrored in the other view Using the Draw Tools Removing a Symbol You can remove a symbol from the default symbol set or from any other symbol set you have created To Remove a Symbol Use the following steps to remove a symbol from a symbol set 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool uT H to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays 5 Select the symbol to remove from the symbol selection The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Click Remove The symbol disappears from the symbol selection under Symbols in Set and the next symbol within the selection displays in the Symbol Editing Grid 7 Click OK when finished Symbol Editing Tools Draw Tool Box DeLorme XSym has a Draw Tool Box that lets you create and edit symbols within the Symbol Editing Grid independently of the De
294. p Packages 6 Inthe right pane of the dialog box under Map Packages click Internal Memory or SD Card 7 Click Send A progress bar indicates the copy status 35 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 8 Click Done 9 On your Earthmate PN 40 press ENTER to return to GPS use Notes e To insert an SD card into your Earthmate PN 40 remove the battery cover and batteries and then gently press down on the SD card latch within the battery compartment to open the slot Insert the SD card and press the Slot down to close it The device automatically detects the maps on the SD card once it is powered on You can transfer maps using the Data Transfer option on the device s Connect to Computer screen and then selecting the device in the Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box however transfer will be slow as the device is not being used as an external drive If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device go to the Device Setup gt Connect to Computer menu and select the option you want from the USB Setting drop down list You can also use an SD card and an SD card reader instead of an SD card in the device You do not have to connect your device to your computer Just insert the SD card reader into your computer and in the Exchange dialog choose that drive to transfer your map to See also Creating a Map Package and Sending Receiving Maps Tutorial Exchanging Data with an Earthmate PN Series GPS Use the Earthmat
295. packaged into a single file called a transfer file to facilitate e mailing or copying You can create a transfer file with or without hyperlinked file attachments When you create a transfer file with hyperlinked files you have the option of saving the common directory structure of the hyperlinked files Saving the directory structure of common files can be helpful when you are sharing and updating transfer files Note Transfer files do not include map data To Create a Transfer File Use the following steps to create a transfer file in Topo USA 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Open the project you want to create as a transfer file 3 Click File click Transfer and then click Create The Create Transfer File dialog box displays 4 In the File Name text box type the file name Transfer files have dmt extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Projects directory 5 Click Create Your file is created and saved in the specified location To Maintain the Directory Structure When Creating a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files When you create a transfer file containing hyperlinked files you can select to maintain part of the directory structure for files with at least a common drive location Use the following steps to create a transfer file with hyperlinked files 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Open the project you want to create as a transfer file 3 Click File click Transfer and then click Create The following
296. pe the location where you want to end your route in the Finish text box next to the red Finish button OR Click the red Finish button and then click the location on the map where you want to end your route OR Select an address book entry or your current GPS position from the Finish drop down list 3 Optional If you want to add a stop to your route click the Stop button Y and then click the location on the map where you want to add or insert the stop Repeat this step for each stop or via you want to add to your route Note Ifthe Add option is selected in the Route tab stops are added in the order they are added to the route If the Insert option is selected in the Route tab stops are added in the order they are approached in the route For more information see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias 4 Click the Calculate button G0 Important If you have only the left map window open the route Start Finish and Stop buttons on the toolbar and on the Route tab are grayed out To activate the options use the map resize tool to expose the right map window 64 Using the Toolbar Note To use the current GPS location in a route you must connect your device to your computer and click the Start GPS button on the toolbar or on the GPS tab Tip Once a route is calculated you can use the subtabs in the Route tab to view route directions edit a route and more Click the Directions subtab to view the route directions the Advanced sub
297. play in the profile toolbar The scale for the currently followed data type displays to the right of the profile graph 2 To change the default data type color 3 To anew color on the toolbar click the arrow next to the data type click Choose Color and select a new color in the color dialog box OR 4 To the default color on the toolbar click the arrow next to the data type and click Use Default Color 187 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 188 Viewing Your Map in 3 D Viewing a 3 D Map On the 3 D tab you can view your map data in 3 D and change the look of your 3 D map using the tools on the tab or keyboard shortcuts Notes e You can view 3 D maps only in the left map window however you can expand the left map window to fit the entire map area For more information see Resizing the Map and Tab Areas e You can customize how a 3 D map displays with the 3 D tab in the Options dialog box For more information see Setting Your 3 D Map Preferences e The 3 D Navigation keyboard shortcut scheme was created especially for 3 D use When you select the scheme you can use keyboard shortcuts to perform all of the same functions that you can complete on the 3 D tab For more information see Flying Over a 3 D Map e f the 3 D tab does not work properly it may be because you have turned off hardware acceleration in your display settings To check you hardware acceleration status view the Advanced Display Settings in t
298. plays the profile statistics and user data see Statistical Data and User Profile Data for more information To Profile Multiple Linear Objects e To profile multiple linear objects press the SHIFT key on the keyboard while clicking the items you want to profile Thin vertical dashed lines display in the Profile graph indicating the beginning and end of each chosen segment e To make it easier to profile multiple linear objects use the Draw tab to join them e To clear one of the multiple objects you have profiled press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking the profiled object on the map Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs The Profile tab lets you view two profile elevation graphs the profile graph and the overview profile graph To View the Profile Graph Latitude N4 23 46 Longitude W707 51 600 Barkers Brook Elev 1 022 0 ft Grade 6 The profile graph automatically displays when you select an object to profile It Shows a two dimensional image of the elevation associated with the selected object Distance and elevation are indicated below and to the left of the graph respectively Use the following steps to view a profile graph 1 Create a profile of an object or route For more information see Creating a Profile 2 Move your cursor along the elevation profile in the profile graph e The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top of the terrain profile These lines in
299. point to Topo USA 7 0 and then click Tab Manager Clear the check box next to each tab you want to hide in the program OR Click Minimum Only the required tabs will display in the program Note Find Map Files Info and NetLink are required tabs and cannot be hidden Click OK Exit Topo USA 7 0 Open Topo USA 7 0 I mporting Exporting Tab Manager Preferences Tab Manager includes a feature that allows you to share your custom tab manager preferences with other DeLorme users To Import Tab Manager Preferences Use the following steps to import another user s Tab Manager preferences 1 If your application is open click the Help button B T on the toolbar and select Tab Manager from the Help menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to your application and then click Tab Manager Click File and then click Import The Import Tab Configuration dialog box displays 81 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 3 Browse to the location of the configuration preferences file select it and then click Open Tab Manager displays with the preferences saved in the imported configuration file 4 Click OK to close Tab Manager 5 Exit your application 6 Open your application To Export Tab Manager Preferences Use the following steps to export your Tab Manager preferences as a configuration file 1 If your application is open click the Help button T on the toolbar and select Tab Manage
300. port Tip You can show or hide the tabs change the order of the tabs and import or export tab manager preferences 20 Getting Started Control Panel The Control Panel located to the right of the map view displays information pertinent to the current map view and map cursor position It also includes zoom and map pan buttons Data Zoom Level The current data zoom level of the map view ranges between 1 0 maximum zoom out and 17 0 maximum zoom in Zoom Tools Buttons that quickly zoom out three levels out one level or in one level For more information see Zooming In and Out Compass Rose A group of nine buttons on a globe The outer buttons have yellow arrows click one of the arrow buttons to pan the map in that direction Click the middle button to center the map on the previous map view This button performs an undo function for the last pan or zoom up to 256 times Map Rotation Tool The arrow in the graphic indicates True North in relation to the rotated map Use the Map Rotation Tool to rotate the map in any direction You can rotate the map by clicking or dragging the square map graphic in the direction you want or by selecting typing the degree of map rotation from the drop down list Map Coordinates Coordinates for the current map cursor position display based on the units of measurement preferences chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box Elevation and I nterval Display in the measure
301. r Created when you add a routable trail to the map WaypointLayer Created when you add a waypoint to the map TrackLayer Created when you add a track to the map A draw file is automatically created when you add a draw object to the map and there are no draw files of that type included in or contained in the current project You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area To Create a New Draw File Use the following steps to create a new draw file 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click File to open the draw file editing area A selected check box next to the draw file s name in the file list indicates the file is displaying on the map Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type For example all roadlayer files are grouped together in the list all drawlayer files are grouped together and so on 3 Click New and then click Draw Road Trail Waypoint or Track The new file is now the active draw file Each draw file type has an active file 4 Optional If you want to rename the draw file Right click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename in the Shortcut menu Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard OR Click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again do not double click Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard 5 Optional If you want to ensure no changes are made t
302. r Inset Charts x NOAA Harbor Charts M xI NOAA Coast Charts B 4a x Satellite Imagery 54710 x Topo USA 7 0 Data Series Make sure DeLorme Earthmate is selected under Export Map Format Select the check boxes next to the data types to include in your custom map package Only map data types connected to Topo USA are listed Optional Modify the zoom levels for displaying the data on the device by adjusting the gray sliders The gray blocks represent the zoom levels at which data displays in Topo USA You cannot modify these zoom levels The green bars represent zoom levels where the data performs best The red bars represent zoom levels where the data may have a poor appearance and draw slowly on the device For more information see Setting Your Handheld Export Preferences Step 3 Find the location you want to include in your map 1 2 Click the Handheld Export tab Select the size of the grid for your map from the Grid Size list See Grid Size Comparisons for more information Type the location in the Search for and select a location text box The list below the text box shows the closest matches In the list click the location you want and then click Preview to see it on the map The default export area for that location is defined with Shaded 29 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide ed E i R jy a ere a F AN i J x er TN a l zih i Pr or ja Ltr E n as 3 l
303. r from the Help menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to your application and then click Tab Manager 2 Click File and then click Export The Export Tab Configuration dialog box displays 3 Type a name for the configuration preferences file in the File Name text box and then click Save Configuration files are saved in the C DeLorme Docs Configuration directory by default 4 Click OK to close Tab Manager Reordering the Tabs The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by reordering tabs You can access Tab Manager e During installation e After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Help menu e From the Start menu Point to Programs point to DeLorme point to Topo USA 7 0 and then click Tab Manager Note If you use Tab Manager while the program is open you must exit and restart the program to view the tab changes To Reorder the Tabs Use the following steps to reorder the tabs with Tab Manager 1 Open Topo USA click the Help button T on the toolbar and select Tab Manager from the Help menu OR From the Start menu point to Programs point to DeLorme point to Topo USA 7 0 and then click Tab Manager 2 Select the tab you want to reorder E 3 Click the up arrow or the down arrow to move the tab to the new position 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each tab you want to reorder 82 N Customizing the Map and Tab Display Optional Click
304. r pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement taken Note When you pass over a point in a road measurement line or measurement area to which you can snap a yellow circle defines the snap point Click to snap the point of the measure line to the road or measurement object s point coordinate 4 To end a measurement line double click the last point of the measurement line OR Click the last point of your measure line or area and then click the Measure tool on the toolbar The measure line is a two pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line is displayed in a label at each endpoint of the line 5 To end a measure area hover over the starting point until the yellow snap circle amp displays and then double click the last point to the starting point The closure area Is transparently shaded and the area and perimeter measurements display 17 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats These are the supported formats for latitude longitude UTM UPS MGRS USNG and SPCS searches Sample coordinates are for Yarmouth Maine Tip Examples of search formats are listed in the Advanced search drop down text boxes along with a history of your most current search criteria Coordinate Advanced Search Format Latitude Longit N 43 48 30 W70952 N N4348 30 W70952 0 48 30 W70 9 52 N 43 48 30 W70 9 52 da N 43 48 4910 W 070 N 43 48 4910 W 070 09 8440 09 8440 N434829 4600 N434829 4
305. r sale any part of the System or output of the System alone or in combination with any other text data software or graphic matter No Interactive Use You do not have the right to combine the System interactively with the operation of other software unless licensed to do so by DeLorme 280 Legal Information No Modifications or Decompilation Except through use of any software modification functions provided with the System you have no right to modify the System in any way incorporate any part or product of it into a compilation or create any derivative work You may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise access source code or the logical structure and contents of the System database No Third Party Service Bureau Use Except as specifically provided in this Agreement you may not a permit any third party to use the System or transfer disclose or otherwise make available the System to any third party b use the System in the operation of a service bureau or c allow access to the System through terminals located outside your premises You agree to secure and protect the System in a manner consistent with the maintenance of DeLorme s rights therein and to take appropriate action by instruction or agreement with your employees who are permitted access to the System to satisfy your obligations hereunder No Copies The copying of the System any portion of the System or any of the printed materials accompanying t
306. re Tips Routing e Zoom in to set accurate points for your route e Use the right click feature for routing J ust right click the route stop or via point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and click the applicable option To Edit a Route To edit a route click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab Select the route from the Name drop down list box The route becomes active The following list describes the edit functions To change the route name select the name in the Name text box type the new route name and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard To change a route point click the corresponding tool and then click the new spot on the map OR Select a route point on the map and drag it to the new location on the map To add or insert a stop or via to your route click the corresponding tool and then click the spot on the map where you want to add or insert your stop or via For more information see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias Note If you try to add a start or finish point to an existing route the Would you like to move your Start location or create a New route message opens Click New to begin creating a new route Click Move to move the Start or Finish point to the last location clicked To rearrange stops and vias click the point to select it and then click the Move Up Move Down tools to relocate it in the route To delete a stop or via select the stop or via in the route list an
307. re displayed only if that project is currently displaying For example if DrawLayer27 is created in a project named Yarmouth Zoom 14 only DrawLayer27 does not display if a project named Old Port is currently displaying e Routable roads and routable trails are not tied to a project they do not change even when a project is changed What Are Draw Objects Draw objects are those objects you add to a draw file with the tools provided in the Draw tab Draw objects consist of line area or point objects You can copy move delete and add draw objects to other draw files and add them to another project e Line objects are those objects consisting of line segments and points such as 131 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide e Routable Roads e Routable Trails e Tracks e Lines e Arcs e Splines e Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects such as e Polygons e Rectangles e Circles e Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to either a waypoint symbol MapNote image or text label The anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed Draw objects added to a draw file contain points that give the object its shape or allow you to snap one object to another object Points display and act in different ways within the various draw objects Click a link below to view additional informatio
308. re grayed out To activate the options use the map resize tool to expose the right map window See also the Creating a Route tutorial To Create a Route Using the Route Tab Use the following steps to create a route 1 Click the Route tab and then click New Edit if it is not already selected 2 Click File click New and then type the name for your route in the Name text box 3 Click the Start tool Q and then click the point on the map where you want to begin your route OR To use an address book entry as your start location select Start From Address Book from the Start drop down list click to select an Address Book entry and then click OK OR To use your current GPS position as your start location select Start From GPS Location from the Start drop down list OR Type your start location in the Start drop down text box You can type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address Notes An address must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names 4 Click the Finish tool and then click the spot on the map where you want to end your route OR To use an address book entry as your finish location select Finish From Address Book from the Finish drop down list click to select an Address Book entry and then click OK OR Type y
309. ress Book entry and then click OK e To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop down list OR Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop down list e Type the stop location in the Stop or Via text box Type the name of an address book contact user added waypoint or address If you type an address it must be in one of the following formats street address city state OR street address ZIP Code The Book check box underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab must be selected to search for address book contact names 195 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 2 e Right click the map where you want to add the stop or via Point to CreateRoute in the shortcut menu and then click Add Stop or Add Via You can also select Add as Last Stop or Add as Last Via e Use the toolbar to add a Stop If the Auto check box is not selected click Calculate to recalculate your route to include the stop or via OR Click the Calculate button Go on the toolbar OR If the Auto check box is not selected right click the route point to Manage Route in the shortcut menu and click Calculate Road Quickest or Calculate Road Shortest Note Ifthe program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you entered a dialog box displays with a list of the closest matches Scroll through the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate click the item to select
310. rests and so on The Map Legend provides examples and descriptions of the map features To view the Map Legend click the Help button a T on the toolbar and click Map Legend e What is the difference between a stop and a via When routing in Topo USA you have the option of adding inserting stops or vias in the route A stop is a location in a route where you want to stop and then proceed from A via is a location on the map that you want the route to use For example if you create a route between Portland Maine and Yarmouth Maine with no stops or vias the route directions will tell you to take 1 295 However if you want to take US Route 1 instead you can place vias in the route on US Route 1 to force the route to go by way of US Route 1 If you plan on stopping in Falmouth Foreside for lunch you will want your route directions to reflect that stop When you add a stop you can recalculate to include it This map shows the area between Portland Maine and Yarmouth Maine with two vias and one stop Getting Started F Cumberland Center cumberland Foreside ni1 DUS 1 1 0 Falmouth Foreside a al mouth A Ema rth Marla What s the difference between adding and inserting a stop or via The Insert Stop Via function arranges stops vias geographically in the route The Add Stop Via function adds stops vias in the order you add them to the route Why did my route fail to calculate Your ro
311. routes the route will be converted to a direct route if you choose to recalculate If you do not want to change the shape of your trail route be sure to answer No when asked if you would like to recalculate the route See also the Exchanging PN Series Data Creating a Route and Converting Tracks into Trails tutorials To Send Routes Topo USA 7 0 supports multiple calculation types including Road Quickest Road Shortest Direct and Trail Earthmate PN Series GPS supports Road Quickest and Direct routes If you create a Road Shortest or Trail route in Topo USA you can send it to the Earthmate GPS PN 20 and it will display on the device s map the same as it did in Topo USA however the calculation method will display as Road for Road Shortest routes or Direct for trail routes in the route details on the device Use the following steps to send routes to your Earthmate GPS PN 20 1 Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar 2 Select Earthmate GPS PN 20 from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 In the left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Routes and then click the route you want to send to the Earthmate GPS PN 20 OR To send all routes just click Routes 4 Click Send The route is sent to the device and a progress bar indicates the copy status 5 Click Done To Receive Routes Use the following steps to receive routes from your Earthmate GPS PN 20 1 Click th
312. rt of the base map display and cannot be changed This explains why certain levels on the tree remain unavailable appear dimmed or gray Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box 71 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Notes e When you save the current project the following feature preferences are saved in reference to map features o Major map features preferences o Individual custom feature preferences o When you create a new project the current map settings are used Click Use Defaults to return to the default settings Changing the Contour Details Preferences Contour detail preferences affect how contours display on the map To Set the Contour Detail Preferences Use the following steps to change the contour preferences fie Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar 2 Click the Display tab 3 Under Appearance select the contour detail from the Contours drop down list e Normal Detail Uses the default values for displaying contours and labels e High Detail Approximately doubles the default values for displaying contours and labels e Low Detail Approximately halves the default values for displaying contours and labels 3 Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box Setting Units of Measur
313. rt the waypoint file into the mapping application Then use one of the two methods below to learn the waypoint ID o Open the symbol set that holds the waypoint and view the waypoint s ID number in XSym o Click the Info tool on the toolbar and click the symbol on the map The waypoint ID displays in the Info tab To Assign a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol Use the following steps to assign a waypoint ID to a custom symbol 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Waypoint Track tool i to view its hidden options Select the Waypoint tool EA 3 Under Symbols select lt New gt from the drop down list The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays 4 Under Symbol Set Name type the name for your new symbol set such as Garmin Waypoint Symbols or Magellan Waypoint Symbols Note The default name for a new symbol set is CustomSymbolSet 5 Paste the third party GPS device s waypoint symbol into XSym 6 Use the transparency option to make the area behind the symbol transparent 7 Type the waypoint identification number for the symbol in the Waypoint ID text box 8 For each additional symbol click New and then repeat steps 5 7 9 Click OK when finished 169 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Editing a Symbol With DeLorme XSym you can edit an existing symbol in a symbol set dim file and Save the change or save it aS a new symbol to be added to another symbol set You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help
314. rthmate PN 40 You can use Topo USA to exchange tracks with the DeLorme Earthmate PN 40 GPS Notes e To rename delete or send receive a track right click the item in the Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option You can also delete a track by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete button If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device go to the Device Setup gt Connect to Computer menu and select the option you want from the USB Setting drop down list See also the Exchanging PN Series Data and Converting Tracks into Trails tutorials 231 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Send Tracks Use the following steps to send tracks to your Earthmate PN 40 GPS 1 6 Connect the Earthmate PN 40 to your computer with the USB cable and power it on The Connect to Computer screen appears On the device highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER In Topo USA click the Exchange button i on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens In the left pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Track Layers and then click the track layer or contents you want to send to the Earthmate PN 40O OR To send all tracks just click Track Layers Note You cannot replace an existing track on the Earthmate PN 40 GPS if the track details page for that track is displaying on the device Click Send A progress bar indicates the copy status Click Done To Receive Tracks
315. rview map is no longer exposed Click the left arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase the width of the overview map You can repeat this step until the tab area is no longer exposed Double click the bar above the right arrow to show only the tab area Double click the bar below the left arrow to show only the overview map Double click the bar between the right and left arrows to return the tab and overview maps to their default views Customizing the Map and Tab Display Viewing Two Maps Simultaneously Split window functionality lets you view two maps at the same time You can access the left map using the map resize tool that runs perpendicular to the tab area If the left and right maps are both displaying the resize tool will be the bar that separates them When the bar is moved all the way to the left of the map only the right map will display When the bar is moved all the way to the right of the map only the left map will display For more information on using the map resize tool see Resizing the Map and Tab Areas Accessing Data Collections When the left map window is activated a bar displays on the top of the left map see graphic below This bar displays two drop down lists one for swapping data and one for changing the map from 2 D to 3 D and vice versa You can also show hybrid maps and use zoom tools that work specifically with the left map window All of the Topo USA compatible data colle
316. s Magnify Map Automatically magnifies the map view to the specified magnification 125 150 175 or 200 Recenter Map on GPS Automatically centers the map on the GPS Rotate Map in GPS Direction Automatically rotates the 2 D 3 D map in the direction of travel Direction of travel always displays as the top of the screen regardless of compass direction Automatically Detect GPS Automatically sets up your GPS connection Suggestion If your GPS receiver has a USB cable select Automatically Detect GPS to ensure the correct COM port is detected for your device and that a connection can be made Enable WAAS Use This option is only available only when Earthmate is the selected device See step 4A Enables WAAS use This option is selected by default Enable LED on GPS Device This option is only available only when Earthmate is the selected device see step 4A Turns on the LED on the Earthmate When the check box is cleared the LED on the Earthmate does not display This option is selected by default Use the following procedures to manually configure your GPS connection Click a procedure to view the step by step directions 208 Select the correct GPS device Use the steps below to select the correct GPS receiver and settings 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your user manual and then turn the receiver on if necessary Heo tion 2 Click the Options bu
317. s You can use MapShare to share maps routes or profiles with non Topo USA users For more information see To Share Maps Creating and Deleting Projects You can create various map views and Save each in a different project To Create a New Project Use the following steps to create a new project 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click File and then click New OR Click the New File button L on the toolbar 3 Click the Save button z on the toolbar Projects have tpx extensions and are saved by default in the C DeLorme Docs Projects directory OR Click File and then click Save As to give the project a name other than the default 93 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide To Delete a Project Use the following steps to delete a project 1 2 a Open a project From the Map Files tab click File point to Current View and click File Info Browse to the file location on your computer specified under Directory in the Map Files tab area Select the file From your computer s File menu select Delete Click Yes at the Delete File confirmation message Opening an Existing Project You can create various map views and save each in a different project You are able to view your projects by opening them one at a time To Open a Project Use the following steps to open a project L 2 Click the Map Files tab Click File and then click Open OR Click the Open button fe on the tab Double click the project
318. s selected for export are shaded red Note Click the Clear All button EH Clear All to clear the highlighted grids from the map Type a name for your map package in the Save your map for Exchange box Click Save A Send the map package to your Earthmate PN 40 Earthmate PN 20 Palm OS or Pocket PC PDA Your saved map packages display in the Saved Map Packages list To view a previously exported map select it from the Saved Map Packages list and then click View A View To delete a previously exported map select it from the Saved Map Packages list and then click Delete X Deet Program performance issues may arise if you try to export a map that covers a very large area If you experience a performance issue decrease the size of 221 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide the map If the map does not cover the area you need export several smaller maps until they cover the entire area you need Setting Your Handheld Export Preferences You can customize your map export options so that you export exactly the map data types and data zoom level ranges you want to view on your PDA or Earthmate PN Series GPS You must have Street Atlas USA Handheld installed to view exported maps on a PDA To Set Your Handheld Export Preferences Use the following steps to customize your map cutting preferences fie Options 1 Click the Options button on the toolbar and then click the Handheld tab OR Click the Options button on th
319. s a toggle button If the button is not activated any text placed on the map is placed in a default sized text box You can resize the default size text box by selecting the text box on the map and dragging any of the white boxes on the corners sides of text box To Add a North Arrow to Your Map Use the following steps to add a North arrow to your map l 2 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the North Arrow tool ER All of the North Arrow styles display to the right Select the North Arrow style and then click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic Once you place the North Arrow on the map you can resize it by dragging any of the white boxes on the corners sides of the graphic Reposition the North Arrow at any time by dragging the graphic to the new position To Add a Scale Bar to Your Map Use the following steps to add a scale bar to your map 1 2 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab Select your Map and Print Layout options For more information see Printing a Map Under Layout Tools click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the hidden text and graphic tools Click the Scale Bar tool aj All of the Scale Bar styles display to the right Select the check b
320. s are not currently supported e Serial GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a serial GPS device The device must be connected to a free COM port and output a generic NMEA National Marine Electronics Association stream e Bluetooth GPS Support DeLorme software can use the data output from a Bluetooth GPS device You must configure your Bluetooth software to create a virtual serial port How do import files from an earlier version of Topo USA into this version Use the Map Files tab to import projects routes and draw files from many other DeLorme mapping programs To Open A Project 1 Click the Map Files tab 2 Click File and then click Open 3 Select the project you want to view and then click Open 4 Click OK To Import a Route 5 Click the Map Files tab 6 Click Add and then click Route Files The Add Data to Maps dialog box displays 7 Browse to the desired file select it and then click Add The route is added to the current project To Import a Draw File 8 Click the Map Files tab 9 Click Add and then click Draw Files The Add Data to Maps dialog box displays Getting Started 10 Browse to the desired file select it and then click Add The draw file is added to the current project How do find a specific location Use Topo USA s powerful search tools to locate any place in the United States In addition you can search for places along your route within a certain radi
321. s at all magnification levels for use on an Earthmate PN Series GPS device cutting maps from the desktop no longer required Note Topo USA 7 0 uses a new file format for Earthmate PN Series GPS devices to improve Find and map cutting accuracy You will need to re cut map packages you created in Topo USA 6 0 with Topo USA 7 0 to ensure routing integrity as well as to access new POIs and data described above You can refine your route by choosing the type of route you are creating for driving cycling or hiking includes appropriate speed and time settings Supports popular wrist athletic devices from Timex Garmin and Suunto Download tracks and see your heart rate information and other data points on the track and in the Profile tab Note Some wrist computers include built in GPS and some require a separate GPS receiver such as an Earthmate PN Series GPS device Includes improved Handheld Export tab that allows you to adjust grid sizes for sending information to an Earthmate PN Series GPS Includes option to sort columns of data in the File area of the Draw tab Also includes ability to import comments from a gpx file to the Draw tab Comments column edit column text and transfer text to an Earthmate PN Series GPS device Supports the Windows Vista operating system including recent model Intel chipset personal computers Includes option to turn off data connections in the Map Files tab Includes improved Info t
322. s furnished to you or made by you including unauthorized copies Termination is in addition to and not in lieu of any other remedies available to DeLorme All provisions relating to property rights shall survive termination You are not authorized to transfer your rights under this Agreement OTHER This Agreement contains the complete understanding between the parties and Supersedes and replaces any prior or contemporaneous agreement or understanding whether oral or written with respect to its subject matter This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maine applicable to agreements wholly executed and wholly performed in Maine Any action relating to this Agreement shall be brought in federal or state court in Maine and the parties consent to the personal jurisdiction of either such court U S Government Rights in Commercial Software Use duplication or disclosure by the Government of all parts of the Licensed Data except any USGS data is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227 7202 1 a and 227 7202 3 a or DFARS 227 225 7013 OCT 1988 as applicable or FAR 12 212 a FAR 52 227 14 or FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Copyright 2008 DeLorme All rights reserved Apache Software License Version 1 1 Copyright 1999 2004 The Apache Software Foundation All rights reserved Redistribution and
323. s is the same data that is on the detailed data DVDs that came with your PN Series GPS If you installed the detailed data for the map you are creating clear the Topo USA 7 0 Data Series check box on the Handheld tab of the Options dialog box so you do not duplicate data in your map Creating a Map Package Step 1 Optional Download imagery for the area you want to include in your map package Your purchase of Topo USA 7 0 entitles you to free imagery and data downloads that you can view in Topo USA as well as on your Earthmate PN 40 GPS For more information see the Downloading Imagery tutorial Step 2 Modify your Handheld Export preferences Before you use the Handheld Export tab to create your map package ensure the handheld export preferences are set to include the datasets and zoom levels you want to include 32 Tutorials 1 Click the Options button on the Handheld Export tab to open the Handheld Options dialog box Draw Layers 4a 7 Color Aerial Imagery x Aerial Imagery DOQQ x USGS Quads 30TQ x NOAA Harbor Detailed Charts x NOAA Harbor Inset Charts NOAA Harbor Charts Ea xI NOAA Coast Charts B 4a x Satellite Imagery 54710 x Topo USA 7 0 Data Series 2 Make sure DeLorme Earthmate is selected under Export Map Format 3 Select the check boxes next to the data types to include in your custom map package Only map data types connected to Topo USA are li
324. s to place a circle rectangle or polygon on the map L 2 3 4 Click the Draw tab to open the Draw dialog area omo Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool and select the tool you want Select the circle fill outline and or width options To place a circle on the map enter the coordinates for the circle s center into the corresponding text boxes Then enter the radius for the circle into the radius text box OR To place a rectangle on the map select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option Enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the rectangle s upper left corner point into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box OR To place a polygon on the map select the Coordinate option or use the Distance and Bearing Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate option and enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the first polygon point into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box Click Apply Note If you are placing a polygon on the map repeat the procedure for the other points Waypoints Symbols MapNotes Text Labels and I mages Adding a Waypoint Symbol MapNote Text Label or I mage to the Map You can add point draw objects to a draw file in your current project Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to a waypoint symbol MapNote image or text
325. select any lines arcs or splines you want to join OR Click the Select tool A and drag a box around the linear objects you want to join Note When joining the preceding types of line objects you can mix and match lines arcs and splines The result is always a line However when you join multiple splines the resulting joined object is a spline 3 Right click point to Manage Draw and then click J oin Lines OR Join the lines by pressing CTRL J or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned for the joining function The selected lines are joined Note Any other objects selected during the multi select process are ignored To Break Use the following steps to break linear objects 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and select the line object you want to break e A box displays around the active line e The shape points used to create the line display as small magenta squares 3 Click the shape point where you want to break the line right click point to Manage Draw and then click Break Line OR Break the line by pressing CTRL B or the keyboard shortcut combination you assigned for the breaking function The line is broken into two segments at the designated point and you can edit each line separately Note It is important that you perform steps 2 and 3 consecutively If you pan the map use another tab and so on between steps you may need to repeat the steps again to break your linear object 160 U
326. sfer to SD Card if the map is on an SD card or Internal Memory if the map is stored in internal memory and then press ENTER When the Transfer Maps message appears your PN 40 is ready for transfer Set it aside In Topo USA click the Exchange button i on the toolbar The Earthmate PN Series Exchange dialog box opens If you are receiving maps from an SD card select the removable drive for example Removable Disk E Removable Disk from the drop down list in the upper right corner of the dialog box OR If you are receiving maps from internal memory select the internal memory 229 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide drive for example EM_USERMAPS E Removable Disk from the drop down list 5 Inthe right pane of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Saved Map Packages and click the map you want to receive into Topo USA OR To select all map packages just click Saved Map Packages 6 Click Receive A progress bar indicates the copy status 7 Click Done 8 On your Earthmate PN 40 press ENTER to return to GPS use Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button on the Handheld Export tab or the GPS tab Sending Receiving Routes to from an Earthmate PN 40 You can use Topo USA to exchange routes with the DeLorme Earthmate PN 40 GPS Notes e To rename delete or send receive a route right click the item in the Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option You can also d
327. sing the Draw Tools Circles Rectangles and Polygons Drawing a Circle Rectangle or Polygon on the Map You can add area objects circles rectangles and polygons to a draw file in your current project Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects e Use circles to designate circular map features e Use rectangles to designate land boundaries or any other rectangular map feature e Use polygons to designate water bodies land boundaries or any other irregular map feature Once you have created an area draw object you can edit including reshaping or changing line color or weight copy move or delete it at any time Note The best way to measure a large area on the map Is with the circle rectangle and polygon tools in the Draw tab When you draw an area object on the map the area displays next to the object on the map If you click off of the object you can view the area again by clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the area object on the map To Draw a Circle Rectangle or Polygon Use the following steps to add circles rectangles or polygons to the map 1 Click the Draw tab omo 2 Click and hold the Polygon Rectangle Circle tool to view its hidden options Select the tool you want 3 From the Fill drop down list select the fill style you want to apply to the area object 4 Click the fill color button to the right of the Fill drop down list to select
328. smi SNM SNM Ami 4NM 4NM 2mi 2NM 2NM lmi 1NM 1NM 224 Using Handheld Devices Grid Size Comparisons When you use the Handheld Export tab to export maps you can choose a grid size A grid of the same size gets progressively larger in coverage Square area the closer it is to the equator This is because the grid system is based on the latitude longitude coordinate system 60 seconds 1 minute 60 minutes 1 degree A 1 5 degree grid 9 30 minute grids 324 5 minute grids 8 100 1 minute grids or 202 500 12 second grids A 30 minute grid 36 5 minute grids 900 1 minute grids or 22 500 12 second grids A 5 minute grid 25 1 minute grids or 625 12 second grids A 1 minute grid 25 12 second grids Display Range 1 5 9 x 30 1 N A N A N A 4 20 degree minute 30 36x5 1 N A N A 6 20 minute minute 5 minute 25x1 324 36 1 N A 8 20 minute 1 minute 25 x 12 8 100 25 1 11 20 second 12 N A 202 500 22 500 625 25 13 20 second Exchanging Information with an Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchanging Maps Tracks Routes and Waypoints with Earthmate PN Series GPS You can use Topo USA to exchange waypoints tracks routes and maps with an Earthmate PN Series GPS device Click the Exchange button on the toolbar to open the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE Exchange on the Handheld Export tab or the GPS tab Before you begin you
329. splays 4 Release the arc It is snapped to the other object s point coordinate 152 Using the Draw Tools Adding Points to Draw Objects You can add points to routable road line spline and polygon draw objects to change the shape of the object To Add Points to Draw Objects Use the following steps to add points to add points to routable roads lines splines and polygons 1 In the Draw tab click the Select tool A and then click the draw object you want to edit A box displays around the line indicating it is active The shape points of the draw objects display as small magenta squares 2 Click the line between two shape points in the object and drag A new point is created as well as a new line segment within the object The new segment displays with its first and last end points as well as a text box indicating the new point s bearing or angle length of the new segment leg and total object s length on the map Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object click the Undo button to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button aj Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects You can delete points from routable road routable trail track line spline and polygon draw objects to change the shape of the object To Delete Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects Use the following steps to delete points and line segments from draw objects 1 Click
330. state ia us roadcons htm Outside IA www 51l1lia org 515 288 1047 www 511 ky gov ae Louisiana WWW www dotd state la us www dotd state la us la us Maine eee a be www state me us mdot homepage htm Manitoba 877 627 6237 877 627 6237 www qgov mb ca 204 945 3704 204 945 3704 Maryland 800 323 6742 877 229 7726 www sha state md us 410 545 0300 Massachusetts 617 374 1234 617 374 1234 www mass gov www mhd state ma us www eot state ma us 266 Recreational and Travel Contact Information 800 657 3774 601 987 1211 www www gomdot com com 800 222 6400 800 222 6400 ee Ce e Nevada 511 www nevadadot com traveler Outside NV 877 lt a NV 687 6237 877 687 6237 iia 800 561 4063 www gnb ca 0113 roadcond road conditions e asp New Hampshire 511 www state nh us dot traveler Atm Outside NH 866 282 7579 New J ersey Central 732 308 www state nj us transportation 4074 Northern 973 770 5025 Southern 609 saan 4940 New Mexico Mexico 800 432 4269 432 4269 800 432 4269 432 4269 WWW www nmshtd statenmus www nmshtd statenmus nm us New York NY Thruway www dot state ny us roads roads html 800 847 8929 Newfoundland Avalon 709 www roads gov nf ca 729 7669 Central 709 292 4444 East 09 466 4160 West 709 635 4144 Labrador 709 729 7888 North Carolina 919 733 2210 Serene www doh dot state nc us impact North Dakota Dakota www state www state nd us dot road html
331. state parks mountain peaks unique natural features points of interest and more View your maps in 3 D and fly over the terrain with shaded relief detailed land use land cover features and elevation contours Send highly detailed Topo USA and aerial imagery to a handheld device such as an Earthmate PN Series GPS device using the Handheld Export tab Use the split screen functionality to view two types of data for the same location at the same time Create trail road or direct routes by adding start and finish points on your map Customize your route by adding stops and vias Use the toolbar to share maps add data and images to the map open create save map files start stop GPS edit your preferences and more Profile map items and objects you draw add to the map to determine coordinate information linear distance elevation grade and so on Send receive tracks waypoints and routes to or from your Earthmate PN Series GPS or other compatible GPS device Print high quality detailed 2 D or 3 D single page maps and or mural maps as large as 3 x 3 pages You can even print your routes route directions and profiles Import loc files from www rgeocaching com to help find a cache location and import gpx files to include comments in the Draw tab that you can transfer to an Earthmate PN Series GPS Create custom keyrboard shortcuts or select a DeLorme shortcut scheme such as 3 D Navigation to navigate the program more easily than
332. sted Optional Modify the zoom levels for displaying the data on the device by adjusting the gray sliders The gray blocks represent the zoom levels at which data displays in Topo USA You cannot modify these zoom levels The green bars represent zoom levels where the data performs best The red bars represent zoom levels where the data may have a poor appearance and draw slowly on the device For more information see Setting Your Handheld Export Preferences Step 3 Find the location you want to include in your map You can find your map location using the Find tab search functionality the Search feature in the Handheld Export tab or by panning the map For this tutorial we are using the Handheld Export tab 1 Click the Handheld Export tab 2 Select the size of the grid for your map from the Grid Size list See Grid Size Comparisons for more information 3 Type the location in the Search for and select a location text box The list below the text box shows the closest matches 4 In the list click the location you want and then click HE Preview to see it on the map The default export area for that location is defined with shaded 33 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide ed E i R jy a ere a F AN i J x er TN a l zih i Pr or ja Ltr E n as 3 l 2 Once you select the coverage area type a name for your map package in the Save your Map for Exchange text box 3 Click Save A progress bar in
333. still be displayed To Layer Multiple Text or Graphic Items on a Printed Map Use the following steps to layer multiple text or graphic items on the map 1 Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab 2 Place more than one text or graphic item on your map see Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map placing the text graphic items on top of each other 3 If one of the text graphic items you want to display is partially underneath another text graphic item select the item you want to display right click and select Bring to Front To reverse this step right click the item and select Send to Back Tips e To make multiple text and graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the shortcut menu When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change e To delete multiple text graphic items select the Edit tool drag the mouse ina down right direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map When you print a map a yellow or black if you are using High Contrast Colors background automatically displays on the printout If you want a transparent background for example if you are printing transparencies you can change the Print settings to print with
334. symbol you want to edit 4 Click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays 5 Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid 6 Open a bitmap in another image editing program and select the bitmap or a part of the bitmap you want to copy Press CTRL C on your keyboard to copy the selection to the clipboard 7 Click the Paste button under Edit Symbol The copied image is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below 1 Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 9 To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol 10 Click OK when finished Notes e If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym a message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and the image is reduced e If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels the remaining area is filled to the edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors 173 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide As you create a symbol an image preview displays to the upper left of the Symbol Editing Grid You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid Any edits done in one view ar
335. t 1 tool the left map displays at zoom level 5 0 and the right map at 7 0 e The overview map in the tab area is always associated with the right map window e Other tab functionality may be affected by use of the split screen function as follows Draw The line and polygon draw tools work in either map window The Select tool h highlights the same draw object on both maps 71 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide and you can then manipulate both objects at the same time Draw files are created for both windows in the same project Route You can create routes only in the right window routes display in both windows GPS You can log with GPS in the right map window log playback displays in both windows 3 D The 3 D map always displays in the left map window Showing Hybrid Maps Raster data such as aerial and satellite data is image based and does not provide typical map information such as street names route numbers and so on The Hybrid Map feature in the left map window lets you overlay this type of map information onto raster data To Show Roads and Text Labels on Imagery Use the following steps to show roads road names and numbers names of bodies of water and more on imagery in the left map window 1 Ensure the left map window is displaying and your raster data such as Satellite Imagery Sat 10 or Aerial I magery DOQQ is displayed 2 At the top of the left map window select the raster dataset fr
336. t click the map at the location for the address book entry some of the information such as coordinates street name city state etc automatically complete the Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry dialog box To Manually Enter Address Book Information Use the following steps to manually enter address book information 1 Click the Find tab 2 Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box displays 3 Click New 4 Type select the contact s Name Street Address City State Abbreviation ZIP Postal Code Country Code Telephone Latitude if available and Longitude if available 5 Select how you want the contact to be geoplaced on the map from the Update Location drop down list 6 Click OK 7 Repeat steps 2 6 for each contact you want to add Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact You can center the map on any address book contact you have by simply using the Go To function in the Address Book dialog box e The Address Book has a 200 record limit e You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box e Your can resize and sort the columns inside the Address Book dialog box To Center the Map on an Address Book Contact Use the following steps to center the map on an address book contact 1 Click the Find tab 114 Using Address Book Contacts Click the Address Book button The DeLorme Address Book dialog box displays Click to select the contact Click Go To The map centers on
337. t in the log You can drag the slider forward or backward 40 Mims LT20 Test Previewing a GPS Log File There are two ways to view an existing GPS log You can play it back and watch it in real time point by point or you can preview it and view the entire log area without waiting for the playback to finish To Preview a Log File Use the following steps to preview a log file 1 2 E Ensure you are viewing a 2 D map You cannot preview a GPS log on a 3 D map Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display Click File and then click Open Single click the file you want to view The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box displays the start location start time start coordinate total distance duration finish location finish time finish coordinate and the number of readings for the selected log Click Open 213 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 7 Click File and then click File Preview The map centers on your log location Viewing File Details for a GPS Log If you want more information about your GPS log than just seeing where you ve been on the map the File Details feature in the GPS Log subtab can give you a variety of information about your journey For even more specific information about your log simply play back or preview your log and then right click a specific GPS point on the map to learn the date and time the point
338. t map are located at the top of the left map view Click the up arrow to zoom out one minor data zoom Data 3 9 1 level at a time Click the d t 7 eee E evel at a time Clic e down arrow to zoom in one minor data zoom level at a time Right d Click the Zoom In 1 tool to increase the detail Map i number to the next full level onto F Click the Zoom Out 1 tool to decrease the detail number to the next full level Tie Click the Zoom Out 3 tool to decrease the detail F number by three full levels Click the plus button to increase the detail number to the next full level Click the minus button to decrease the detail number to the next full level The data zoom level of the left map displays in the text area to the left of the buttons Left Map Controls e Press ALT PAGE UP on your keyboard to zoom out to the next full data zoom level Press ALT PAGE DOWN on your keyboard to zoom in to the next full data zoom level e Use the mouse wheel if available to zoom the map in and out Rotate the mouse wheel to zoom in by individual data zoom level steps or hold the SHIFT key while rotating the mouse wheel to zoom to the next full data zoom level Panning Centering the Map Use any of the following methods to pan move or center the map e Click anywhere on the current map view The point you click becomes the new map center e When you point near the map edge a white hand displays Drag the hand to move th
339. t to Computer screen highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER 44 Tutorials Step 2 Open the Exchange dialog Click the Exchange button F on the toolbar to open the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog box T Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange Ed Eathmate PM 40 wl Waypoint Layers a Waypoints im Track Layers 4p Tracks E Routes nE Routes He Saved Map Packages Senile g He Map Packages Step 3 Select the track to send to Topo USA 1 On the right side of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Tracks The track files on the device display in the tree view 2 Highlight a specific track to send that track or to send all tracks click Tracks Click Receive 4 Once the file is transferred click Done 45 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide T Earthmate PH Series GPS Exchange Eg Earthimate PH 40 2 Waypoint Layers Waypoints 4p Track Layers E a Tracks H E Routes dsm 30 Aug 08 032024 P RA Saved Map Packages Send oe ActiveTrack F oe Baxter Canoe Trip is oe Ducktail Pond l E oe GY Forest LE oe Hike to Sebago t Rotes Step 4 Open the file in Topo USA The track is saved in a Draw file To view the track click the File button in the Draw tab and double click the track name you want to convert Date Modified WaypointLayert Waypoint i g Monday August 16 2008 10 39 30 wyp Ducktail Pond Track it Monday September 08 2006 15 46 54
340. tab or the Handheld Export tab a eS A a a gt 253 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Receiving a GPS Log From Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive GPS logs created on your Pocket PC Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive GPS Logs From Your Pocket PC Device Use the following steps to receive GPS logs from your Pocket PC device Click the Exchange button i on the toolbar Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard Under Device Type select Pocket PC Select Receive from Device Select GPS Logs from the Object Type drop down list Click Next Select the GPS log you want to receive from the GPS Log drop down list Click Receive From Device Repeats the steps for each GPS log file you want to receive 10 Click Finish Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button CE Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab o Se eS a a Sending Waypoints to Your Pocket PC Device Use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your Pocket PC device To Send Waypoints Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Pocket PC device Click the Exchange button i on the toolbar 1 2 Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 3 Under Device Type select Pocket PC 4 Select Send to Device 5 Select User Map Data Waypoints from the Object Type drop down list 6 Click Next 7 From the Waypoint File drop down list sel
341. tab to display the advanced routing options or click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route To Start Stop Your GPS Connection To start or stop your GPS connection click the GPS button E on the toolbar If you are starting a connection the GPS tab area opens so you can monitor your GPS status Note The GPS button on the toolbar is a toggle button that lets you start your GPS connection if the device is not active or stop the connection if it is active To Exchange Files with a GPS or PDA Use the Exchange button i on the toolbar also on the GPS and Handheld Export tabs to exchange objects such as maps waypoints tracks and routes with a handheld device e If you have enabled an Earthmate PN Series GPS on your computer click the Exchange button to open the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog You can switch to another device from this dialog e If you have another GPS device a Palm OS device or a Pocket PC device click the Exchange button to open the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange dialog and then click Use Other Device For more information on exchanging objects see Help topics listed under Using Handheld Devices To Add Images and Data to a GPS Location To open the GeoTagger Wizard where you can combine images and data with GPS information on the map click the GeoTagger button Hj on the toolbar For more information see Getting Started with GeoTagger To Grab and Pan
342. te Plane coordinate system which specifies an area that covers the western half of Maine When using one these coordinate systems the current zone and coordinates east and north the eastings and northings of the zone origin are displayed Easting The measure of a position relative to the x axis horizontal of a grid system Northing The measure of a position relative to the y axis vertical of a grid system Profiling Linear Objects Latitude The measure of a position on the earth s surface north or south of the equator in degrees minutes and seconds Defined as the angle from the equator s horizontal plane perpendicular to the polar axis Latitude is measured in degrees minutes and seconds All lines of latitude are parallel and are often referred to as parallels Longitude The measure of a position on the surface of the earth east or west of the Prime Meridian in degrees minutes and seconds Defined as the angle from the vertical plane running through the polar axis and the prime meridian Longitude is measured in degrees minutes and seconds All lines of longitude meet at the poles and are often referred to as meridians Calculated from the start of the profile to the current cursor position If the cursor isn t in the profile area then the value is calculated from the start of the profile to the end of the profile This statistical information is available only if UTM UPS SPCS USNG or MGRS is sel
343. te of receipt the Warranty Period be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use If a defect in the media appears during the Warranty Period return all materials to DeLorme for replacement or at DeLorme s option refund of the license fee Disclaimer of Warranty DeLorme does not warrant the completeness or accuracy of the System or that its use will meet your needs or be uninterrupted or error free TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE THE SYSTEM IS LICENSED AS IS AND DELORME DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE No Consequential Damages IN NO EVENT SHALL DELORME BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT 281 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS EVEN IF DELORME HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES TERMINATION AND TRANSFER DeLorme may terminate this Agreement at any time for any reason including but not limited to if DeLorme finds that you have violated any of the terms of this Agreement or that you have attempted to exceed the licensed uses in any way Termination will be effective upon written notice to you Upon termination of this Agreement you agree to promptly return all copies of the System documentation and other material
344. te routes when you are on foot 3 Select a route type Road Shortest Road Quickest Trail or Direct from the drop down list Viewing Route Directions After you create a route you can view the accompanying route directions To View the Route Directions Use the following steps to view the route directions 197 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Click the Route tab and then click Directions to open the Route Directions dialog area The list of routes you have created display in the route list on the left A selected check box indicates the route Is displaying on the map Click a route to select and highlight it OR Double click a route to center it on the map The route directions for the selected route display in the right window Adjust the size of the tab area to expand the view Tip Click the header of a column to open a shortcut menu from which you can select the type of information you want to display in each column Click a leg to select it and then click Go To to center the map on the leg OR Double click a leg to center the map on the leg Tip When tracking with a GPS receiver select the GPS Track check box to follow along with the route directions in real time as you travel Click Show Turns to display the current distance and time to your finish Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing If you know you will be travelling in an area that is under construction or is a highly populated area with a lot of traffic con
345. the Copy button under Edit Symbol Click the Paste button E under Edit Symbol The copied image is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid Drag the pasted piece into the place you want it within the current symbol OR To create a new symbol with the copied image click New under Symbols in Set to clear the Symbol Editing Grid and then click the Paste button to add the pasted image into the grid Note You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To assign a symbol Using the Draw Tools name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol 9 Click OK when finished Notes e To undo an action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat an action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol Pasting a Bitmap into XSym You can copy a bitmap or part of a bitmap to the clipboard and paste the image into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol Ideally the pasted bitmap should be 24 x 24 pixels in size You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Paste a Bitmap into XSym Use the following steps to paste a bitmap into XSym 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool wh to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej 3 Under Symbols select the symbol set that contains the
346. the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and click the draw object you want to edit A box displays around the line indicating it is active The shape points of the linear objects display as small magenta squares 3 Select the shape point The point displays as either a green or red end point depending upon the line segment it is associated with 4 Click Delete in the Draw display area OR Press the DELETE key on your keyboard The point is deleted as well as the line segment within the draw object that was associated with that point Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object click the Undo button to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click the Redo button aj 153 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Labeling a Draw Object You can label any draw object Once you label a draw object you can search for it using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the draw object label in any of the routing fields in the Route tab To Label a Draw Object See the labeling procedures below for each of the draw objects For this Draw Use this labeling procedure Object Routable Roads Type the name of the street trail in the text box Routable Trails available in the Draw dialog area Arcs Place the object on the map ence Using the Select tool Al click the draw object Lines once Polygons A gray box displays around the draw object Rectangles Click the draw object a
347. the Map To drag and pan the 2 D or 3 D map in any direction click the Grab and Pan button w i on the toolbar To Create a Profile To create a profile 1 Center your 2 D map on the area with the linear object you want to profile OR Center the route you want to profile on the map 65 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 2 Click the Profile button on the toolbar be 3 Move your pointer over the map The pointer changes from to when it passes over an object that you can profile 4 Select a linear object or route on the map to generate its profile When the object is selected it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the Profile tab area Note Move your pointer along the elevation profile in the Profile graph The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top of the terrain profile These lines indicate the height and distance of the particular location A small crosshair follows along the corresponding object on the map You can also right click a linear object or route on the map and click Profile in the Shortcut menu For more information about profiles see the Help topics under Profiling Linear Objects To Measure Distance Use the following steps to measure linear distances and perimeter area on the map For more information see Measuring Distance and Area 1 Click the Measure tool Gad on the toolbar 2 Click point by point to draw a measurement line on the map A text box
348. the MapShare site by clicking Print in the upper right corner of the page 53 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Share Route Directions Click the option below to preview your route map and directions as they will appear on the MapShare site Preview Your Route Map and Directions Click the option below to e mail a link of your route map and directions to friends family and associates E mail the MapShare Link for Your Route Map and Directions Help Step 8 Exit the MapShare Wizard Click Close to exit the MapShare Wizard Tutorial Flying in 3 D The 3 D feature in Topo USA lets you fly over the 3 D map letting you simulate an upcoming hike or road trip This is great for when you want to get a feel for the elevation differences and surroundings along the way Step 1 Create a route Create a trail route using right click functionality the toolbar or the Route tab For more information on creating a route see the Creating a Route tutorial or Creating a Route Help topic 54 Tutorials Step 2 Save the route as a GPS log file Right click the calculated route and click Save as GPS Log File JHEB LER z a ee f m f s te p z a Ae a pare i i a i re a r a E a e dare ey r man A Sal ae ee te m Ca A ea 7 peal SAN i Aei i e me E te ea Tm 3 in hs a gt idly ae 3 r gt 1 An sss I i e aa UL REE e RN ee ae ee a A
349. the list and highlights up to 350 on the map If you right click again with all items selected you can select Copy to Clipboard point to Add and then click MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Address Book Entry or Waypoint or point to Route and click Insert Stop You must have the MapTags check box on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag Finding a Location on the Map Add Adds a MapTag MapNote Detailed MapNote Address Book Entry or Waypoint for the selected item or items You must have the MapTags check box on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag Route Places a start stop or finish point at that location on the map based on your selection The location is listed in the Start text box Stop text box or Finish text box in the Route tab e To locate an item on the map without moving the map single click an item in the results list It is highlighted on the map as long as it is in the current map view This is especially helpful when you are at the data zoom level you want but point labels are not displaying Notes To select multiple items press and hold the CTRL key while clicking up to 350 items in the results list If the items are listed continuously click the first item in the list and then press and hold the SHIFT key while clicking the last item you want e You can adjust column widths The new size is retained until changed again You cannot rearrange the column order Different search types result in different col
350. this Agreement you may not use the System Return all materials within thirty 30 days of receipt to the dealer from which you obtained them or to DeLorme for a full refund Any term or condition of an approved purchase order that differs from or adds to the terms or conditions of this License Agreement as well as any other modification or amendment to this Agreement will not be effective unless expressly agreed to in writing by both parties LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THE LICENSED SYSTEM The System consists of DeLorme s patented U S Pat Nos 4 972 319 5 030 117 5 559 707 5 802 492 and 6 321 158 other patents pending processes for the formatting storage retrieval and presentation of geographic and geographically related data DeLorme s copyrighted computer program for the use of those processes and related functions and compilations of geographic and supplemental data that are proprietary to DeLorme or its licensors The entire System including the software documentation data compilations screen displays and map printouts are protected by U S and foreign copyright You have no ownership rights in the System Rather you have a license to use the System as long as this Agreement remains in full force and effect YOUR USE OF THE SYSTEM Permitted Use This Agreement permits a registered user to use the System on a non exclusive basis for personal reference or business purposes on a single computer at one time You may install
351. ting roads and trails to display the yellow diamond symbol i The yellow diamond symbol indicates where on an existing road the point for your new road will connect connection point Notes e The new road must connect to an existing non limited access road for routing to occur on the new road e Each time you intersect an existing road or trail hover the mouse over the road trail to display the yellow diamond symbol and click to create a connection point before continuing to draw If you draw the line over the road trail without creating a connection point routing cannot occur along the intersection Once you locate the connection point for your new road or trail click the map to place the first point Click point to point or drag to add the new road trail to the draw layer The following information is available as you add each point in your road or trail e The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes e The distance and bearing angle of each new point from its previous point display in the corresponding text boxes To finish the line draw for the new road or trail enter the last point on the map screen and click Done The new road or trail displays on the map with the name you typed in the Road Trail Name text box You can also finish the line draw by pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard or double clicking while entering the last point of the line Drawing a Line Arc or Spline on the Map You c
352. tive object Shape points display as small magenta squares 3 Select an end point from any of the line segments within the draw object It displays as a red or green circle 4 Drag the point to e Any other shape point within a line spline polygon arc or rectangle e The center point of a circle e The anchor of a symbol e The base point of a text label e The text box anchor point of a MapNote When you drag your shape point 4 a point on the draw object a yellow diamond defines the snap point LY Release the point you dragged when the Snap point displays The active avi object is then snapped to the other object s point coordinate Tip To undo a draw object snap click Undo to undo the last action If you decide not to undo the last action click Redo Notes e Do not snap one end point of an arc to the other end point in the same arc e To turn the snapping feature off press the ALT key on the keyboard while dragging the draw object To Snap the Central Shape Point of an Arc to Another Object Use the following steps to snap the central shape point of the arc to another object 1 Click the Draw tab 2 Click the Select tool A and then click the arc on the map A box displays around the active object Shape points display as small magenta squares 3 While pressing the SHIFT key on the keyboard drag the center point of the arc line over a point on the draw object until the snap point the yellow diamond di
353. top right corner of the dialog box x x s Earthmate PMO T T E Earthmate GPS PN 20 a Delete Step 4 Send information from Topo USA to the device 1 Select the waypoints tracks and routes that you want to move from the computer to your device e Tosend waypoints to the device 1 On the left side of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Waypoint Layers The waypoint files in the current project display in the tree view 2 Click the plus sign next to each waypoint layer to view its contents 3 Highlight a specific waypoint to send that waypoint a waypoint layer to send all waypoints in that layer or Waypoint Layers to send all waypoint layers 4 Click Send e To send tracks to the device 1 On the left side of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Track Layers The track files in the current project display in the tree view 2 Click the plus sign next to each track layer to view its contents 3 Highlight a specific track to send that track a track layer to send all tracks in the track layer or Track Layers to send all track layers 4 Click Send e To send routes to the device 1 On the left side of the dialog box click the plus sign next to Routes The routes in the current project display in the tree view 2 Highlight a specific route to send that route or Routes to send all routes 3 Click Send 37 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 2 Click Done to close the dialog box
354. ts directory displays by default Browse to another location as needed Transfer files have dmt extensions 3 Click a file to select it The name displays in the File Name text box 4 Click Import The Browse for Folder dialog box displays 5 Select the folder where you want to save the hyperlinked files C DeLorme Docs Transfer Files is the default location 6 Click OK The imported project opens and displays in the map view E mailing a Transfer File You can package a project and its contents into a single file called a transfer file to facilitate e mailing or copying Note Transfer files do not include map data To E mail a Transfer File This procedure creates an attachment file but does not permanently save a file to C DeLorme Docs Projects Use the following steps to e mail a transfer file 1 Click the Map Files tab 98 Creating Editing and Saving Projects Open the project you want to e mail as a transfer file Click File click Transfer and then click E mail A transfer file is created and your computer s default operating system e mail program opens with the transfer file included as an attachment Address type your message and then send the mail according to the protocol of your e mail program 99 Finding a Location on the Map Performing a Basic Search Use the QuickSearch tab to locate trails mountains addresses cities and more To Perform a Basic Search Follow the steps below to use
355. tton a and then click the GPS Settings tab Using GPS 3 From the Device drop down list select the type of GPS receiver you are using If your device is not listed select Generic NMEA Note The Settings text box automatically displays the default settings for the selected device 4 From the Port drop down list select the communications port you are using to attach the GPS receiver to your computer See your computer manual for further information Manually change the location coordinates Each time you track via GPS the initialization process uses the coordinates from the last initialized location Use the following steps to change these coordinates to those of your choice 1 Connect your GPS receiver to your computer set the receiver to the mode specified in your owner manual and then turn the receiver on if necessary i g Options 2 Click the Options button and then click the GPS Settings tab 3 Under GPS Options verify that the Automatically Detect GPS check box is NOT selected 4 Type the coordinates in the available text boxes Note Coordinates display in the format specified in the Display tab of the Options dialog box OR Click Use Map Center to set the coordinates to the latitude and longitude of the current map center Update the date time options You can use the date and time on your computer or you can change the date and time settings used by the GPS device to those of your choice Use the
356. umn orders e There are two types of results lists Most searches provide a fixed number of results If all Scroll Browse of the results do not fit in the screen area a scroll bar Ba enon automatically displays 4 Name in ZIP Code searches Name in U S searches and Area Code Exchange searches provide results you can browse This means the entire database ks displays with the best match highlighted It is possible to continue browsing to the first or last item in the database lala Lb lbe Keywords for Category Searches Your DeLorme application recognizes hundreds of English words to generate both general and specific searches using category keywords Try entering words that seem appropriate Keyword Samples The list below shows a few of the categories and sample keywords Sample keywords may be listed in more than one category Boundaries Map and Surveying Border Boundary Contour Crosshair Grid Line Point ZIP Code 107 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Buildings and Structures Airport Bridge Business Landmark Library Businesses Hotel Gasoline Restaurant Pizza Education and Cultural College Local Park Park School State Park University Natural Features Beach Canyon Crater Desert Forest Glacier Hill Island Mountain River Stream Valley Water Miscellaneous Cemetery Hiking Mine Note Park Object Types All of the stock draw symbols such as blue map pi
357. us of the current map center or within a particular region To access the search features in Topo USA click the Find tab For more information on searching for specific locations see Performing a Basic Search and or Performing an Advanced Search How do perform an Along the Way search in the Find tab and print my results Search for names or categories along your current route by performing an advanced search in the Find tab You can then print your search results using the Along the Way print option Use the following steps to search for a name category along your current route and print the results 1 Click the Find tab and then click Advanced The Advanced dialog area displays Select Category from the From drop down list Select CurrentRoute from the Within drop down list Type the appropriate keyword in the Keywords text box Type the distance in the Distance text box Click Search The search results display in the dialog area 7 Click the Print tab and then click Route The Route dialog area displays 8 Select the Along the Way check box 9 Click Print Now The search results print How can run Topo USA without having to use DVD to access data a E a You can save Topo USA data to your computer s hard drive so that it is readily available when you need it For more information see Saving Topo USA Data to Your Hard Drive How do submit a data update or fix the roads on my map e If you find ther
358. ute You can also designate e Your method of transportation car bicycle or on foot e The route calculation road quickest road shortest direct or trail e Special routing preferences such as establishing speeds for particular road types preferred roads roads to avoid and more You can also create a route on a map using the right click function or with the route buttons on the toolbar These two features let you create routes while using any tab 42 Tutorials in the program For more information on using these alternative methods see Creating a Route For more information about adding stops and vias see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias This tutorial provides steps for creating a hiking trail route with the Route tab Step 1 Set the route start Click the Route tab and type the start location for your route in the Start text box Roaring Brook Campground MEI Step 2 Add a stop Assign your first stop by typing it in the Stop text box Since you are adding your stops in the order you want to reach them along your route make sure the Add option is selected and then click Add to assign the stop Note The Stop text box clears itself after you click the Add button This allows you to use the text box to add more stops Step 3 Add a second stop Assign your second stop using the same D AGS in step 2 Step 4 Add the route finish Since you want to finish your route where you started use
359. ute will fail to calculate if you create a route e With a route start stop via or finish point in an area that you have designated as a Route Avoid e That includes route points outside the United States e Onan island without roads In this case Topo USA looks for the nearest road to that island to place the route point If the nearest road is not routable for example it is the only road on the island and or the island does not have ferry access you will get an error message saying Route failed to calculate Why do X marks display on the map when calculate a route e When you place a route point in a location that isn t on a street Topo USA finds the closest street to that location marks the space between Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide the point you clicked and the street with X marks and starts the route at the street e f you search for an address that is on a walkway and place a route point on it Topo USA finds the closest street to that location marks the space between the point the clicked and the street with X marks and starts the route at the street e Why is the tab area and control panel so narrow Topo USA was designed to accommodate resolutions of 800 x 600 or higher If you are using a very high resolution such as 1920x 1200 the tab area and control panel may appear to be very narrow You can modify the size of the map and tab area or use the Windows Control Panel to adjust your display settings
360. vate it and then click Enter Note If you bypass this screen you can enter your certificate key later Step 3 Select the coverage area 1 From the Delivery Method drop down list select Download 2 Click the Select button L_ amp Select and then click inside the grids that cover the area you want to download The selected grids are highlighted The blue info box updates to show information about the download H one i BFUCcE Hill See asus hap ay Method s Select s Select Certificate Balance 40 00 Download Clear Clear i m Add To List Step 4 Add the imagery to your download 1 Click the Add to List button Add To List to name and add the selected areas to your selection list 39 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 2 Type the name of your map in the Name Your Selection box and then click OK T Name Your Selection Name your Selection Yarmouth letters numbers and spaces only Cancel OK Step 5 Complete your order Click Checkout to complete the ordering process Note If the order exceeds 40 you must pay the difference or purchase a subscription If the order is less than 40 your certificate number is credited with the difference 40 T Selections List Yarmouth ME a Download Time 200k Order Summary Color DOGG Download 10 00 Order Total 10 00 Tutorials 10 km of Color DOQQ 2 f minutes Shop On Checkout History Certificate Key DSDVDN 3
361. ving Waypoints 247 251 256 Recenter Map on GPS 207 211 Recreational Contacts 5 272 RECEANGICysiccitesediecreusiadvbinedvenedies 161 Reference Card cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 89 Relocating Address Book Contacts 117 Removing a SyMbol 000eeees 175 Renaming a Custom Scheme 87 Renaming a Draw Object 150 Renaming a Project cc cece eee 63 Reordering the Tabs 000 82 Reordering the Toolbar 05 63 RESIZE TOONS paene anes enemas 69 Resizing the Map and Tab Areas 69 Reverse Rte cc cece ccce eee eeeeeees 200 ROGGL AY e anisa Mine 135 ROaGS MINOT erouns arenis aA 74 Rotate Map in GPS Direction 207 Routable Roads 154 157 159 Routable Trails 154 157 159 Route 64 146 195 197 200 201 202 203 204 Route Avoid ccc cece ce eeseeee eee e ees 198 Route Directions ccccee eee ees 197 ROUTE ProfS errei 202 S Satellite LIStING cccceeeee eee 216 SALCIIEGS noar ren N A 218 Save as GPS Log File 143 205 Saving a Draw File 0000es 136 Saving a Map as a Bitmap or J PEG IMAGE sexi cebaietentcseactivecstetereeiadedes 15 Saving a Project cccee ees 63 95 Saving a ROUte c cece eee e eee 203 Saving a Track as a GPS Log 143 Saving Route Directions as Text 199 Scale BOE rroia e A 21 S Cal Ci
362. was obtained as well as the speed bearing elevation and GPS status for that particular point To View File Details for a GPS Log Use the following steps to view log file details Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display Click File and then click Open Select the file you want to view details for and then click Open Click File and then click File Details A dialog box displays the following information about your log e Start time e Acquisition time e Finish time e Distance e Average speed e Maximum speed e Average elevation e Minimum elevation e Maximum elevation e Average GPS status e Number of the times the GPS fix was lost e Number of readings that were obtained e Acquisition street e Acquisition location e Finish street e Finish location e Acquisition coordinate e Finish coordinate e Time from start to finish e Time for acquisition e Time from initial acquisition to finish e Time moving e Time stopped e File owner Ye Wna 214 Using GPS e File comments e File path e File size 6 Click OK to exit the dialog box Monitoring Your GPS Status Once you initialize your GPS and begun tracking you can continue to monitor the status of your GPS connection your speed heading elevation position according to your preferred coordinate format and satellite data Status information accuracy Is affected by spee
363. white 1 meter resolution digital aerial photography e NOAA Nautical Charts Scanned Maps Color bathymetric nautical charts produced by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA e USGS Hi resolution 133 City Aerial Imagery Color aerial imagery over the country s largest metropolitan areas with a resolution of approximately 1 3 meter or about 1 foot 257 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide Downloads View and receive downloads and software updates If you have an Earthmate PN Series GPS you can also access firmware updates Support Your connection to DeLorme links to technical support the forums the DeLorme blogs and more You can also submit a map correction to us 258 Using GeoTagger Getting Started with GeoTagger Use the GeoTagger Wizard to e Sync digital photos with GPS log files gpl and track files anl and tag them to the location you took them You can place images as an actual image on the map a MapNote with a hyperlink or a symbol with a hyperlink e Match GPS logs and tracks to time related information downloaded from Supported devices For example you can download a track that includes your heart rate from an athletic device and view the data in the Profile tab The program uses the following file formats Suunto sdf Timex Trainer CSV csv or Generic CSV File csv To open the GeoTagger Wizard click the GeoTagger i button on the toolbar Important Make sure
364. wn the ALT key on your keyboard while dragging the text graphic items on the map To Snap Text and Graphic Items on Your Map Use the following steps to snap text and graphic items on a printed map 1 Add text or graphics to your map 2 Drag the text graphic item s you placed on the map to the location you want them on the map If you drag the item s to the edge of the map print area the text graphics snap to the edge If you drag the item s to the horizontal center of the edge of the map print area the text graphics snap to the center 125 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide of the edge You can also drag the item s to the center of the map print area to snap them at the center of the printed map Tips e To make multiple text and graphic items the same size press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and select each item Then right click select Make Same Size and select Width Height or Both from the shortcut menu When you attempt to make multiple items the same size the largest item is always the basis for the size change e To delete multiple text graphic items select the Edit tool drag the mouse ina down right direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete and then press the DELETE key on your keyboard Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map You may want to layer text or graphic items on your printed map In this case use the right click Bring to Front Send to Back options so that each can
365. words in any order You get the same results using Local Road as for Road Local e A keyword may find categories related to the word rather than including the word e Use the word or in the Keywords text box to search for multiple categories For example pizza or fast food MapTags Converting Moving Hiding and Deleting When you search for and go to a Find search result a yellow MapTag displays at that location if the MapTags check box on the Find tab is selected If MapTags are cluttering your view of the map you can move the text area of the MapTag hide them from view or delete one several or all MapTags To Convert MapTags to MapNotes To change all of the MapTags on the map to MapNotes which can be retained when you save the project right click the map click Manage Draw and then click Convert All MapTags to MapNotes A new draw layer called MapNotes is created in your project To Move a MapTag You cannot detach a MapTag from its anchor point you can move only the text area Use the following steps to move the MapTag text area 1 Use the Find tab search for a place street address coordinate category item or street intersection MapTags are placed on the map at each point you locate 2 Click the Select tool bee 3 Click the text area for the MapTag you want to move and drag it to the position on the map where you want it The anchor point does not move 4 Click the Select tool again to resume
366. ymbol on the map the Symbol Name displays in the demographic information area when you right click the symbol and select I nfo Importing a Bitmap You can import a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol but any bitmap you import must be 24 x 24 pixels or less You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program To Import a Bitmap Use the following steps to import a bitmap to use as a symbol L 2 Click the Draw tab Click and hold the Symbol MapNote Text Label I mage tool U Te to view its hidden options Select the Symbol tool ej Under Symbols click Edit The DeLorme XSym dialog box displays Under Symbols in Set click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid Click Import to display the Open Bitmap File dialog box Browse to the location of the bitmap and click Open The imported bitmap displays in the Symbol Editing Grid See important Notes below Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to edit the symbol e To undo the last action click the Undo button under Edit Symbol e To repeat the last action click the Redo button under Edit Symbol 171 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1 User Guide 7 Notes To assign a symbol name to the current symbol type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set each occurrence of that symbol you place
367. your mapping program To Receive a Route From Your Palm OS Device Use the following steps to receive a route from your Palm OS device Click the Exchange button E on the toolbar L 2 Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 3 Under Device Type select Palm OS 4 Select Receive from Device 5 Select Route from the Object Type drop down list 6 Select Route from the Save As drop down list to save your route as a route file 7 Click Next 8 Select the route file on the device that you want to receive 9 Select the route file you want to add the route information to To create a new route file select New from the Route drop down list and type the new route name in the text box 10 Click Receive From Device 11 Repeats the steps for each route file you want to receive 12 Click Finish The route information displays Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button E Exchange on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab Receiving Waypoints From Your Palm OS Device Use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints created on your Palm OS device Once imported you can use the file in your mapping program To Receive Waypoints From Your Palm OS Device Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Palm OS device Click the Exchange button on the toolbar 1 2 Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard 3 Under Device Type select Palm OS 4 Select Re
368. ystem of 1984 e NAD27 North American Datum of 1927 which also includes OOH Old Hawaiian Datum when in Hawaii e NAD83 North American Datum of 1983 Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box OR Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog box UTM UPS and MGRS coordinate systems are best used with NAD27 datum 95 of the USGS quads containing UTM grid lines uses the NAD27 datum which is helpful if you are comparing a map generated from Topo USA to a USGS map If the USNG coordinate system is not matched with NAD83 datum a warning message displays unless you selected the Do Not Show This Message Again option If the UTM UPS or MGRS coordinate system is mismatched to WGS84 datum a warning message displays unless you selected the Do Not Show This Message Again option The State Plane Coordinate System originally used NAD27 datum and was measured in statute miles Some states have updated their systems to WGS84 datum and or kilometers If you are working with a site map verify the datum distance measures and zone used and match them in Topo USA To Change the Distance Preferences Distance preferences affect how distance and areas display throughout the program Use the following steps to change the measurement units for distance and area in Topo USA 7 0 1 Heo tion Click the Options button ini on the toolbar and then click the Display tab 79 Topo USA 7 0 SP 1

Topo USA 7.0 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents